SlideShare a Scribd company logo
7

                     Learner’s Material
                                        (Second Part)




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)           1
2   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
7

             Learner’s Material
                                 (Second Part)




                                  GOVERNMENT PROPERTY
                                      NOT FOR SALE
                                       ALLOTTED TO
          District/ School: _________________________________________
          Division _________________________________________________
          First Year of Use:_________________________________________
          Source of Fund (Year included):__________________________



                                Kagawaran ng Edukasyon
                                  Republika ng Pilipinas



                                                    i




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                       3
Science- Grade 7
    Learner’s Material: Second Part
    First Edition, 2012
    ISBN: ___________

              Republic Act 8293, section 176 indicates that: No copyright shall subsist in any
    work of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government
    agency or office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work
    for profit. Such agency or office may among other things, impose as a condition the payment
    of royalties.
    Published by the Department of Education
    Secretary: Br. Armin Luistro FSC
    Undersecretary: Dr. Yolanda S. Quijano



                       Development Team of the Learner’s Material
      Unit 3: Energy in Motion

      Reviewer: Josefina Ll. Pabellon
      Coordinator: Merle C. Tan
      Authors: Alvie J. Asuncion, Leticia V. Catris, Cerilina M. Maramag,
               and Marie Paz E. Morales

      Unit 4: Earth and Space

      Reviewers: Eligio C. Obille Jr., Risa L. Reyes, and Merle C. Tan
      Coordinator: Merle C. Tan
      Authors: Ivy P. Mejia, Eligio C. Obille Jr., and Merle C. Tan

      Illustrators: Alvin J. Encarnacion, Rizaldo Ramoncito S. Saliva
      Layout Artist: Cecile N. Sales




    Inilimbag sa Pilipinas ng ____________

      Department of Education-Instructional Materials Council Secretariat (DepEd-IMCS)
                                  nd
      Office Address:            2 Floor Dorm G, PSC Complex, Meralco Avenue. Pasig
                                 City, Philippines 1600
      Telefax:                   (02) 634-1054 or 634-1072
      E-mail Address:            imcsetd@yahoo.com




4                                                        Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
                                                       (2nd Part)

 Unit 3: Energy in Motion
                                                                                                                                      Page

          Module 1. Describing Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              3
            Activity 1: Where is it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           4
            Activity 2: My home to school roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          9
            Activity 3: Fun walk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        11
            Activity 4: Doing detective work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  14

          Module 2. Waves Around You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                17
            Activity 1: Let’s Make Waves! What happens when waves pass by?. . . . . . . .                                             18
            Activity 2: Anatomy of a Wave: How do you describe waves? . . . . . . . . . . . .                                         23
            Activity 3: Mechanical vs. Electromagnetic Waves: How do waves
                        propagate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          27

          Module 3. Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     35
            Activity 1: My own sounding box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   36
            Activity 2: Properties and characteristics of sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                             40
            Activity 3: Big time gig! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         46

          Module 4. Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    49
            Activity 1: Light sources: Langis kandila or lampara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                                 50
            Activity 2: My spectrum wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    53
            Activity 3: Colors of light – color of life! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     57
            Activity 4: Light up straight! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               62

          Module 5. Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     65
            Activity 1: Warm me up, cool me down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                           66
            Activity 2: Which feels colder? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                69
            Activity 3: Move me up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             72
            Activity 4: Keep it cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           74
            Activity 5: All at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          76

          Module 6. Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      79
            Activity 1: Charged interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 80
            Activity 2: To charge or not to charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     83
            Activity 3: Pass the charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              85
            Activity 4: When lightning strikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                   86
            Activity 5: Let there be light! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              87




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                                                      5
Unit 4: Earth and Space
                                                                                                                          Page

    Module 1. The Philippine Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              91
      Activity 1: Where in the world is the Philippines (Part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                        91
      Activity 2: Where in the world is the Philippines (Part II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                       95
      Activity 3: What are some factors that will affect the amount
                  of water in the watersheds?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              100
      Activity 4: How is soil formed from rocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                102
      Activity 5: Where are the mineral deposits in the Philippines? . . . . . . . . . . . .                              105
      Activity 6: How do people destroy natural resources? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          116
      Activity 7: Are you ready for “Make-a-Difference” Day? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            117

    Module 2. Solar Energy and the Atmosphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     119
      Activity 1: What is the basis for dividing Earth’s atmosphere into layers? . . .                                    119
      Activity 2: Does a greenhouse retain or release heat? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         122
      Activity 3: What happens when air is heated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                      128
      Activity 4: What happens to the air in the surroundings as warm air rises?. .                                       130
      Activity 5: Which warms up faster? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              132
      Activity 6: In what direction do winds blow–from high to low pressure
                  area or vice versa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       136

    Module 3. Seasons and Eclipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .        145
      Activity 1: Why do the seasons change? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  146
      Activity 2: How does the length of daytime and nighttime affect
                  the season? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   150
      Activity 3: Are there shadows in space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                  154
      Activity 4: Does a Bakunawa causes eclipses? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    159




6                                                                  Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)   1
2   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Suggested time allotment: 8 to 10 hours




   MODULE


         1                   DESCRIBING MOTION

     Many of the things around us move. Some move slowly like the turtles
and clouds, others move much more quickly like the satellites. Because
motion is so common, it seems to be very simple. But in science, describing
motion actually entails careful use of some definitions.

      This module provides you with scientific knowledge and skills
necessary to describe motion along a straight path. You will learn to
describe the motion of objects in terms of position, distance travelled, and
speed. You will also learn to analyze or represent motion of objects using
charts, diagrams, and graphs. While these all provide the same information
about the motion of objects, you will find out that one may be more helpful
than the other depending on your particular objective.

      At the end of this module, you are expected to answer the following
questions:


                        When can we say that an object is in motion?
                        How do we describe the motion of an object?




Where?

       Before you will be able to describe the motion of an object, you must
first be able to tell exactly where it is positioned. Describing exact position
entails two ideas: describing how far the object is from the point of reference
and describing its direction relative to that point of reference. You will learn
about the importance of point of reference and direction when you perform
Activity 1.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                        3
Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       85
Activity 1
    Where is it?

    Objective

          In this activity, you should be able to describe in words the position of
    an object within the room or the school ground.

    Procedure
    1.    Obtain from your teacher the piece of paper that describes where you
          will find the object.
          Q1. Were you able to find the object? Was it easy or difficult?
          Q2. Is the instruction clear and easy to follow? What made it so?

    2.    Put back the object to its place, if you found it. Otherwise, ask your
          teacher first where it is located before you move on to the next step.

    3.    Revise the instruction to make it more helpful. Write it on a separate
          sheet of paper and let another group use it to find the object.
          Q3. Were they successful in finding the object? Was it easy for them or
              difficult?
          Q4. What other details or information included in your instruction that
              made it clearer and easier to follow?
          Q5. In your own words, what is point of reference and how important it
              is?


    Describing through visuals
          The position of an object can be described in many ways. You can use
    words, like what you did in Activity 1. You can also use visuals, like
    diagrams or graphs. Use the examples to explore how these help in
    providing accurate descriptions of positions of objects.


             Using diagrams
          Consider the diagram in Figure 1. The positions of the objects are
    described in the diagram by their coordinates along the number line.



4                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
    Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                          86
-15m            -10m             - 5m                0m         5m               10m   15m
                                              Figure 1


       Q6. What is the position of the dog?
       Q7. What is the position of the tree?
       Q8. What is the position of the dog with respect to the house?
       Q9. What is the position of the tree with respect to the dog?


       Here is another example. In this diagram, the positions of the ball
rolling are shown at equal intervals of time. You can use the diagram to
describe the position of the ball at any given time.


 (Timer)          00 : 00                   00 : 05                   00 : 10            00 : 15
                  min   sec                 min     sec               min   sec          min   sec




                    0m                       5m                       10m                 15m

                                                      Figure 2


       Q10. What is the initial position of the ball? What is its final position?
       Q11. What is the position of the ball at 10 seconds?
       Q12. At what time is the position of the ball equal to 5 meters?


           Using graphs

      Another way to describe the motion of the ball is by the use of motion
graphs. Convert the diagram in Figure 2 to graph by following the guide
below.

I. Fill up Table 1 using the data in Figure 2. Note that the positions of the
   ball are shown every 5 seconds.



Grade 77Science: Learner’sIn Motion (Second Part)
 Grade Science: Energy Material                                                                 87
                                                                                                 5
Table 1: Position of the ball vs time
                                Time (s)       Position of the ball
                                                       (m)
                                     0                  0




    II. Plot the values in Table 1 as points on the graph in Figure 3. Note that
        time is plotted on the X-axis while position is plotted on the Y-axis. An
        example is given below.




                                15
                 Position (m)




                                10



                                5                                             (20s, 5m)




                                0          5      10         15          20

                                                                         Time (s)
                                                 Figure 3




    III.    Lastly, draw a straight diagonal line through the points in the graph.


          The graph that you have just drawn in Figure 3 is called position-time
    graph. You can also use this graph to describe the position of the ball at any
    given time. For example, if you are asked to find the position of the ball at
    10 seconds, all you need to do is to find the point along the diagonal line
    where the vertical line at the 10 second-mark intersects (Figure 4). Then find
    where the horizontal line from that point of intersection will cross the Y axis,
    which is the position axis. This will give you the position of the ball at 10
    seconds.




6                                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
    Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                      88
Point of
                                                    intersection




                                     Position (m)
                                           0                   10   Time (s)

                                                       Figure 4




      Now try answering the following questions using your own position-
time graph.
      Q13. What is the position of the ball at 7.5 seconds?
      Q14. At what time is the position of the ball equal to 12.5 meters?



How Far?
       In   science,   motion     is                                        N
defined as the change in position
                                                                        W      E
for a particular time interval. You
                                                10m
can then start describing motion                          5m                S
with the question, “How far did                10m
the object travel?” There are
actually two ways to answer this
question. First is by getting the
                                                 Figure 5
total length of the path travelled
by the object. In Figure 5 for
example, the dog ran 10m to the east, then 5m to the south, and another
10m to the west. So it has travelled a total of 25 meters. The other way is by
measuring the distance between the initial position and final position of the
object. Based again on Figure 5, the dog has travelled 5 meters to the south.
      In science, the first measurement gives the distance travelled by the
object (represented by broken lines) while the second measurement gives its
displacement (represented by continuous line).


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                7
Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              89
Here are more illustrations showing the difference between distance
    travelled (represented by broken lines) by an object and its displacement
    (represented by continuous lines).




                                    a.
                                                                                       b.




                                                  c.

                                                   Figure 6


           Can you give one difference between distance and displacement based
    on the given examples? When can displacement be equal to zero? Is it
    possible to get zero displacement? What if the ball, the car, and the dog in
    the illustration go back to their starting positions, what will happen to their
    respective distances? How about their displacements? If you answered these
    questions correctly, then you have most probably understood the difference
    between distance and displacement.


             Distance refers to the length of the entire path that the object
              travelled.
             Displacement refers to the shortest distance between the object’s two
              positions, like the distance between its point of origin and its point of
              destination, no matter what path it took to get to that destination.


          When a graph is plotted in terms of the distance travelled by the
    object and the time it took to cover such distance, the graph can be called
    distance-time graph. If the graph is plotted in terms of displacement and

8                                                      Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
    Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                90
time, it is called displacement-time graph.                       Refer to the graph in Figure 7.
  What is the displacement of the object                             after 2 seconds? What is its
  displacement after 6 seconds? How will you                        describe the motion of the object
  between 0s and 2s, between 2s and 4s, and                         between 4s and 6s?



                          Displacement (m)   4

                                             3

                                             2

                                             1

                                             0
                                                 1   2   3      4      5       6
                                                                    Time (s)
                                                     Figure 7




  Activity 2
  My home to school roadmap

  Objective
      In this activity you should be able to make a roadmap that shows how
  you get to school from your house.

  Procedure
  1.    Devise a way to easily measure distance. Let your teacher check your
        non-standard measurement for precision.
  2.    Using your measuring device, gather the data that you will need for
        your roadmap. Make sure that you take down notes of all names of the
        roads, landmarks, corners, posts, and establishments you pass by.
        Record your data properly.
  3.    Using your gathered data, draw your house-school roadmap on a short
        bond paper. Decide on the most convenient scale to use when you
        draw your roadmap. An example is shown below.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                 9
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                               91
1 cm                                                     Scale: 1 cm = 1 km
                                      2 km
                     5 km


                                        3 km


                                          Figure 8


  4.    Label your roadmap properly, including names                      of    the    roads,
        establishments, etc. Specify also the length of road.
  5.    Finally, let your teacher check again your work.
        Q1. What is the total length of your travel from your house to your
            school?
        Q2. What is the total displacement of your travel?



  How fast?

        After determining how far the object moves, the next question will be
  “How fast did the object move?” This information can be provided by the
  object’s speed or velocity.

        Are you familiar with the traffic signs below? These signs tell us the
  maximum or minimum speed limits allowed by law for road vehicles. In
  general, the minimum speed limit in the Philippines is 60 km/h and the
  maximum speed limit is 100 km/h.
       What are the units used in the above examples of speed limits? What
  quantities do these units represent that are related to speed?




10Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           92
                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Activity 3
Fun walk

Objective
      In this activity you should be able to gather data to determine who
walks fastest.

Procedure
1.     Start by choosing a spacious place to walk straight.
2.     Half of the group will walk while the other half will observe and record
       data.
3.     Mark on the ground the starting line. All participants must start from
       the starting line at the same time.
4.     Upon receiving the go signal, all participants must start to walk as fast
       as they could. The other members should observe closely as the
       participants walk and determine who walks fastest.
5.     Repeat #4 but this time, collect data to support your conclusion.
       Discuss within your group how you are going to do this.
       Q1. What quantities did you measure for your data?
       Q2. How did you combine these quantities to determine how fast each
           participant was walking?
       Q3. How did you use the result to determine who walked fastest?


Speed
     The questions in the above activity are actually referring to speed. If
you know the speed of each participant, you can tell who is the fastest.
Speed is defined as distance travelled divided by the time of travel.


                                      dis tan ce travelled
                           speed 
                                         time of travel

The units of speed can be miles per hour (mi/h), kilometres per hour
(km/h), or meters per second (m/s).


       Q4. At constant distance, how is speed related to the time of travel?

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                              11
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                             93
Q5. At constant time to travel, how is speed related to the distance
           travelled?
       Q6. Who was travelling faster than the other, a person who covered 10
           meters in 5 seconds or the one who took 10 seconds to cover 20
           meters?

 Speed and direction

        In describing the motion of an object, we do not just describe how fast
 the object moves. We also consider the direction to where it is going. Speed
 with direction is referred to as velocity. The sample weather bulletin below
 will show you the importance of knowing not just the speed of the storm but
 also its direction.

 Table 2: Sample weather bulletin
   Weather Bulletin: Tropical Storm "Juaning"
   Wednesday, 27 July 2011 at 09:27:14 AM
   Location of          90 km East of Infanta,
   Center               Quezon

   Coordinates          14.8°N, 122.5°E

   Strength of the      Max. wind speed of 85 km/hr near the center & gustiness of up to 100
   winds                km/hr

   Movement             11km/hr going West-Northwest

   Forecast             On Wednesday AM: Expected to make landfall over Polillo Island
                        between 8am to 10am and over Southern Aurora by 1pm to 3pm and
                        will traverse Central Luzon


       Whenever there is a storm coming, we are notified of its impending
 danger in terms of its speed and direction. Aside from this, we are also
 informed about its strength. Do you know that as the storm moves, its
 winds move in circles? The circular speed of the winds of the storm
 determines its strength. Different storm signals are given in places
 depending on the circular speed of the winds of the storm and the distance
 from the center.

       Study again the weather bulletin above. Which is the speed for the
 circular motion of the typhoon winds? Which is the speed for the motion of
 the storm as a whole along the path? How important are speed and direction
 in determining the weather forecast for the next hours?




12                                                  Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                               94
Constant speed vs instantaneous speed

        If you solved for the distance travelled by each participant over the
 time he took to cover such distance, then you have computed for his
 average speed. But why average speed and not just speed? It is considered
 average speed because it represents the speed of the participant throughout
 his travel. During his travel, there were instants that his speed would vary.
 His speed at an instant is called instantaneous speed. Similarly, the velocity
 of a moving body at an instant is called instantaneous velocity. The
 instantaneous speed may be equal, greater than, or less than the average
 speed.

     When an object’s instantaneous speed values are always the same, then
 it means that the object is moving with constant speed. We refer to this as
 constant motion. Where you will be and what time you will reach your
 destination is easily predicted when you move at constant speed or velocity.

     Are you familiar with the speedometer? Speedometer is a device used to
 measure the instantaneous speed of a vehicle. Speedometers are important
 to the drivers because they need to know how fast they are going so they
 know if they are already driving beyond the speed limit or not.




 How fast is the velocity changing?
       In reality, objects do not
 always move at constant velocity.
 Storms like “Juaning” also do
 change their speeds, directions, or
 both. The next activity will help
 you analyze examples of motion
 with changing velocities (or with
 changing speed, since we are only
 trying to analyze examples of
 motion in only one direction) using                    Source: http://drrm.region4a.dost.gov.ph/

 tape charts and motion graphs.
                                                    Figure 9. Track of tropical storm “Juaning”




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                   13
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                  95
Activity 4
 Doing detective work

  Consider this situation below:

      Supposed you were having your on-the-job training in a private
      investigating company. You were asked to join a team assigned to
      investigate a ‘hit and run’ case. The alleged suspect was captured by
      the CCTV camera driving down a road leading to the place of incident.
      The suspect denied the allegation, saying that he was then driving
      very slowly with a constant speed. Because of the short time
      difference when he was caught by the camera and when the accident
      happened, he insisted that it was impossible that he would already be
      at the place when the crime happened. But when you were viewing
      the scene again on the camera, you noticed that his car was leaving
      oil spots on the road. When you checked these spots on site, you
      found out that they are still evident. So you began to wonder if the
      spots can be used to investigate the motion of the car of the suspect
      and check whether he was telling the truth or not.

         Here is an activity that you can do to help you with your investigation.
  You will analyze the motion using strips of papers with dots. For this
  activity, assume that the dots represent the ‘oil drops’ left by the car down
  the road.

  Materials
         ruler
         paper strips with dots
         cutter or pair of scissors

  Procedure

  A. Using tape chart
  1. Obtain from your teacher paper strips with dots.
  2. Label each dot. Start from 0, then 1, 2, 3, and so on. In this example,
     each dot occurred every 1 second.
                1 sec



               0    1      2      3
                                         Figure 10
14Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
                                                                                           96
3. Examine the distances between successive dots.
     Q1. How will you compare the distances between successive dots?
4. Cut the strip at each drop, starting
   from the first to the last drop, and                                                       4
   paste them side by side on a graph
                                                                                         3
   paper to form a tape chart as
                                                                                    2
   shown in Figure 11.
                                                                              1
     Q2. How do the lengths of the tapes
         compare?
                                                                           Figure 11. Sample tape chart

      Q3. If each tape represents the distance travelled by the object for
          1 second, then what ‘quantity’ does each piece of tape provide?
      Q4. What does the chart tell you about the speed of the car?

 The difference in length between two successive tapes provides the object’s
 acceleration or its change in speed or velocity for a time interval of
 1 second.
      Q5. How will you compare the changes in the lengths of two successive
          tapes?
      Q6. What then can you say about the acceleration of the moving car?


B. Using motion graphs                                              Table 3
5. Measure the distance travelled                                   Time of travel (s)   Distance travelled (m)
   by the car after 1 second, 2                                               1
   seconds,    and     so on   by                                             2
   measuring the distance between                                             3
   drops 0 and 1, 0 and 2, and so                                             4
   on. Enter your measurements in                                             5
   Table 3 on the right.


6. Plot the values in Table 3
   as points on the graph in
                                                    Distance (cm)




   Figure 12 on the right.


      Q7. How does your
          distance-time graph
          look like?
                                                                      0
                                                                                                      Time (sec)
                                                                                  Figure 12
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                            15
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                           97
7. Join the mid-points of the tops
    of the tapes with a line. You
                                                                                        4
    have now converted your tape




                                             Speed (cm/s)
    chart to a speed-time graph.                                                 3

     Q8. How does you graph look                                          2
         like? How is this different
                                                                   1
         from your graph in Figure
         12?
                                                                    1      2     3      4        Time (s)
     Q9. How will you interpret this
         graph in terms of the speed                                       Figure 13
         and acceleration of the
         moving car?
     Q10. If you found out in your investigation that the arrangement of oil
         drops left by the car is similar to what you used in this activity, was
         the suspect telling the truth when he said that he was driving with
         constant speed?


       In this module, you have learned how to describe the motion of objects
 in terms of position, distance and displacement, speed and velocity, and
 acceleration. You have also learned how to represent motion of objects using
 diagrams, charts, and graphs.

       Let us summarize what you have learned by relating distance,
  displacement, speed, velocity, and acceleration.
            If an object does not change its position at a given time interval,
             then it is at rest or its speed is zero or not accelerating.
            If an object covers equal distance at equal intervals of time, then it
             is moving at constant speed and still not accelerating.
            If an object covers varying distances at equal intervals of time, then
             it is moving with changing speed or velocity. It means that the
             object is accelerating.

 Links and References

 Chapter 2: Representing Motion. Retrieved March 14, 2012 from
 http://igcse-physics--41-p2-yrh.brentsvillehs.schools.pwcs.edu/modules
 Chapter 3: Accelerated Motion. Retrieved March 14, 2012 from http://igcse-
 physics--41-p2-yrh.brentsvillehs.schools.pwcs.edu/modules
 HS Science IV: Physics in your environment. Teacher’s Edition. 1981. Science
     Education Center. Quezon City

16                                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                        98
Suggested time allotment: 4 to 5 hours




    MODULE


          2                   WAVES AROUND YOU

       Waves occur all around you in the physical world. When you throw a
 stone into a lake, water waves spread out from the splash. When you strum
 the strings of a guitar, sound waves carry the noise all around you. When
 you switch on a lamp, light waves flood the room. Water, sound, and light
 waves differ in important ways but they all share the basic properties of
 wave motion. For instance, you can see water waves and surfers would say
 that they enjoy riding the waves. On the other hand, you don’t see sound
 waves and light waves but you experience them in other ways. Your ears can
 detect sound waves and your skin can get burned by ultraviolet waves if you
 stay under the sun for too long.

       A wave is a periodic disturbance that moves away from a source and
 carries energy with it. For example, earthquake waves show us that the
 amount of energy carried by a wave can do work on objects by exerting
 forces that move objects from their original positions. Have you personally
 experience an earthquake? How did it feel? Did you know that you can
 understand earthquakes by studying waves?

       In this module, you would be doing three activities that would
 demonstrate the properties of wave motion. After performing these activities,
 you should be able to:

            1. explain how waves carry energy from one place to
               another;
            2. distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves;
            3. distinguish between mechanical and electromagnetic
               waves; and
            4. create a model to demonstrate the relationship among
               frequency, amplitude, wavelength, and wave velocity.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                     17
                                                                                        99
Warm up. What are Waves?


        Activity 1 will introduce you to different types of waves distinguished
 according to the direction of vibrations of particles with respect to the
 direction in which the waves travel. Activity 2 will give you a background of
 the terms and quantities used in describing periodic waves. Finally, Activity
 3 will strengthen your understanding of the properties
 of waves and how they propagate.

      Try to wave at your seatmate and observe the
 motion of your hand. Do you make a side-to-side
 motion with the palm of your hand? Do you do an up-
 and-down motion with your hand?

 1.    Describe your personal hand wave.

                                                                    Waving is a common
       The repetitive motion that you do with your                  gesture that people do
 hand while waving is called a vibration. A vibration               to catch someone’s
 causes wave motion. When you observe a wave, the                   attention or to convey
 source is always a vibration.                                      a farewell.


 2.    Think of a still lake. How would you generate
       water waves on the lake?




 Activity 1. Let’s Make Waves!
 What happens when waves pass by?


 Objective

        In this activity, you will observe and draw
 different types of waves and describe how they
 are produced. You will also describe the different
 types of waves.

 Time Allotment: 30 minutes




18                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                     100
Materials

           A   rope (at least five meters long)
           A   colored ribbon
           A   coil spring (Slinky™)
           A   basin filled with water
           A   paper boat

  Procedure

  A.       What are transverse waves?

           1.    Straighten the rope and place it above a long table. Hold one end of
                 the rope and vibrate it up and down. You would be able to observe
                 a pulse. Draw three sketches of the rope showing the motion of the
                 pulse at three subsequent instances (snapshots at three different
                 times). Draw an arrow to represent the direction of the pulse’s
                 motion.

            Time 1




            Time 2




            Time 3




                 a.   What is the source of the wave pulse?

                 b.   Describe the motion of your hand as you create the pulse.

                 c.   Describe the motion of the pulse with respect to the source.



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                    19
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                  101
You will now tag a specific part of the rope while making a
                   series of pulses. A periodic wave can be regarded as a series
                   of pulses. One pulse follows another in regular succession.




                                     Figure 1. Periodic wave

             Tie one end of the rope on a rigid and fixed object (e.g heavy table,
             door knob, etc).




                               Figure 2. Rope tied to a rigid object

             Attach a colored ribbon on one part of the rope. You may use
             adhesive tape to fix the ribbon. Make a wave by continuously
             vibrating the end of the rope with quick up-and-down movements
             of your hand. Draw the waveform or the shape of the wave that
             you have created.




              Ask a friend to vibrate the rope while you observe the motion of
              the colored ribbon. Remember that the colored ribbon serves as a
              marker of a chosen segment of the rope.

             a.    Does the wave transport the colored ribbon from its original
                   position to the end of the rope?


20                                                   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                102
b.     Describe the vibration of the colored ribbon. How does it move
                     as waves pass by? Does it move in the same direction as the
                     wave?

 B.     What are longitudinal waves?

        1.    Connect one end of a long table to a wall. Place coil spring on top of
              table. Attach one end of the coil spring to the wall while you hold
              the other end.




                                Figure 3. Coil spring on a flat table with one
                                           end attached to a wall

              Do not lift the coil spring. Ask a friend to vibrate the end of the coil
              spring by doing a back-and-forth motion parallel to the length of
              the spring. Observe the waves along the coil spring. Draw how the
              coil spring looks like as you move it back-and-forth.




        2.    Attach a colored ribbon on one part of the coil spring. You may use
              an adhesive tape to fix the ribbon. Ask a friend to vibrate the coil
              spring back-and-forth while you observe the motion of the colored
              ribbon. Remember that the colored ribbon serves as a marker of a
              chosen segment of the coil spring.

              a.     Does the wave transport the colored ribbon from its original
                     position to the end of the rope?

              b.     Describe the vibration of the colored ribbon. How does it move
                     as waves pass by?

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                 21
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                103
C.    What are surface waves?

       1.    Place a basin filled with water on top of a level table. Wait until the
             water becomes still or motionless. Create a wave pulse by tapping
             the surface of the water with your index finger and observe the
             direction of travel of the wave pulse. Tap the surface of the water at
             regular intervals to create periodic waves. View the waves from
             above and draw the pattern that you see. In your drawing, mark
             the source of the disturbance.




       2.    Wait for the water to become still before you place your paper boat
             on the surface. Create periodic waves and observe what happens to
             your paper boat.

             a.    Do the waves set the paper boat into motion? What is required
                   to set an object into motion?

             b.    If you exert more energy in creating periodic waves by tapping
                   the surface with greater strength, how does this affect the
                   movement of the paper boat?

       3.    If you were somehow able to mark individual water molecules (you
             used a colored ribbon to do this earlier) and follow them as waves
             pass by, you would find that their paths are like those shown in
             the figure below.




                                     Figure 4. Surface waves


22                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                          104
a.    As shown in the figure, the passage of a wave across a surface
                    of a body of water involves the motion of particles following a
                    ___________ pattern about their original positions.

              b.    Does the wave transport water molecules from the source of
                    the vibration? Support your answer using the shown figure.

 D.    Summary

       1.     Waves can be typified according to the direction of motion of the
              vibrating particles with respect to the direction in which the waves
              travel.

              a.    Waves in a rope are called ____________ waves because the
                    individual segments of the rope vibrate ____________ to the
                    direction in which the waves travel.

              b.    When each portion of a coil spring is alternatively compressed
                    and extended, ____________ waves are produced.

              c.    Waves on the surface of a body of water are a combination of
                    transverse and longitudinal waves. Each water molecule
                    moves in a _______________ pattern as the waves pass by.

       2.     How do we know that waves carry energy?

       3.     What happens when waves pass by?




 Activity 2. Anatomy of a Wave
 How do you describe waves?

 Background

       You had the experience of creating periodic waves in Activity 1. In a
 periodic wave, one pulse follows another in regular succession; a certain
 waveform – the shape of individual waves – is repeated at regular intervals.

        Most periodic waves have sinusoidal waveforms as shown below. The
 highest point and lowest point of a wave are called the crest and the trough
 respectively. The amplitude is the maximum displacement of a vibrating
 particle on either side of its normal position when the wave passes.
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               23
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              105
Figure 5. Sinusoidal wave

 Objective

           In this activity, you will identify the quantities used in describing
           periodic waves.

 Time Allotment: 40 minutes

 Materials

          A   ruler
          A   basin filled with water
          A   rope (at least five meters long)
          A   colored ribbon
          A   watch or digital timer

 Procedure

 A.       How can you measure the wavelength of a
          wave?

          1.    The wavelength of a wave refers to the distance between any
                successive identical parts of the wave. For instance, the distance
                from one crest to the next is equal to one full wavelength. In the
                following illustration, this is given by the interval B to F. Identify
                the other intervals that represent one full wavelength.




                   _____________________________________________________________
                   _____________________________________________________________



24                                                    Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                106
2.     Place a basin filled with water on top of a level table. Wait for the
              water to become still. Create a vibration by regularly tapping the
              surface of the water with your index finger. You would be able to
              see the subsequent crest of the water waves.




                                  Figure 6. Crest and trough on a water wave

              Draw the water waves as you see them from the top of the basin.
              Label one wavelength in your drawing.




       3.     Increase the rate of the vibrations you create by tapping the
              surface of the water rapidly. What happens to the wavelength of
              the waves? _______________________________________________

              Draw the water waves as you see them from the top of the basin.
              Compare it with your drawing in number 2.




 B.    How do you measure the frequency of a wave?

       1.     The frequency of a series of periodic waves is the number of waves
              that pass a particular point every one second. Just like what you
              have done in Activity 1, attach a colored ribbon on a rope to serve

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               25
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              107
as a tag. Tie one end of the rope on a fixed object and ask a friend
              to create periodic waves by regularly vibrating the other end of the
              rope.

       2.     You will count how many times the colored ribbon reached the
              crest in 10 seconds. You will start counting once the ribbon
              reaches the crest a second time. It means that one wave has
              passed by the ribbon’s position. Ask another friend with a watch or
              a digital timer to alert you to start counting and to stop counting
              after 10 seconds. Record the results in Table 1.

       3.     It is also useful to consider the period of a wave, which is the time
              required for one complete wave to pass a given point. The period of

                                                    1
                                       𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑜𝑑 =
              each wave is

                                                𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦

              From the identified frequency of the observed periodic waves, the
              period can be calculated. For example, if two waves per second are
              passing by, each wave has a period of ½ seconds.

         Table 1. Frequency and period of the wave
                Number of waves               Frequency
                                                                               Period
            (N cycles) that passed by        of the waves
                                                                       of the waves (seconds)
            the ribbon in 10 seconds    (N cycles/10 seconds)




              The unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz); 1 Hz = 1 cycle/second.

       4.     If you increase the frequency of vibration by jerking the end of the
              rope at a faster rate, what happens to the wavelength?
              __________________________________________________________________

 C.    How do you measure the speed of a wave?

       1.     Using the rope with ribbon. Create periodic waves and estimate
              their wavelength. Count the number of waves that pass by the
              ribbon in ten seconds. Compute the frequency of the waves. Record
              the results in Table 2.




26                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            108
2.    The wave speed is the distance traveled by the wave per second.

               𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 = 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑 = 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑥 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ

              From the basic formula that applies to all periodic waves, you can
              see that wave speed, frequency and wavelength are independent of
              the wave’s amplitude.

              a.     Using the data from number 1, calculate the wave speed of the
                     observed periodic waves. Record the result in Table 2.

          Table 2. The speed of a wave
              Estimated              Number of waves     Frequency      Wave speed
              wavelength              (N cycles) that   of the waves   (meter/second)
               (meters)               passed by the     (N cycles/10
                                       ribbon in 10       seconds)
                                          seconds




     Summary

        1.    What is the relationship between wave speed, wavelength and
              frequency?

        2.    Suppose you observed an anchored boat to rise and fall once every
              4.0 seconds as waves whose crests are 25 meters apart pass by it.

              a.     What is the frequency of the observed waves?

              b.     What is the speed of the waves?



 Activity 3. Mechanical vs. Electromagnetic Waves
 How do waves propagate?
 Objective

          In this activity, you will differentiate between mechanical waves and
          electromagnetic waves.

 Time Allotment: 30 minutes




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                   27
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                  109
Materials

          Findings from Activity 1
          Chart of the electromagnetic spectrum


 A.       What are mechanical waves?

          1.   When you created waves using a rope in Activity 1 Part A, you were
               able to observe a moving pattern. In this case, the medium of wave
               propagation is the rope.

               a.   In Activity 1 Part B, what is the medium of wave propagation?

               b.   In Activity 1 Part C, what is the medium of wave propagation?

          2.   The waves that you have created in
               Activity 1 all require a medium for
               wave propagation. They are called
               mechanical waves.

               a.   How can you generate
                    mechanical waves?                      The medium of propagation for the wave
                                                           shown above is the rope.
          3.   All three kinds of waves –
               transverse, longitudinal, and surface – are sent out by an
               earthquake and can be detected many thousands of kilometers
               away if the quake is a major one.

               a.   What do you think is the source of earthquake waves?

               b.   What is the medium of propagation of earthquake waves?

 B.       What are electromagnetic waves?

          1.   Energy from the sun reaches the earth through electromagnetic
               waves. As opposed to mechanical waves, electromagnetic waves
               require no material medium for their passage. Thus, they can pass
               through empty space. Locate the electromagnetic spectrum chart
               in your classroom. A smaller image of the chart is shown below.
               Identify the common name of each wave shown in the chart.




28                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                         110
1.   ______________________            5.   _______________________
              2.   ______________________            6.   _______________________
              3.   ______________________            7.   _______________________
              4.   ______________________



        2.    The electromagnetic spectrum shows the various types of
              electromagnetic waves, the range of their frequencies and
              wavelength. The wave speed of all electromagnetic waves is the
              same and equal to the speed of light which is approximately equal
              to 300 000 000 m/s.




                               Figure 7. The electromagnetic spectrum



              a.       Examine the electromagnetic spectrum.

                       1.     Describe the relationship between frequency           and
                              wavelength of each electromagnetic wave.

                       2.     Draw waves to represent each electromagnetic wave.
                              Your illustrations must represent the wavelength of a
                              wave relative to the others. For instance, gamma rays
                              have a very small wavelength compared to the other
                              waves in the spectrum.


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                   29
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                  111
1. Gamma Rays

                   2. __________

                   3. __________

                   4. __________

                   5. __________

                   6. __________

                   7. __________




             b.      The Sun is an important source of ultraviolet (UV) waves,
                     which is the main cause of sunburn. Sunscreen lotions are
                     transparent to visible light but absorb most UV light. The
                     higher a sunscreen’s solar protection factor (SPF), the greater
                     the percentage of UV light absorbed. Why are UV rays
                     harmful to the skin compared to visible light?

                     Compare the frequency and energy carried by UV waves to
                     that of visible light.



 C.    Summary

       1.     Mechanical waves like sound, water waves, earthquake waves,
              and waves in a stretched string propagate through a
              _______________ while __________________ waves such as radio
              waves, visible light, and gamma rays, do not require a material
              medium for their passage.



 Review. Waves Around You

       The activities that you have performed are all about wave motion or
 the propagation of a pattern caused by a vibration. Waves transport energy
 from one place to another thus they can set objects into motion.


30                                              Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           112
What happens when waves pass by?

       Activity 1 introduced you to transverse waves, longitudinal waves, and
 surface waves. You observed the motion of a segment of the material
 through which the wave travels.

          1.    Transverse waves occur when the individual particles or
                segments of a medium vibrate from side to side perpendicular to
                the direction in which the waves travel.

          2.    Longitudinal waves occur when the individual particles of a
                medium vibrate back and forth in the direction in which the
                waves travel.

          3.    The motion of water molecules on the surface of deep water in
                which a wave is propagating is a combination of transverse and
                longitudinal displacements, with the result that molecules at the
                surface move in nearly circular paths. Each molecule is displaced
                both horizontally and vertically from its normal position.

          4.    While energy is transported by virtue of the moving pattern, it is
                important to remember that there is not net transport of matter
                in wave motion. The particles vibrate about a normal position and
                do not undergo a net motion.


 How can you describe waves?

      In Activity 2, you have encountered the important terms and
 quantities used to describe periodic waves.

          1.    The crest and trough refer to the highest point and lowest point of
                a wave pattern, respectively.

          2.    The amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of a
                particle of the medium on either side of its normal position when
                the wave passes.

          3.    The frequency of periodic waves is the number of waves that pass
                a particular point for every one second while the wavelength is
                the distance between adjacent crests or troughs.

          4.    The period is the time required for one complete wave to pass a
                particular point.



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               31
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              113
5.    The speed of the wave refers to the distance the wave travels per
               unit time. It is related to the frequency of the wave and
               wavelength through the following equation:


                             𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 = 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑥 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ


 How do waves propagate?

       Finally, Activity 3 prompted you to distinguish between mechanical
 and electromagnetic waves.

         1.    In mechanical waves, some physical medium is being disturbed
               for the wave to propagate. A wave traveling on a string would not
               exist without the string. Sound waves could not travel through air
               if there were no air molecules. With mechanical waves, what we
               interpret as a wave corresponds to the propagation of a
               disturbance through a medium.

         2.    On the other hand, electromagnetic waves do not require a
               medium to propagate; some examples of electromagnetic waves
               are visible light, radio waves, television signals, and x-rays.



 Up Next. Light

        In the next module, you would learn about visible light, the most
 familiar form of electromagnetic waves, since it is the part of the
 electromagnetic spectrum that the human eye can detect. Through some
 interesting activities, you would come across the characteristics of light, how
 it is produced and how it propagates. You would need the concepts that you
 learned from this module to fully understand and appreciate the occurrence
 of light.




32                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            114
Pre/Post Test

  Consider the diagram below to answer questions 1 and 2.




  1.    The wavelength of the wave in the diagram above is given by letter
        ______.

  2.    The amplitude of the wave in the diagram above is given by letter _____.

  3.    Indicate the interval that represents a half wavelength.




            a. A to E                                c. A to B
            b. B to F                                d. C to E


  4.    A pulse sent down a long string eventually dies away and disappears.
        What happens to its energy?
           a. The energy disappears with the wave.
           b. The energy is remains along the length of the string.
           c. The energy is transferred from the wave to the environment.
           d. The pulse does not carry energy.

  5.    Mechanical waves transport energy from one place to another through
          a. Alternately vibrating particles of the medium
          b. Particles traveling with the wave
          c. Vibrating particles and traveling particles
          d. None of the above

  6.    In a transverse wave, the individual particles of the medium
           a. move in circles
           b. move in ellipses
           c. move parallel to the direction of travel
           d. move perpendicular to the direction of travel

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                            33
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                          115
7.    The higher the frequency of a wave,

            a. the lower its speed                   c. the greater its amplitude
            b. the shorter its wavelength            d. the longer its period

 8.    Of the following properties of a wave, the one that is independent of the
       others is its

            a. amplitude                               c. wavelength
            b. wave speed                              d. frequency

 9.    Waves in a lake are 5.00 m in length and pass an anchored boat 1.25 s
       apart. The speed of the waves is
          a. 0.25 m/s
          b. 4.00 m/s
          c. 6.25 m/s
          d. impossible to find from the information given

 10. Energy from the sun reaches the earth through

            a. ultraviolet waves                       c. mechanical waves
            b. infrared waves                          d. electromagnetic waves


 References and Web Links

 Anatomy of an electromagnetic wave. Available at:
 http://missionscience.nasa.gov/ems/02_anatomy.html

 Electromagnetic waves. Available at:
 http://www.colorado.edu/physics/2000/waves_particles/
 [3] Hewitt, P. (2006). Conceptual Physics 10th Ed. USA: Pearson Addison-
 Wesley.

 The anatomy of a wave. Available at:
 http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/waves/u10l2a.cfm

 The nature of a wave. Available at:
 http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/waves/u10l1c.cfm




34                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       116
Suggested time allotment: 8 to 10 hours




   MODULE


         3                  SOUND

        Would you like to try placing your palm on your throat while saying –
“What you doin?” What did your palm feel? Were there vibrations in the
throat? Try it again and this time, say – “Mom! Phineas and Ferb are making
a title sequence!”
                                                               Terms to Remember
       In the previous module you learned                      Longitudinal Wave
about     wave    properties   and    common                   - Wave whose motion is parallel
characteristics like pitch and loudness. You                      to the motion of the particles of
will also learn the 2 kinds of waves according                    the medium
                                                               Mechanical wave
to propagation. These are the longitudinal and                 - Wave that need a medium in
transverse waves. Sound is an example of a                        order to propagate
longitudinal wave. It is also classified as a
mechanical wave. Thus there has to be matter
for which sound should travel and propagate.
This matter is better known as medium.

                                                               Figure 1. Longitudinal wave




                           How does sound propagate?




      In Activity 1, you will try to explore how sound is produced. You are
going to use local materials available in your community to do this activity.
You can do “Art Attack” and be very creative with your project.


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                             35
Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            117
Activity 1
 My own sounding box


 Objectives


          In this activity, you should be able to construct a sounding box to

          1.   demonstrate how sound is produced; and

          2.   identify factors that affect the pitch and loudness of the sound
               produced.


 Materials Needed

          shoe box
          variety of elastic or rubber bands (thin and thick)
          extra cardboard – optional
          pair of scissors or cutter
                                                                            Handle all sharp
          ruler                                         TAKE
                                                                            tools with care.
                                                         CARE!



 Procedure

 1.       Cut and design your shoe
          box as shown in Figure 2.

 2.       Put the rubber bands
          around the box. Make sure
          that the rubber bands are
          almost equally spaced and
          that the rubber bands are
          arranged     according  to
          increasing thickness from
          the lower end to the other           Figure 2. My sounding box
          end of the box.


36                                              Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                          118
3.     Use your finger to pluck each rubber band. Listen to the sound
        produced.

        Q1.      What physical signs did you observe when you plucked each
                 band. Did you hear any sound? What produced the sound?

        Q2.      How different are the sounds produced by each band with
                 different thickness?


 4.     This time use the fingers of one hand to stretch one of the elastics.
        Pluck the elastic with the fingers of the other hand and observe.

        Q3.      Are there changes in the note when you plucked the stretched
                 band?


 5.     Repeat step 4 with the other elastic bands.

        Q4.      Arrange the elastics in sequence from the highest note to the
                 lowest note produced.




       When we talk or make any sound, our vocal cords vibrate. When there
 are no vibrations felt, no sound is produced. This means that sounds are
 caused by vibrations. Vibrations of molecules are to the to-and-fro or back-
 and-forth movement of molecules. Vibrations are considered as a
 disturbance that travels through a medium. This vibratory motion causes
 energy to transfer to our ears and is interpreted by our brain. Sound waves
 are examples of longitudinal waves. They are also known as mechanical
 waves since sound waves need medium in order to propagate.

       In Activity 1, vibrations produced by the elastic band produced sound.
 The sounding box amplified (increase in amplitude) this sound.

       Sound waves can travel in air. When they come in contact with our
 eardrums, the vibrations of the air force our eardrums to vibrate which is
 sensed and interpreted by our brain.


                       Can sound waves also travel in other media like solids
                                          and liquids?



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               37
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              119
You can try this one. Place your ear against one end of a tabletop. Ask
 a friend to gently tap the other end of the table with a pencil or a ruler. What
 happens? Then ask your friend to again gently tap the other end of the table
 but this time, make sure that your ear is not touching the table. What
 happens? In which situation did you encounter louder and more
 pronounced sound? In which situation did you encounter the sound clearly?

         Sound is produced by the slight tapping of the table with a pencil or a
 ruler. This can be heard clearly at the other end of the table. This shows
 that sound waves can also travel through wood or solid. Sound is more
 distinct in solids than in air. This also means that sound is heard much
 louder when it travels in solids than in air.

          What about in liquids?
 Can sound travel in liquids
 too?     Liquids       are     better
 transmitters of sound than
 gases.     If   two    bodies       are
 struck together underwater,
 the sound heard by a person
                                           Figure 3: Molecules of different media
 who is underwater is louder
 than when heard in air, but
 softer than in solids.

          As you can see in Figure 3, particles of solids are more closely packed
 than particles of liquid and gas. This is why sound produced in solids is
 much more distinct and loud than when it is propagated or produced in
 liquids and gas. Between liquids and gases, on the other hand, liquid
 particles appear more closely spaced than gases. This means that louder
 sound will be produced in liquids than in gases.

          Spacing of particles of the medium like solid, liquid and gas is an
 important factor on how would is transmitted.            Take a look at Figure 3,
 liquid particles are closer to each other than the particles in the gas. Sound
 waves are transmitted easier in liquids. Between liquids and solids, the
 particles of solids are even closer together than the liquid molecules;
 therefore, sound travels even faster in solids than in liquids. Since different
 media transmit sound differently, sound travels at different speeds in


38                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                         120
different materials. Since solid is the best transmitter of sound, sound
 travels fastest in solids and slowest in gases.

          The table below shows the speed of sound in different materials.

    Table 1: Speed of sound in different materials
                                                    Speed of Sound
                      Materials
                                                       V (m/s)
                      Air (0oC)                          331
                      He (0oC)                           1005
                      H (20oC)                           1300
                       Water                             1440
                      Seawater                           1560
                   Iron and Steel                        5000
                     Aluminum                            5100
                     Hard wood                           4000


        Sound speed is dependent on several factors such as (1) atmospheric
 pressure, (2) relative humidity, and (3) atmospheric temperature. Remember
 these weather elements you studied in your earlier grades? High values of
 these elements lead to faster moving sound. When you are in the low lands
 and the surrounding is hot, sound travels fast. Do you want to know why
 sound travels faster in hot air? There are more molecular interactions that
 happen in hot air. This is because the hot particles of air gain more kinetic
 energy and so there is also an increase in the mean velocity of the
 molecules. Since sound is a consequence of energy transfer through
 collisions, more collisions and faster collisions means faster sound.

         Going a little deeper on this, speed of sound basically depends on the
 elastic property and the inertial property of the medium on which it
 propagates. The elastic property is concerned with the ability of the material
 to retain or maintain its shape and not to deform when a force is applied on
 it. Solids as compared to liquids and gases have the highest elastic property.
 Consequently, solid is the medium on which sound travels fastest. This
 means that the greater the elastic property, the faster the sound waves
 travel. The iniertial property, on the other hand, is the tendency of the
 material to maintain its state of motion. More inertial property means the
 more inert (more massive or greater mass density) the individual particles of
 the medium, the less responsive they will be to the interactions between
 neighbouring particles and the slower that the wave will be. Within a single
 phase medium, like air for example, humid air is more inert than humid air.
 This is because water that has changed to vapor is mixed with the air. This
 phenomenon increases the mass density of air and so increases the inertial


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                            39
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                           121
property of the medium. This will eventually decrease the speed of sound on
 that medium.

        Sound cannot travel in a vacuum. Remember that sound is a
 mechanical wave which needs medium in order to propagate. If no matter
 exists, there will be no sound. In the outer space, sound would not be
 transmitted.

        Sound waves possess characteristics common to all types of waves.
 These are frequency, wavelength, amplitude, speed or velocity, period and
 phase. Just like other waves, sound also exhibits wave properties just like
 reflection, refraction, diffraction, and interference. More than these
 properties are pitch and loudness of sound. Pitch refers to the highness or
 lowness of sound. Loudness is how soft or how intense the sound is as
 perceived by the ear and interpreted by the brain. Do you want to find out
 more characteristics and properties of sound? Activity No. 2 will let your
 discover some of these properties using your sounding box.




 Activity 2
 Properties and characteristics of sound
 Objective

       In this activity, you will use your sounding box to describe the
 characteristics of sound and compare them with those of sound produced by
 a guitar.

 Materials Needed

          Sounding Box
          Wooden rod
          Ruler
          Guitar

 Procedure
 Part 1: Sounding the Box...


 1.       Label the rubber bands of
          your sounding box as S1, S2
          and so on. Labeling should start with the thinnest rubber band.


40                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                        122
2.     Pluck each rubber band. Listen to the sounds produced.

        Q1. What did you observed when you plucked each of the rubber bands
            and sound is produced? How then is sound produced?

        Q2. Is there a difference in the sound produced by each of the rubber
            bands? How do they differ?

        Q3. Which band produced a higher sound? Which band produced a
            lower sound?

        Q4. How can you make a softer sound? How can you make a louder
            sound?

        Q5. What factors affect the pitch and loudness of the sound produced
            by the rubber bands?


 3.     Stretch one of the rubber bands and while doing so, pluck it again.

        Q6. Is there a change in the sound produced when you pluck the
            rubber band while stretching it? How does stretching the rubber
            band affect the pitch of the sound produced?


 4.     Place a ruler (on its edge) across              ruler   ruler
        the sounding box as shown in
        Figure 3. Pluck each rubber band
        and observe.

        Q7. Is there a difference in the
            sound produced when the
            ruler is placed across the              Figure 3: With stretch rubber
            box?                                    bands


 5.     Move the ruler off center to the left or to a
        diagonal position so that one side of each
        rubber band is shorter than the other side
        (Figure 4). Pluck again each rubber band on
        each side of the ruler and observe.
                                                           Figure 4: Diagonal
                                                           Stretching of the bands




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                    41
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                   123
Q8. Which part of the rubber band (shorter side or longer side) provides
            higher pitch? Which part provides lower pitch?

        Q9. Again, what factors affect the pitch of the sound produced by the
            rubber bands?

 Part 2: The Guitar...

 6.     Strum each guitar string without holding the frets. (String #0 is the
        lower most string while string #6 is the uppermost string.)

 7.     Record all you observations in the table provided.


                  String #                Pitch (High or Low)
                     0
                     1
                     2
                     3
                     4
                     5
                     6


        Q10. Which string vibrates fastest when strummed?

        Q11. Which string vibrates slowest when strummed?

        Q12. Which string has the highest frequency?

        Q13. Which string has the highest pitch?

        Q14. Which has the lowest frequency?

        Q15. Which string has the lowest pitch?

        Q16. How would you relate pitch and frequency?




        The highness or lowness of sound is known as the pitch of a sound or
 a musical note. In Activity No. 2 you were able to relate vibrations, frequency
 and pitch using your improvised sounding box and a guitar. The pitch of a
 high frequency sound is also high and a low frequency sound is also; lower
 in pitch.


42                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       124
When you were in your
  earlier grades you studied about
  the human ear. Our ear and that
  of animals are the very sensitive
  sound detectors. The ear is a part
  of the peripheral auditory system.
  It is divided into three major parts:
  the outer ear, the middle ear and
  the inner ear.

        The outer ear called the
  pinna collects the sound waves
  and focuses them into the ear                     Figure 4: The human ear
  canal. This canal transmits the
  sound waves to the eardrum.

         The ear canal is the eardrum membrane or the tympanum. It
  separates the outer and the middle ears physically. Air vibrations set the
  eardrum membrane in motion that causes the three smallest bones
  (hammer, anvil and stirrup) to move. These three bones convert the small-
  amplitude vibration of the eardrum into large-amplitude oscillations. These
  oscillations are transferred to the inner ear through the oval window.

        Behind the oval window is a snail-shell shaped liquid –filled organ
  called the cochlea. The large-amplitude oscillations create waves that travel
  in liquid. These sounds are converted into electrical impulses, which are
  sent to the brain by the auditory nerve. The brain, interprets these signals
  as words, music or noise.

         Did you know that we can only sense within the frequency range of
  about 20 Hz to about 20000 Hz? Vibrational frequencies beyond 20 000 Hz
  is called ultrasonic frequencies while extremely low frequencies are known
  as infrasonic frequencies. Our ear cannot detect ultrasonic or infrasonic
  waves. But some animals like dogs can hear sounds as high as 50 000 Hz
  while bats can detect sounds as high as 100 000 Hz.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                             43
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                           125
We can see images of your baby
  brother or sister when the OB-Gyne
  asks your mommy or nanay to
  undergo      ultrasound.     Ultrasonic
  waves are used to help physicians see
  our    internal    organs.   Nowadays,
  ultrasonic technology is of three kinds:
  2-dimensional, 3-dimensional, and 4-
  dimensional categories. In the 3- and
  4-dimensional ultrasonic technologies,
  the features of the fetus are very
  clearly captured.                                      Figure 5: Ultrasound

        It has also been found that ultrasonic waves can be used as rodent
  and insect exterminators. The very loud ultrasonic sources in a building will
  usually drive the rodents away or disorient cockroaches causing them to die
  from the induced erratic behavior. What other applications of sound do you
  have in mind? Do you want to share them too?



  Loudness and Intensity


        Do you still remember intensity
  of light in the previous module? In
  sound, intensity refers to the amount
  of energy a sound wave. Figure 6
  shows varying intensity of sound. High
  amplitude sounds usually carry large
  energy and have higher intensity while
  low amplitude sound carry lesser
  amount of energy and have lower
  intensity.
                                                    Figure 6: Varying sounds

         Sound intensity is measured by various instruments like the
  oscilloscope. Loudness is a psychological sensation that differs for different
  people. Loudness is subjective but is still related to the intensity of sound.
  In fact, despite the subjective variations, loudness varies nearly
  logarithmically with intensity. A logarithmic scale is used to describe sound
  intensity, which roughly corresponds to loudness. The unit of intensity level
  for sound is the decibel (dB), which was named after Alexander Graham Bell


44                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       126
who invented the telephone. On the decibel scale, an increase of 1 dB means
  that sound intensity is increased by a factor of 10.

        Father and son duo
  interprets the loudness of a
  sound differently. The son
  considers the rock music a
  soft music while the father
  considers it a loud sound. The
  father may even interpret the
  sound as a distorted sound,
  which is known as noise.
                                                    Figure 7: Father and Son Duo
  Noise is wave that is not
  pleasing to the senses.


           Table 2. Sound Levels of different sound sources

                    Source of sound                          Level (dB)
                 Jet engine, 30 m away                          140
                 Threshold of pain                              120
                 Amplified rock music                           115
                 Old subway train                               100
                 Average factory                                 90
                 Busy street traffic                             70
                 Normal conversation                             60
                 Library                                         40
                 Close whisper                                   20
                 Normal breathing                                10
                 Threshold of hearing                            0



        Let’s see how you interpret sound yourselves. Look for 3 more
  classmates and try Activity 3. This will test your ability to design and at the
  same time show your talents!




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                  45
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                127
Activity 3
 Big time gig!


 Objectives

           In this activity, you should be able to:

           1.   create musical instruments using indigenous products and
           2.   use these instruments to compose tunes and present in a Gig.
                Students may also utilize other indigenous musical instruments.

 Materials Needed

          Indigenous materials such as sticks, bottles or glassware available in
           your locality to be used as musical instrument
          Localized or improvised stringed instruments
          Localized or improvised drum set

 Procedure

 1.       Form a group of four (4). One can play a stringed instrument, while the
          other can play the drum and the 3rd member can use the other
          instrument that your group will design or create. The last member will
          be your group’s solo performer.

 2.       Look for local materials which you can use to create different musical
          instruments.

 3.       Try to come up with your own composition using the instruments you
          have created.

 4.       In the class GIG you are to play and sing at least 2 songs (any song of
          your choice and your original composition).

 5.       Check the Rubric included to become familiar with the criteria for
          which you will be rated.




46                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            128
Big Time Gig!
                                              Rubric Scoring
     Task/
                               4                       3                  2                  1             Score
    Criteria
                       Makes use of                                                     Makes use
                        local or                   Makes use         Makes use          of local
                        indigenous                  of local           of local           materials
                        materials                   materials          materials          only.
 Improvised/           The improvised              only.              only.           The sound
 Localized              instruments                The               The                produced by
 musical                produce good                improvised         improvised         the
 instruments            quality sound               instruments        instruments        improvised
                        comparable to               produce            produce fair       instruments
                        standard                    good quality       quality            is not clear
                        musical                     sound.             sound.             and
                        instruments.                                                      distinct.
                                                                                      The group’s
                                               The group’s         The group’s
                    The group’s original                                              original
                                               original            original
                    composition has                                                   composition
                                               composition         composition
                    good melody.                                                      has fair melody
                                               has fair melody     has fair melody
 Composition                                                                          and the lyrics
                                               and the lyrics      and the lyrics
                    The lyrics provided                                               provided are
                                               provided are        provided are
                    are thematic and                                                  NEITHER
                                               thematic and        NOT thematic
                    meaningful                                                        thematic nor
                                               meaningful          but meaningful
                                                                                      meaningful
                                                  The group          The group       The group
                       The group was
                                                   was able to         was able to        was able to
                        able to
                                                   successfully        use the            use the
                        successfully use
                                                   use the             improvised         improvised
                        the improvised
                                                   improvised          musical            musical
                        musical
                                                   musical             instruments        instruments
                        instruments in
 Performance                                       instruments         but some           but MOST
                        their GIG.
                                                   in their            were out of        were out of
                       The group was
                                                   GIG.                tune               tune
                        able to provide
                                                The group            The group       The group
                        good quality
                                                   was able to         was able to        was able to
                        rendition or
                                                   provide fair        provide fair       provide fair
                        performance.
                                                   rendition.          rendition.         rendition
                                               3 out of 4
                                                                   2 out of 4
                    Each one of them           members
                                                                   completed their
 Cooperation        completed their task       completed their                        Only 1 out of
                                                                   task so as to
 and Team           so as to come up           task so as to                          the 4 members
                                                                   come up with
 Work               with the expected          come up with                           did his/her job
                                                                   the expected
                    output - GIG               the expected
                                                                   output - GIG
                                               output - GIG
                                                                                                 TOTAL




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                   47
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                  129
How was your GIG? Did you enjoy this activity? Aside from the
 concepts and principles in sound you learned and applied for a perfect
 performance what other insights can you identify? Can you extend your
 designs to come up with quality instruments using indigenous materials?
 You can be famous with your artworks...

        Sound waves are mechanical waves than need for a medium for sound
 to propagate. Vibrations of the medium create a series of compression and
 rarefaction which results to longitudinal waves. Sound can travel in all
 media but not in vacuum. Sound is fastest in matter that is closely packed
 like solid and slowest in gas. Speed of sound is dependent on factors like
 temperature, humidity and air pressure. High temperature brings much
 faster sound. Increased humidity, on the other hand makes sound travel
 slower. As pressure is increased, speed is also increased. Inertial and elastic
 properties of the medium also play an important part in the speed of sound.
 Solids tend to be highly elastic than gases and thus sound travel fastest in
 solids. In a single phase matter however, the inertial property which is the
 tendency of the material to maintain its motion also affect speed of sound.
 Humid air is more massive and is more inert than dry air. This condition
 brings lesser molecular interactions and eventually slower sound. Sound,
 just like other waves do have characteristics such as speed, frequency,
 wavelength, amplitude, phase and period. Like any other wave, sound
 exhibit properties like reflection, refraction, interference and diffraction.
 Other properties are loudness and pitch. Pitch is dependent on the
 frequency of sound wave. The higher frequency the higher the pitch of the
 sound produced.

        Organisms like us are capable of sensing sound through our ears.
 Just like other organism, our ears do have parts that perform special tasks
 until the auditory signals reach and are interpreted by our brain.
 Frequencies beyond the audible to human are known as ultrasonic (beyond
 the upper limit) and infrasonic (below the lower limit). Intensity and
 loudness are quantitative and qualitative descriptions of the energy carried
 by the wave. High amplitude waves are intense and are sensed as loud
 sound. Low amplitude sound waves are soft sound. Music is a special sound
 that forms patterns and are appealing to our sense of hearing.


 Reading Materials/Links/Websites
 http://www.physicsclassroom.com/Class/sound/u11l2c.cfm
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound#Sound_wave_properties_and_characteristics
 http://personal.cityu.edu.hk/~bsapplec/characte.htm
 http://www.slideshare.net/agatonlydelle/physics-sounds

48                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                      130
Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours




    MODULE
                              LIGHT
          4
         Do you still remember Sir Isaac Newton? What about Christian
 Huygens? Did you meet them in your earlier grades? These people were the
 first to study about light.

       In this module, you will learn about light. You will also find out that
 there are different sources of light and that light exhibits different
 characteristics and properties. Finally, you will design a simple activity to
 test whether light travels in a straight light or not.


                  What are the common sources of light?
                How do these common sources produce light?
                   What are the common properties and
                          characteristics of light?


       Sir Isaac Newton believed that light behaves like a particle while
 Christian Huygens believed that light behaves like a wave. A 3rd scientist,
 Max Planck came up with what is now known as the Dual-Nature of Light.
 He explained that light can be a particle and can also be a wave. To
 complete our knowledge about the nature of light, James Clark Maxwell
 proposed the Electromagnetic Theory of Light.

        While these scientists dig deep into the nature of light and how light
 are propagated, let us be more familiar with ordinary materials we use as
 common sources of light. The Sun for example is known as a natural source
 of light. Sun is also considered as a luminous body (an object capable of
 producing its own light). Other sources are the lamps, bulbs, and candles.
 These are the artificial sources.

       In your earlier grades you learned about energy transformation.
 Energy transformation is needed to convert or transform forms of energy to
 light or other forms. In bulbs, electric potential is converted to light. In
 lamps, chemical energy is transformed to light.


Grade 7 7 Science:Learner’s In Motion(Second Part)
 Grade Science: Energy Material                                                         49
                                                                                        131
In Activity 1, you will try to observe transformation of chemical energy
  from chemical substances such as oil to light. Further, you will also gather
  data which chemical substance is best by relating it to the brightness of the
  light produced. In this activity, you will use the langis kandila or lampara as
  we call it in the Philippines or the Diwali lights as it is known in other
  countries like India.

  Activity 1
  Light sources: Langis kandila or lampara

  Objectives

      In   this activity, you should be able to:
      1.   construct a simple photometer;
      2.   determine which chemical substance produce the brightest light; and
      3.   infer that brightness of light is dependent on the distance of the
           source.

  Materials Needed

          an electric glow lamp (Small lamp is needed)
          candle - weighing 75 grams
          wedge with sloping surfaces (sharp angle about 60° to 70° that serve
           as the photometer (made of white wood or paper)
          langis kandila or lampara
          variety of vegetable oil (about 5)
          aluminum pie containers or small clay pots
          cotton string for wick
          set of books or tripod that will serve as platform for Diwali lights

  Procedure
  Part 1: Improvised Photometer

         Arrange the
  electric glow lamp,
  the candle and the
  wedge as shown on
  the right.    Make
  sure that you do                    1                                                       2
  this activity in a
  dark room for good                      Figure 1. Improvised photometer set up

  results.

50                                                Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            132
Illuminate the side “A” of the wedge by the lamp and side “B” by the
 candle. In general the lamp side will look brighter than the other.

       Move the wedge nearer to the candle to a spot at which you as an
 observer, looking down on the two surfaces of the wedge (from “C”) cannot
 see any difference between them in respect of brightness. (They are then
 equally illuminated; that is to say the candle light falling on “B” is equal in
 intensity to the electric light falling on “A.”)

        Calculate the power of the lamp relative to the candle. (E.g. If both side
 of the wedge showed equal illumination when it is about 200 cm from 1, and
 50 cm from 2, the distances are as 4 to 1. But as light falls off according to
 the square of the distance: (200)2 = 40 000 and (50)2 = 2 500 or 16 to 1.).
 Thus the candle-power of the lamp is 16.

 Q1. What is the candle power of your set up? (Include your computations.)

 Part 2: Langis Kandila or Lampara

 1.    Make 5 langis kandila or lampara
       using aluminium pie containers
       or small clay pots as shown.
       Label your langis kandila as DL-
       KL1, DL-KL2 and so on.                                  Figure 2: Langis kandila or lampara


 2.    Pour different variety of vegetable oil in each of the pot.

 3.    Use the improvised photometer to determine the brightness of each of
       the candle.

 4.    Replace the candle you used in the 1st part with the langis kandila.

 5.    Compute the candle power of the lamp with respect to the langis
       kandila. You may refer to step 4 for the step by step process of
       determining the candle power using the improvised photometer. Record
       your data on the provided table:

          Table 1. Brightness of Vegetable Oil Variety
              Diwali Lights/Langis                   Vegetable Oil         Brightness/Luminous
                    Kandila                             Variety             Intensity (Candela)
                    DL-LK 1                         Canola Oil
                    DL-LK 2                         Butter
                    DL-LK 3                         Margarine
                    DL-LK 4                         Corn Oil
                    DL-LK 5                         Olive Oil



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                    51
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                   133
Q2. Which among the langis kandila or lampara is the brightest?

     Part 3: Intensity vs Distance from light source


     1.    Position your brightest Diwali light or langis kandila 20 inches or about
           50 cm from the wedge. Compute the brightness of the Diwali light.

     2.    Move the langis kandila or Diwali light 10 cm closer then compute the
           brightness.

     3.    Repeat step 2 and each time move the langis kandila or Diwali light 10
           cm closer to the wedge. Compute the corresponding brightness and
           record your data on the table below.

                   Distance from the                                    Brightness
                                          Observation
                      Wedge (cm)                                        (Candela)
                          50
                          40
                          30
                          20
                          10

     Q3. How would you relate the brightness or intensity of light with the
         distance from the source?

            Brightness of light depends on the source and the distance from the
     source. Brightness however, is qualitative and is dependent of the person’s
     perception. Quantitatively, brightness can be expressed as luminous
     intensity with a unit known as candela. The unit expression came from the
     fact that one candle can approximately represent the amount of visible
     radiation emitted by a candle flame. However, this decades-ago assumption
     is inaccurate. But we still used this concept in Activity 1 as we are limited to
     an improvised photometer. If you are using a real photometer on the other
     hand, luminous intensity refers to the amount of light power emanating from a
     point source within a solid angle of one steradian.

           Further, in Activity 1, varied chemical sources produced different light
     intensity. Likewise, different distances from the light source provided varied
     intensity.

            As mentioned earlier, James Clark Maxwell discovered the
     Electromagnetic Theory of Light. He combined the concepts of light,
     electricity and magnetism to come up with his theory forming
     electromagnetic waves. Since these are waves they also exhibit different


52                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
     Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       134
characteristics of waves such as wavelength, frequency and wave speed
  which you have studied in the previous module. There are different forms of
  electromagnetic waves arranged according to frequency. This arrangement of
  the electromagnetic waves is known as Electromagnetic spectrum. The
  visible part of which is known as white light or visible light. The next activity
  will lead you to explore the characteristics of the electromagnetic spectrum.



  Activity 2
  My spectrum wheel
  Objectives

          In this activity, you should be able to

          1. construct a spectrum wheel and
          2. explore the characteristics of light such as energy, frequency and
             wavelength.

  Materials Needed

         Spectrum Wheel Pattern
                                                    TAKE      Handle all sharp
         Cardboard or illustration board
                                                              objects with care.
         Button fastener                           CARE!
         Glue or paste


  Procedure

  Part 1: Spectrum Wheel

  Cut the two art files that make up the wheel on the next pages.
  Cut along the lines drawn on the top wheel. The small window near the
  center of the wheel should be completely cut out and removed.

  Punch a whole into the center of the two wheels together. You may use a
  button fastener to hold the two wheels securely in place, one on top of the
  other, but they should be free to rotate relative to each other.

  When you see a region of the EM spectrum show up in the open window and
  the "W,F,E" that correspond to that region showing up under the flaps then
  you know that you have done it right.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                              53
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                            135
Source: Sonoma State University (http://www.swift.sonoma.edu




54                                       Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                   136
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)     55
Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                   137
Part 2: Characteristics of Light


 Try out your Spectrum Wheel by positioning the inner most of the flaps on
 EM SPECTRUM. This will simultaneously position the other flaps to
 ENERGY, WAVELENGTH & FREQUENCY.

 Turn the upper wheel and observe the combinations.

 Fill in the table below with the corresponding combinations you have
 observed using your Spectrum Wheel.

          Table 1. Characteristics of Light

                                                                                 Frequency x
             EM Spectrum              Energy   Frequency     Wavelength
                                                                                 wavelength
            Radio
            Microwave
            Infrared
            Visible Light
            Ultraviolet
            X-Ray
            Gamma Ray



 Q1. How are frequency and wavelength related for a specific region of the
     spectrum?

 Q2. What can you observe with the values of the product of frequency and
     wavelength in the different spectra?


 Q3. How is ENERGY related to FREQUENCY?




       Now that we are familiar with the electromagnetic spectrum and the
 corresponding energies, frequencies and wavelength probably we can see
 some applications of these in everyday living. UV rays are highly energetic
 than other spectral regions on its left. This could be a possible reason why
 we are not advised to stay under the sun after 9:00 in the morning. Prolong
 use of mobile phones may cause ear infection. This may be due to a higher
 energy emitted by microwaves used in cellular phones than radio waves
 commonly used in other communication devices. What about the visible
 spectrum? Do you want to know more about this spectral region?



56                                                Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            138
What are the frequencies and
  energies of the visible spectrum? This is
  the visible light. Sir Isaac Newton used a
  prism to show that light which we
  ordinarily see as white consists of
  different    colors.    Dispersion   is  a
  phenomenon in which a prism separates
  white light into its component colors.
  Activity 3 will provide you more
  information about visible light. In this
  activity, you will be able to detect                Figure 3. Color spectrum
  relationships between colors, energy,
  frequency, wavelength and intensity.




  Activity 3
  Colors of light – color of life!


  Objectives

          In this activity, you should be able to

          1. make a color spectrum wheel;
          2. explore the characteristics of color lights; and
          3. observe how primary colors combine to form other colors.

  Materials Needed

         Color Spectrum Wheel Pattern Cardboard or illustration board
         white screen
         plastic filters (green, blue and red)
         3 pieces of high intensity flashlights
         button fastener
         glue or paste                                         Handle all sharp
                                                    TAKE
                                                                objects with care
                                                    CARE!




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                57
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                              139
Procedure

 Part 1: Color Wheel


 1.    Cut the two art files that make up the wheel on the next pages.

 2.    Cut along the lines drawn on the top wheel. Cut the 2 sides as shown.
       The small window near the center of the wheel should be completely cut
       out and removed.

 3.    Punch a hole at the center of the two wheels. You may use a button
       fastener to secure the two wheels together one on top of the other, but
       they should be free to rotate relative to each other.

 4.    When you see a region of the Color spectrum show up in the open
       window and the "W,F,E" that correspond to that region showing up
       under the flaps then you know that you have done it right.




58                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       140
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)   59



  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                 141
60                                   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)



 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                 142
Part 2: Characteristics of Light


  1.    Try out your Color Spectrum Wheel by positioning the inner most of the
        flaps on COLOR SPECTRUM. This will simultaneously position the
        other flaps to ENERGY, WAVELENGTH & FREQUENCY.

  2.    Turn the upper wheel and observe the combinations.

  3.    Fill in the table below with the corresponding combinations you have
        observed using your Spectrum Wheel.

          Table 1. Characteristics of Color Lights
                Color           Energy         Frequency Wavelength   Frequency x wavelength
              Spectrum           (eV)            (THz)     (nm)               (m/s)
             Red
             Orange
             Yellow
             Green
             Blue
             Violet


  4.    You will need to convert the equivalents of frequencies to Hz and the
        equivalent wavelengths to meters. Note that terra (T) is a prefix for 1014
        while nano (n) is a prefix equivalent to 10-9.

  Q1. Which color registers the highest frequency? shortest wavelength?
  Q2. Which color registers the lowest frequency? longest wavelength?
  Q3. What do you observe with the wavelength and frequency of the different
      colors?
  Q4. What did you observe with the product of wavelength and frequency for
      each color? What is the significance of this value?
  Q5. What can you say about the speed of the different colors of light in air?
  Q6. Give a plausible explanation as to why white light separate into
      different colors.

  Part 3: Combining Colors

  1.    Cover the lens of the flashlight with blue plastic filter. Do the same with
        the 2 other flashlights. The 2nd flashlight with green plastic filter and
        the 3rd with red plastic filter.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                     61

  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                    143
2.    Ask 2 other groupmates to hold the 2 other flashlight while you hold on
       to the 3rd one. Shine these flashlights on the white screen and note the
       colors projected on the screen.

 3.    Let 2 color lights from the flashlights overlap. Observe what color is
       produced and fill in the table below.

       Table 2. Color that you see
         Color of Plastic Filter   Color that you see projected on the screen
                 Green
                  Blue
                  Red

       Table 3. Color Mixing
          Color Combination                       Resulting Color
             Green + Blue
              Blue + Red
             Red + Green
         Red + Green + Blue


        Dispersion, a special kind of refraction, provided us color lights. This
 phenomenon is observed when white light passes through a triangular
 prism. When white light enters a prism and travels slower in speed than in
 vacuum, color separation is observed due to variation in the frequencies
 (and wavelength) of color lights. Remember the concept of refractive indices
 in the previous module? The variations in frequencies (and wavelengths) are
 caused by the different refractive indices of the varying color light. Thus,
 blue light with greater refractive index refracts more and appears to bend
 more than red light. But do you really think that light will bend when
 travelling in space? The last activity in this module will test your ability to
 design an experiment to test if light travels in a straight line or not.




 Activity 4
 Light up straight!

 Objective

       In this activity, you should be able to design an experiment given
 several materials to show that light travels in a straight line.

62                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                        144
Materials Needed

          2 pieces of cardboard                          Handle all sharp
          cutting tool                                   objects with care.
          bright room                         TAKE
                                              CARE!       Handle all lighting
          ruler or meter stick                           tools with care to
          permanent marker                               avoid being burnt.
          pencil
          any object (e.g. medium size Johnson’s face powder box)

 General Instructions

 1.       Given the materials design a 5-6 step procedure to test that light
          follows a straight line or not.

 2.       Remember that you are only allowed to use the materials specified in
          this particular activity.

 3.       Check the rubric scoring for your guide.



                                         Lighting Up Straight!
                                            Rubric Scoring

    Task/
                             4                       3                   2                  1            Score
   Criteria
                      Steps are               Steps are            Steps are         Steps are
                       logically                logically             logically          logically
                       presented.               presented.            presented.         presented.
                      The procedure           The                  The               The
                       included about           procedure             procedure          procedure
                       5-6 steps.               included              included           included
                      All materials            about 3-4             about 3-4          about 2-3
Experiment
                       given to the             steps.                steps.             steps.
Procedure
                       group are               75% of the           50% of the        25% of the
                       utilized in the          materials             materials          materials
                       procedure                given to the          given to the       given to the
                                                group are             group are          group are
                                                utilized in the       utilized in        utilized in
                                                procedure             the                the
                                                                      procedure          procedure




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                   63
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                 145
The group has         The group has        The group has        The group had
                successfully          attained the         partially            some effort but
                attained the object   object to prove      attained the         was not able to
                to prove that light   that light travels   object to prove      attained the
Result of
                travels in a          in a straight line   that light           object to prove
Experiment
                straight line using   using their          travels in a         that light
Try-out/
                their designed        designed             straight line        travels in a
Feasibility
                procedure.            procedure but        using their          straight line
                                      there are some       designed             using their
                                      steps that are not   procedure.           designed.
                                      very clear.
                Each one of them      About 75% of the     About 50% of         About 25% of
                completed their       members              the members          the members
Cooperation     task so as to come    completed their      completed their      did his/her job
and Team        up with the           task so as to        task so as to
Work            expected output.      come up with the     come up with
                                      expected output.     the expected
                                                           output.
                                                                                            TOTAL



       Light, accordingly has wavelike nature and particle-like nature. As a
wave, it is part of the electromagnetic waves as the visible spectrum. This
visible spectrum is also known as white light. White light undergoes
dispersion when it passes through a prism. The variations of refractive
indices result to variations in the refraction of color lights dependent on the
frequencies (and wavelength) of the color lights. This brings about blue light
being refracted more than the other color lights and thus appears to be
bent. However, light travels in a straight line path in a particular medium.

      Brightness or intensity and colors are special properties of light. These
can be observed in different phenomena such as rainbows, red sunset, and
blue sky. You can identify many other applications of light and colors as you
become keen observers of natural phenomena.




Reading Materials/Links/Websites

http://amazing-space.stsci.edu/resources/explorations/groundup/
lesson/glossary/term-full.php?t=dispersion

http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/refrn/u14l4a.cfm



64                                                    Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)



Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                                146
Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours




    MODULE
                              HEAT
          5
      For sure, you have used the word ‘heat’ many times in your life. You
 have experienced it; you have observed its effects. But have you ever
 wondered what heat really is?
       In your earlier grades, you learned that heat moves from the source to
 other objects or places. Example is the kettle with water placed on top of
 burning stove. The water gets hot because heat from the burning stove is
 transferred to it.
       This module aims to reinforce your understanding of heat as an
 energy that transfers from one object or place to another. You will determine
 the conditions necessary for heat to transfer and the direction by which heat
 transfers by examining the changes in the temperature of the objects
 involved. You will observe the different methods of heat transfer and
 investigate some factors that affect these methods. The results will help you
 explain why objects get hot or cold and why some objects are seemingly
 colder or warmer than the others even if they are exposed to the same
 temperature.



           How is heat transferred between objects or places?
           Do all objects equally conduct, absorb, or emit heat?




 What is Heat?

       Have you ever heard of the term “thermal energy” before? Any object is
 said to possess thermal energy due to the movement of its particles. How is
 heat related to thermal energy? Like any other forms of energy, thermal
 energy can be transformed into other forms or transferred to other objects or
 places. Heat is a form of energy that refers to the thermal energy that is ‘in

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                      65
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                     147
transit’ or in the process of being transferred. It stops to become heat when
 the transfer stops. After the energy is transferred, say to another object, it
 may again become thermal energy or may be transformed to other forms.


 Thermometer

        Heat transfer is related to
 change in temperature or change in
 the relative hotness or coldness of an
 object. Most of the activities found in
                                                    Figure 1. Thermometer
 this module will ask you to collect and
 analyze temperature readings to arrive at the desired concepts. To achieve
 this, you have to use the laboratory thermometer, which is different from
 the clinical thermometer we use to determine our body temperature. The
 kind that you most probably have in your school is the glass tube with fluid
 inside, usually mercury or alcohol. Always handle the thermometer with
 care to avoid breaking the glass. Also, be sure that you know how to read
 and use the device properly to get good and accurate results. Inform your
 teacher if you are not sure of this so that you will be guided accordingly.


 Activity 1
 Warm me up, cool me down

 Objective
       In this activity, you should be able to describe the condition necessary
 for heat transfer to take place and trace the direction in which heat is
 transferred.


 Materials Needed
          2 small containers (drinking cups or glasses)
          2 big containers (enough to accommodate the small containers)
          tap water
          hot water
          food coloring
          laboratory thermometers (with reading up to 100oC)

 Procedure

 1.       Label the small and big containers as shown
          in Figure 2.

                                                                       Figure 2
66                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                        148
2.     Half fill containers 1, 2, and A with tap water. Half fill also container B
        with hot water. Be careful when you pour hot water into the container.

 3.     Add few drops of food coloring on the larger containers.

 4.     Measure the initial temperature of                          Setup 1     Setup 2
        water in each of the 4 containers, in
        degree Celsius (°C). Record your
        measurements in Table 1.

 5.     Carefully place container 1 inside
        container A (Figure 3). This will be                             Figure 3
        your Setup 1.

 6.     Place also container 2 inside container B. This will be your Setup 2.

 7.     Measure the temperature of water in all containers 2 minutes after
        arranging the setups. Record again your measurements in the table
        (after 2 minutes).

 8.     Continue to measure and record the temperature of water after 4, 6, 8,
        and 10 minutes. Write all your measurements in the table below.

      Table 1. Temperature readings for Setup 1 and Setup 2
                                                    Temperature (°C) of Water After
             Container                 0 min          2       4        6       8       10
                                      (initial)      mins    mins     mins    mins    mins

      Setup       1-Tap water
        1         A-Tap water

      Setup       2-Tap water
        2         B-Hot water



 Q1. In which setup did you find changes in the temperature of water inside
     the containers? In which setup did you NOT find changes in the
     temperature of water inside the containers?
 Q2. In which setup is heat transfer taking place between the containers?
 Q3. What then is the condition necessary for heat transfer to take place
     between objects?
 9.     Refer to the changes in the temperature of water in the setup where
        heat transfer is taking place.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                            67
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           149
Q4. Which container contains water with higher initial temperature? What
     happens to its temperature after 2 minutes?
 Q5. Which container contains water with lower initial temperature? What
     happens to its temperature after 2 minutes?
 Q6. If heat is related to temperature, what then is the direction of heat that
     transfers between the containers?
 Q7. What happens to the temperature of water in each container after 4, 6,
     8, and 10 minutes? What does this tell us about the heat transfer
     taking place between the containers?
 Q8. Until when do you think will heat transfer continue to take place
     between the containers?


       If your teacher allows it, you may continue to measure the temperature
 of the water in both containers for your basis in answering Q8. And if you
 plot the temperature vs. time graph of the water in both containers, you will
 obtain a graph similar to Figure 4.
                       Temperature (°C)




                                          Time (s)


                                          Figure 4

 10. Analyze the graph and answer the following questions:

 Q9.      What does the blue curved line on the graph show? Which container
          does this represent?
 Q10. What does the red curved line on the graph show? Which container
      does this represent?
 Q11. What does the orange broken line in the graph show? Is heat transfer
      still taking place during this time? If yes, where is heat transfer now
      taking place?


68                                                   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                               150
If you do not have laboratory thermometers in your school, you may
 still perform the activity above using your sense of touch. You can use your
 fingers or hands to feel the objects being observed. But be very careful with
 this especially if you are dealing with hot water. You have to take note also
 that touching is not always reliable. Try out this simple activity below.

          Prepare three containers. Half fill one container with hot water, but not
          hot enough to burn your hand. Pour very cold water into the second
          container and lukewarm water in the third container. First,
          simultaneously place your left hand in the hot water and your right
          hand in the cold water. Keep them in for a few minutes. Then take
          them out, and place both of them together into the container with
          lukewarm water. How do your hands feel? Do they feel equally cold?

       If you try out this activity, you will observe that your left hand feels
 the water cold while your right hand feels it warm. This is due to the initial
 conditions of the hands before they were placed into the container with
 lukewarm water. So if you use sensation to determine the relative hotness or
 coldness of the objects, make sure to feel the objects with different hands or
 fingers.




 How Does Heat Transfer?

        In the previous activity, you explored the idea that heat transfers
  under certain conditions. But how exactly is heat transferred? The next
  activities will allow you to explore these different methods by which heat
  can be transferred from one object or place to another.


 Activity 2
 Which feels colder?

 Objective
          In this activity, you should be able to describe heat transfer by
          conduction and compare the heat conductivities of materials based on
          their relative coldness.

 Materials Needed
        small pieces of different objects (copper/silver coin, paper, aluminum
         foil, iron nail, etc.)
        laboratory thermometer

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                     69
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                    151
Procedure

 Part A: To be performed one day ahead.
 1.    Place a laboratory thermometer inside the freezer of the refrigerator.
 2.    Place also your sample objects inside the freezer at the same time.
       Leave them inside the freezer overnight.

 Part B: To be performed the next day.

 3.    Take the temperature reading from the thermometer inside the freezer.

 Q1. What is the temperature reading inside the freezer?
 Q2. If ever there is a way to measure also the temperature of the objects
     placed inside the freezer, how do you think will their temperature
     compare with each other and with the temperature reading from the
     thermometer?
 4.    Touch one object lightly with your finger and feel it.

 Q3. Did heat transfer take place between your finger and the object? If yes,
     how and in what direction did heat transfer between them?
 Q4. Did you feel the object cold? What made it so? (Relate this to your
     answer in Q3.)
 5.    Touch the rest of the objects inside the freezer using different fingers,
       then observe.

 Q5. Did the objects feel equally cold? What does this tell us about the
     amount of heat transferred when you touch each object?
 Q6. Which among the objects feels ‘coldest’? Which feels ‘warmest’?
 Q7. Which among the objects is the best conductor of heat? Which object is
     the poorest conductor of heat?


        Activity 2 demonstrates heat transfer by conduction, one of the
 methods by which heat is transferred. Conduction takes place between
 objects that are in contact with each other. The energy from the object of
 higher temperature is transferred to the other object through their particles
 that are close or in contact with each other. Then the particles receiving the
 energy will also transfer the energy to other places within the object through
 their neighboring particles. During this process, only the energy moves, not
 the matter itself. This can be observed in Activity 1. You have observed that
 the hot colored water stayed inside container B and did not mix with the


70                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                         152
water inside container 2. So this shows that only the energy transferred
 between the containers.
       Here is another example of heat transfer by conduction. Think of a
 metal spoon put in a bowl of a hot champorado that you were about to eat
 when you suddenly remembered that you had to do first a very important
 task. When you came back, you noticed that the handle of the spoon
 became really hot! How do you think this happened? The heat from the
 champorado is transferred to the part of the spoon that is in direct contact
 with the food by conduction. Then it is transferred to the cooler regions of
 the spoon through its particles. Why did you feel the spoon hot? When you
 touched the spoon, heat is also transferred to your hand by conduction. So
 your hand gained heat or thermal energy, and this makes you feel the object
 hot.
       Can you now explain why your hand that was previously dipped into
 hot water felt the lukewarm water cold while the other hand that was
 previously dipped into very cold water felt it hot?

 Heat Conductivities

       In the previous activity, you found out that some objects conduct heat
 faster than the others. This explains why we feel some objects colder or
 warmer than the others even if they are of the same temperature. Which
 usually feels warmer to our feet – the tiled floor or the rug?

       More accurate and thorough experiments had been carried out long
 before to determine the heat or thermal conductivity of every material. The
 approximate values of thermal conductivity for some common materials are
 shown below:

    Table 2: List of thermal conductivities         of common materials
                          Conductivity                                    Conductivity
         Material                                       Material
                             W/(m·K)                                        W/(m·K)
     Silver                    429                  Concrete                  1.1
     Copper                    401                  Water at 20°C             0.6
     Gold                      318                  Rubber                   0.16
                                                    Polypropylene
      Aluminum                            237                                0.25
                                                    plastic
      Ice                                  2        Wood                   0.04 - 0.4
      Glass, ordinary                     1.7       Air at 0°C               0.025

       Solids that conduct heat better are considered good conductors of
 heat while those which conduct heat poorly are generally called insulators.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                       71
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                      153
Metals are mostly good conductors of heat. When we use a pot or pan to
  cook our food over a stove, we usually use a pot holder made of fabrics to
  grasp the metal handle. In the process, we are using an insulator to prevent
  our hand from being burned by the conductor, which is the metal pan or
  pot. Why are woven fabrics that are full of trapped air considered good
  insulators?



  Activity 3
  Move me up

        You have previously learned that water is a poor conductor of heat, as
  shown in Table 2. But why is it that when you heat the bottom of the pan
  containing water, the entire water evenly gets hot quickly? Think of the
  answer to this question while performing this next activity.

  Objective
           In this activity, you should be able to observe and describe convection
           of heat through liquids.

  Materials Needed

           2 transparent containers (drinking glass, beaker, bottle)
           dropper
           hot water
           cold water
           piece of cardboard

  Be careful not to bump the table or shake the container at any time during the
  experiment.

  Procedure

  1.       Fill one of the glass containers with tap water.
  2.       While waiting for the water to become still, mix in a separate container
           a few drops of food coloring with a small amount of very cold water.
           (You may also make the food coloring cold by placing the bottle inside the
           refrigerator for at least an hour before you perform the activity.)
  3.       Suck a few drops of cold food coloring using the dropper and slowly dip
           the end of the medicine dropper into the container with tap water, down



72                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                            154
to the bottom. See to it that the colored water does not come out of the
        dropper yet until its end reaches the bottom of the container.
  4.    Slowly press the dropper to release a small amount of the liquid at the
        bottom of the container. Then slowly remove the dropper from the
        container, making sure not to disturb the water. Observe for few
        minutes.
  Q1. Does the food coloring stay at the bottom of the container or does it mix
      with the liquid above it?
  5.    Fill the other container with hot water.
  6.    Place the cardboard over the top of the
        container with hot water. Then carefully place
        the container with tap water on top of it. The
        cardboard must support the container on top
        as shown in Figure 5.
  Q2. What happens to the food coloring after
      placing the container above the other                       Figure 5
      container? Why does this happen?
  Q3. How is heat transfer taking place in the setup?
      Where is heat coming from and where is it going?
  Q4. Is there a transfer of matter, the food coloring, involved during the
      transfer of heat?
  Q5. You have just observed another method of heat transfer, called
      convection. In your own words, how does convection take place? How
      is this process different from conduction?
  Q6. Do you think convection only occurs when the source of heat is at the
      bottom of the container? What if the source of heat is near the top of
      the container? You may try it by interchanging the containers in your
      previous experiment.


       What you found out in this experiment is generally true with fluids,
  which include liquids and gases. In the next quarter, you will learn about
  convection of heat in air when you study about winds.

        So what happens in your experiment? When you placed the glass on
  top of another glass with hot water, heat transfer takes place from the hot
  water to the tap water including the colored water. This makes these liquids
  expand and become lighter and float atop the cooler water at the top of the
  container. This will then be replaced by the cooler water descending from
  above.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                            73
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                          155
Activity 4
 Keep it cold

        So far you have learned that heat can be transferred by conduction
 and convection. In each method, a material, either a solid or a liquid or gas,
 is required. But can heat also transfer even without the material? If we stay
 under the sun for a while, do we not feel warm? But how does the heat from
 this very distant object reach the surface of the earth? The transfer of energy
 from the sun across nearly empty space is made possible by radiation.
 Radiation takes place even in the absence of material.
       Do you know that all objects, even ordinary ones, give off heat into the
 surrounding by radiation? Yes, and that includes us! But why don't we feel
 it? We do not feel this radiation because we are normally surrounded by
 other objects of the same temperature. We can only feel it if we happen to
 stand between objects that have different temperature, for example, if we
 stand near a lighted bulb, a burning object, or stay under the Sun.
       All objects emit and absorb radiation although some objects are better
 at emitting or absorbing radiation than others. Try out this next activity for
 you to find out. In this activity, you will determine how different surfaces of
 the object affect its ability to absorb heat.

 Introduction

       One hot sunny day, Cobi and Mumble walked into a tea shop and
 each asked for an order of iced milk tea for takeout. The crew told them as
 part of their promo, their customers can choose the color of the tumbler
 they want to use, pointing to the array of containers made of the same
 material but are of different colors and textures. Cobi favored the container
 with a dull black surface, saying that the milk tea will stay cooler if it is
 placed in a black container. Mumble remarked that the tea would stay even
 cooler if it is in a container with bright shiny surface.

 Prediction

 1.    If you were in their situation, which container do you think will keep
       the iced milk tea cooler longer? Explain your choice.


 2.    Assuming an initial temperature of 5°C, predict the possible
       temperatures of the milk tea in each container after 5, 10, 15, and 20
       minutes. Assume that the containers are covered.

74                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       156
Temperature (°C)
            Cup
                             0 min            5 min    10 min      15 min   20 min
   Dull black
                               5°C
   container
   Bright shiny
                               5°C
   container

  Task:

  Design a laboratory activity that will enable you to test your prediction. See
  to it that you will conduct a fair investigation. Start by answering the
  questions below:

           What problem are you going to solve? (Testable Question)
            _____________________________________________________________________

           What are you going to vary? (Independent variable)
            _____________________________________________________________________

           What are you not going to vary? (Controlled Variables)
            _____________________________________________________________________

           What are you going to measure? (Dependent variables)
            _____________________________________________________________________


  1.       Write down your step by step procedure. Note that you may use the
           light from the sun or from the lighted bulb as your source of energy.
  2.       Collect your data according to your procedure. Present your data in
           tabulated form.
  3.       Analyze your data and answer the following questions:
  Q1. Which container warmed up faster?
  Q2. Which container absorbs heat faster?
  Q3. Which container will keep the milk tea cooler longer? Is your prediction
      correct?
  Q4. Will the same container also keep a hot coffee warmer longer that the
      other?




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                    75
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                  157
Activity 5
 All at once
       So far, you have learned that heat can be transferred in various ways.
 You have also learned that different objects absorb, reflect, and transmit
 heat differently. In the next activities, you will not perform laboratory
 experiments anymore. All you have to do is to use your understanding so far
 of the basic concepts of heat transfer to accomplish the given tasks or
 answer the questions being asked.

 Task 1

       Heat transfer is evident everywhere around us. Look at the illustration
 below. This illustration depicts several situations that involve heat transfer.
 Your task is to identify examples of situations found in the illustration that
 involve the different methods of heat transfer.




                                     Figure 6


 1.    Encircle three situations in the drawing that involve any method of heat
       transfer. Label them 1, 2, and 3.
 2.    Note that in your chosen situations, there could be more than one heat
       transfer taking place at the same time. Make your choices more specific
       by filling up Table 3.

76                                              Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           158
Table 3: Examples of heat transfer
                          Which object                   Which object    What is the method of
          Description
                         gives off heat?                receives heat?      heat transfer?


     1




     2




     3



  Task 2

        Below is a diagram showing the basic parts of the thermos bottle.
  Examine the parts and the different materials used. Explain how these help
  to keep the liquid inside either hot or cold for a longer period of time.
  Explain also how the methods of heat transfer are affected by each material.




                                         Stopper made of plastic
                                         or cork



                                          Silvered inner and outer
                                          glass wall

                                          Vacuum between inner and
                  Hot                     outer wall
                liquid
                                          Outer casing made of
                                          plastic or metal



                                                                          Figure 7: Basic parts of
                                         Ceramic base                     a thermos bottle




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                         77
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                        159
In the next module, you will learn about another form of energy which
 you also encounter in everyday life, electricity. Specifically, you will learn
 about the different types of charges and perform activities that will
 demonstrate how objects can be charged in different ways. You will also
 build simple electric circuits and discuss how energy is transferred and
 transformed in the circuit.



 Links and References

 Sootin, H. (1964). Experiments with heat. W.W. Norton and Company, Inc.

 Where is Heat coming from and where is it going? Retrieved March 10, 2012
 from http://www.powersleuth.org/docs/EHM%20Lesson%204%20FT.pdf

 Conduction, Convection, Radiation: Investigating Heat Transfers. Retrieved
 March 10, 2012 from
 http://www.powersleuth.org/docs/EHM%20Lesson%205%20FT.pdf




78                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                     160
Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours




   MODULE
                             ELECTRICITY
         6
       In Module 5, you learned about heat as a form of energy that can be
transferred through conduction, convection and radiation. You identified the
conditions that are necessary for these processes to occur and performed
activities that allowed you to investigate the different modes of heat transfer.
Finally, you learned to distinguish between insulators and conductors of
heat and were able to identify the uses of each.
       Now you will learn about another form of energy which you encounter
in everyday life, electricity. You must be familiar with this energy since it is
the energy required to operate appliances, gadgets, and machines, to name
a few. Aside from these manmade devices, the ever-present nature of
electricity is demonstrated by lightning and the motion of living organisms
which is made possible by electrical signals sent between cells. However, in
spite of the familiar existence of electricity, many people do not know that it
actually originates from the motion of charges.
       In this module, you will learn about the different types of charges and
perform activities that will demonstrate how objects can be charged in
different ways. You will also learn the importance of grounding and the use
of lightning rods. At the end of the module you will do an activity that will
introduce you to simple electric circuits. The key questions that will be
answered in this module are the following:

                What are the different types of charges?
                     How can objects be charged?
                   What is the purpose of grounding?
                      How do lighting rods work?
              What constitutes a complete electrical circuit?




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                       79
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                     161
Activity 1
 Charged interactions
 Objectives

      After performing this activity, you should be able to:

      1.   charge a material by friction;
      2.   observe the behavior of charged objects;
      3.   distinguish between the two types of charges; and
      4.   demonstrate how objects can be discharged.

 Materials Needed:

          Strong adhesive tape (transparent)
          Smooth wooden table
          Meter stick
          Piece of wood (~1 meter long) to hold tape strips
          Moistened sponge

 Procedure:

 1.       Using a meter stick, pull off a 40- to 60- cm piece of adhesive tape and
          fold a short section of it (~1 cm) to make a nonsticky "handle" at that
          end of the tape.
 2.       Lay the tape adhesive side down and slide your finger along the tape to
          firmly attach it to a smooth, dry surface of a table.
 3.       Peel the tape from the surface vigorously pulling up on the handle you
          have made on one end. See figure below. Make sure that the tape does
          not curl up around itself or your fingers.




                         Figure 1. How to peel the tape off the surface

 4.       While holding the tape up by the handle and away from other objects,
          attach the tape to the horizontal wooden piece or the edge of your table.

80                                                  Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                               162
Make sure that the sticky side does not come in contact with other
        objects.




                               Figure 2. Attaching the tape to a holder

 5.  Bring your finger near, but not touching, the nonsticky side of the tape.
     Is there any sign of interaction between the tape and the finger?
 6. Try this with another object. Is there any sign of interaction between
     the tape and this object?
 7. Prepare another tape as described in steps 1 to 3.
 8. Bring the nonsticky side of the two charged tapes you prepared near
     each other. Do you observe any interaction?
 9.  Drag a moistened sponge across the nonsticky side of the tapes and
     repeat steps 5, 6 and 8. Do you still observe any interaction?
 10. Record your observations.




 Types of Charges

      You have learned in previous modules that all matter are made up of
 atoms or combinations of atoms called compounds. The varying atomic
 composition of different materials gives them different electrical properties.
 One of which is the ability of a material to lose or gain electrons when they
 come into contact with a different material through friction.

        In activity 1, when you pulled the tape vigorously from the table, some
 of the electrons from the table’s surface were transferred to the tape. This
 means that the table has lost some electrons so it has become positively
 charged while the tape has gained electrons which made it negatively
 charged. The process involved is usually referred to as charging up the
 material, and in this particular activity the process used is charging by
 friction.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                           81
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                          163
It is important to remember that during the charging process, ideally,
  the amount of charge lost by the table is equal to the amount of charge
  gained by the tape. This is generally true in any charging process. The idea
  is known as:


                            The Law of Conservation of Charge
                    Charges cannot be created nor destroyed, but can be
                         transferred from one material to another.
                    The total charge in a system must remain constant.



  Electric Force

         When you brought your finger (and the other object) near the charged
  tape, you must have observed that the tape was drawn towards your finger
  as if being pulled by an invisible force. This force is called electric force
  which acts on charges. An uncharged or neutral object that has balanced
  positive and negative charges cannot experience this force.

        We learned from the previous section that the tape is negatively
  charged. The excess negative charge in the tape allowed it to interact with
  your finger and the other object. Recall also that when you placed the two
  charged tapes near each other they seem to push each other away. These
  observations tell us that there are two kinds of electric force which arises
  from the fact that there also two kinds of electrical charges. The interactions
  between the charges are summarized in the following law:


                                       Electrostatic Law
                         Like charges repel and unlike charges attract.



         But your finger and the other object are neutral, so how did they
  interact with the charged tape? Generally, a charged object and an
  uncharged object tend to attract each other due to the phenomenon of
  electrostatic polarization which can be explained by the electrostatic law.
  When a neutral object is placed near a charged object, the charges within
  the neutral object are rearranged such that the charged object attracts the
  opposite charges within the neutral object. This phenomenon is illustrated
  in Figure 3.




82                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           164
Figure 3. Polarization of a neutral object

 Discharging

        In Activity 1, after dragging a moistened sponge on the surface of the
 tape, you must have noticed that the previous interactions you observed has
 ceased to occur. What happened? The lack of interaction indicates that the
 electrical force is gone which can only happen when there are no more
 excess charges in the tape, that is, it has become neutral.

        The process of removing excess charges on an object is called
 discharging. When discharging is done by means of providing a path
 between the charged object and a ground, the process may be referred to as
 grounding. A ground can be any object that can serve as an “unlimited”
 source of electrons so that it will be capable of removing or transferring
 electrons from or to a charged object in order to neutralize that object.

       Grounding is necessary in electrical devices and equipment since it
 can prevent the build-up of excess charges where it is not needed. In the
 next activity, you will use the idea of grounding to discover another way of
 charging a material.




 Activity 2
 To charge or not to charge

 Objective

       After performing this activity, you should be able to apply the
 phenomenon of polarization and grounding to charge a material by
 induction.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          83
 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                         165
Materials Needed:
     Styrofoam cup
     soft drink can
     balloon

  Procedure:

  1.      Mount the soft drink can on the Styrofoam cup as
          seen in Figure 4.
                                                Figure 4. Mounting of
                                                       soft drink can




  2.      Charge the balloon by rubbing it off your hair
          or your classmate’s hair. Note: This will work
          only if the hair is completely dry.

  3.      Place the charged balloon as near as possible
          to the soft drink can without the two objects
          touching.                                     Figure 5. Balloon placed
                                                                        near the can


  4.      Touch the can with your finger at
          the end opposite the balloon.



  5.      Remove your hand and observe
          how the balloon and the can will
          interact.                                         Figure 6. Touching the can

  Q1. What do you think is the charge acquired by the
      balloon after rubbing it against your hair?

  Q2. In which part of the activity did polarization occur? Explain.

  Q3. What is the purpose of touching the can in step #4?

  Q4. Were you able to charge the soft drink can? Explain how this happened.

  Q5. Based on your answer in Q1, what do you think is the charge of the soft
      drink can?




84                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                           166
Conductors vs. Insulators


        The behavior of a charged material depends on its ability to allow
  charges to flow through it. A material that permits charges to flow freely
  within it, is a good electrical conductor. A good conducting material will
  allow charges to be distributed evenly on its surface. Metals are usually
  good conductors of electricity.
         In contrast to conductors, insulators are materials that hinder the
  free flow charges within it. If charge is transferred to an insulator, the
  excess charge will remain at the original location of charging. This means
  that charge is seldom distributed evenly across the surface of an insulator.
  Some examples of insulators are glass, porcelain, plastic and rubber.
        The observations you made had in Activity 2 depended on the fact
  that the balloon and the Styrofoam are good insulators while the soft drink
  can and you are good conductors. You have observed that the soft drink can
  has become charged after you touched one of its ends. The charging process
  used in this activity is called induction charging, where an object can be
  charged without actual contact to any other charged object.
       In the next activity you will investigate another method of charging
  which depends on the conductivity of the materials


  Activity 3
  Pass the charge

  Objective

           After performing this activity, you should be able to charge a material
           by conduction.

  Materials Needed:

           2 styrofoam cups
           2 softdrink cans
           balloon

  Procedure:

  1.       Repeat all steps of Activity 2.             Figure 7. Putting the two set-ups
  2.       Let the charged can-cup set-up from                    into contact.
           Activity 2 touch a neutral can-cup set-up
           as shown in Figure 7.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                 85
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                               167
3.       Separate the two set-ups then observe how the charged balloon
           interacts with the first and second set-up.

  Q1. Were you able to charge the can in the second set-up? Explain how this
      happened.

  Q2. Is it necessary for the two cans to come into contact for charging to
      happen? Why or why not?

  Q3. From your observation in step 3, infer the charge acquired by the can in
      the second set-up.

        The charging process you performed in Activity 3 is called charging
  by conduction which involves the contact of a charged object to a neutral
  object. Now that you have learned the three types of charging processes, we
  can discuss a natural phenomenon which is essentially a result of electrical
  charging. You will investigate this phenomenon in the following activity.



  Activity 4
  When lightning strikes

  Objectives:

       After performing this activity, you should be able to:

       1. explain how lightning occurs;
       2. discuss ways of avoiding the dangers associated with lightning; and
       3. explain how a lightning rod functions.

  Materials Needed:

           access to reference books or to the Internet

  Procedure:

  1.        Learn amazing facts about lightning by researching the answers to the
            following questions:
             What is a lightning?
             Where does a lightning originate?
             How ‘powerful’ is a lightning bolt?
             Can lightning’s energy be caught stored, and used?
             How many people are killed by lightning per year?


86Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
                                                                                             168
    What can you do to prevent yourself from being struck by
                 lightning?
                Some people have been hit by lightning many times. Why have they
                 survived?
                How many bushfires are started by lightning strikes?
                ‘Lightning never strikes twice in the same place.’ Is this a myth or a
                 fact?
                What are lightning rods? How do they function?


         As introduced at the beginning of this module, electrical energy has
  numerous applications. However many of this applications will not be
  possible unless we know how to control electrical energy or electricity. How
  do we control electricity? It starts by providing a path through which
  charges can flow. This path is provided by an electric circuit. You will
  investigate the necessary conditions for an electric circuit to function in the
  following activity.


  Activity 5
  Let there be light!

  Objectives:

            After performing this activity, you should be able to:

            1.    identify
the
appropriate arrangements
of
wire, bulb
and
                  battery
which
successfully light a
bulb; and
            2.    describe the
two requirements for an
electric
circuit to function.

  Materials Needed:

           3- or 1.5-volt battery
           2-meter copper wires/ wires with alligator clips
           pliers/ wire cutter
           1.5- watt bulb/ LED

  Procedure:

  1.       Work with a partner and discover the appropriate arrangements of
           wires, a battery and a bulb
that will
make the bulb light.

  2.       Once you are successful
in the arrangement, draw a diagram
           representing your circuit.
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                  87
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                169
3.    Compare your output with other pairs that are successful in their
       arrangement.

 Q1. What difficulties did you encounter in performing this activity?

 Q2. How does your work compare with other pair’s work?

 Q3. What was necessary to make the bulb light?



 Energy Transfer in the Circuit

       In Activity 5, you have seen that with appropriate materials and
 connections, it is possible for the bulb to light. We know that light is one
 form of energy. Where did this energy come from? The law of conservation of
 energy tells us that energy can neither be created nor destroyed but can be
 transformed from one form to another. This tells us that the light energy
 observed in the bulb must have come from the electrical energy or electricity
 in the circuit. In fact, all electrical equipment and devices are based on this
 process of transformation of electrical energy into other forms of energy.
 Some examples are:

              1. Flat iron – Electrical energy to thermal energy or heat
              2. Electric fan – Electrical energy to mechanical energy
              3. Washing machine – electrical energy to mechanical energy.

          Can you identify other examples?

 References

 “Instructor Materials: Electricity” by American Association of Physics
 Teachers © 2001. Retrieved June 11, 2012 from
 https://aapt.org/Publications/pips_samples/2_ELECTRICITY/INSTRUCTO
 R/099_e4.pdf

 http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/estatics/U8L2a.cfm (Date
 accessed: June 11, 2012)

 http://museumvictoria.com.au/pages/7567/lightning-room-classroom-
 activities.pdf (Date accessed: June 12, 2012)

 http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/hframe.html (Date accessed:
 June 12, 2012)

88                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion                                                       170
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)   89
90   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Suggested time allotment: 14 hours




    MODULE
                             THE
          1                  PHILIPPINE ENVIRONMENT

 Overview

       Everything that we see around us makes up our environment. The
 landforms and bodies of water that make up the landscape, the mountains and
 valleys, rivers and seas; the climate, the rains brought by the monsoons, the
 warm, humid weather that we frequently experience; the natural resources that
 we make use of; every plant and animal that live around us. Truly, the
 environment is made up of a lot of things.

       All these things that we find in our surroundings and all the natural
 phenomena that we observe are not due to some random luck or accident.
 What makes up our environment is very much related to where our country is
 on the globe. Or, to say it in a different way, the characteristics of our
 environment are determined by the location of the Philippines on the planet.

 Latitude and Longitude

       Before we learn about the characteristics of our environment, let us first
 talk about the location of the Philippines. Where is the Philippines? The
 Philippines is on Earth, of course, but where exactly is it located? To answer
 this question, you have to learn a new skill: locating places using latitude and
 longitude.



 Activity 1
 Where in the world is the Philippines? (Part I)




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                    175




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               91
Objective

        After performing this activity, you should be able to describe the location
        of the Philippines using latitude and longitude.

What to use

        globes

What to do

1. Study the image of a globe on the right.
   Then get a real globe and identify the parts
   that are labelled in the image. Be ready to
   point them out when your teachers asks
   you.

2. After studying the globe and the image on
   the right, try to define “equator” in your own
   words. Give your own definition when your
   teacher asks you.                                    Figure 1. What does the globe
                                                        represent?

3. The “northern hemisphere” is that part of the world between the North Pole
   and the equator. Show the northern hemisphere on the globe when your
   teacher asks you.

4. Where is the “southern hemisphere”? Show
   the southern hemisphere on the globe when
   your teacher asks you.

5. Study the drawing on the right. It shows the
   lines of latitude.

     Q1. Describe the lines of latitude.

     Q2. Show the lines of latitude on the globe
         when your teacher asks you.                   Figure 2. What is the reference
                                                       line when determining the
                                                       latitude?




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                 176


92                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Q3. The starting point for latitude is the equator. The equator is at latitude
         0° (0 degree). At the North Pole, the latitude is 90°N (90 degrees north).
         At the South Pole, the latitude is 90°S (90 degrees south). Show the
         following latitudes when your teacher calls on you: 15°N; 60°N; 30°S;
         45°S.

     Q4. The globe does not show all lines of latitude. If you wish to find
         50°N, where should you look?

 6. Study the drawing on the right. It shows the
    lines of longitude.

     Q5. Describe the lines of longitude.

     Q6. Show the lines of longitude on the globe
         when your teacher asks you.

     Q7. The starting point for longitude is the
         Prime Meridian. The Prime Meridian is
         at longitude 0°. Show the Prime Figure 3. What is the
         Meridian on the globe when your reference line when
         teacher asks you.                       determining the longitude?

     Q8. To the right of the Prime Meridian, the longitude is written this way:
         15°E (15 degrees east), 30°E (30 degrees east), and so on. To the left of
         the Prime Meridian, the longitude is written as 15°W (15 degrees west),
         30°W (30 degrees west), and so on. On your globe, find longitude 180°.
         What does this longitude represent?

     Q9. Not all lines of longitude are shown on a globe. If you want to find
         20°W, where should you look?

     Q10. The location of a place may be described by using latitude and
          longitude. To the nearest degree, what is the latitude and longitude of
          Manila?

     Q11. Compared to the size of the world, Manila is just a tiny spot, and its
          location may be described using a pair of latitude and longitude. But
          how would you describe the location of an “area” such as the whole
          Philippines?



 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                  177


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                             93
Now you know how to describe the location of a certain place using
latitude and longitude. The lines of latitude are also known as parallels of
latitude. That is because the lines of latitude are parallel to the equator and to
each other. Five lines of latitude have special names. They are listed in the
table below. The latitude values have been rounded off to the nearest half-
degree.

                              Latitude          Name
                                 0°           Equator
                               23.5°N     Tropic of Cancer
                               23.5°S    Tropic of Capricorn
                               66.5°N       Arctic Circle
                               66.5°S      Antarctic Circle


      Get a globe and find the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn.
Trace the two lines of latitude with a red chalk. The part of the world between
the two chalk lines is called the tropics. Countries that are located in this zone
experience a tropical climate where the annual average temperature is above
18°C.

      Now, find the Arctic Circle and the Antarctic Circle on the globe. Trace
them with blue chalk. Between the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic Circle is the
northern temperate zone; between the Tropic of Capricorn and the Antarctic
Circle is the southern temperate zone. Countries in these zones go through
four seasons – winter, spring summer, and autumn.

      Finally, the areas within the Arctic Circle and Antarctic Circle are called
the polar regions or frigid zones. People who choose to live in these areas have
to deal with temperatures that never go above 10°C. It is cold all year round
and even during the summer months, it does not feel like summer at all.

       To sum up, the closer the latitude is to the equator, the warmer the
climate. The closer it is to the poles, the colder. Thus, it is clear that there is a
relationship between the latitude of a place and the climate it experiences, and
you will find out why in the next module.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                 178


94                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Landmasses and Bodies of Water

        Using latitude and longitude is not the only way that you can describe
 the location of a certain area. Another way is by identifying the landmasses and
 bodies of water that are found in that area. So, what are the landmasses and
 bodies of water that surround the Philippines? Do the following activity and get
 to know the surrounding geography.



 Activity 2
 Where in the world is the Philippines? (Part II)
 Objective

         After performing this activity, you should be able to describe the location
         of the Philippines with respect to the surrounding landmasses and
         bodies of water.

 What to use

         globe or world map

 What to do

 1.    Using a globe or a world map as reference, label the blank map below.
 2.    Your labelled map should include the following:

                  A. Landmasses                     B. Bodies of water

                  Philippine archipelago            Philippine Sea
                  Asian continent                   South China Sea
                  Malay peninsula                   Indian Ocean
                  Isthmus of Kra                    Pacific Ocean
                  Indonesian archipelago
                  Australian continent

         Q1. Which bodies of water in the list are found to the west of the
             Philippines?




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                  179


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                             95
Q2. Which body of water in the list is located to the east of the
             Philippines?


         Q3. Which large landmass is found to the north of the Philippines?


 3.    Be ready to show the map with your labels when your teachers asks you.




      Figure 4. Where is the Philippines in the map? Why is the Philippines called an
      archipelago?




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                     180


96                                                Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
By now you can say that you really know where the Philippines is. You
 can now describe its location in two ways: by using latitude and longitude, and
 by identifying the landmasses and bodies of water that surround it. What then
 is the use of knowing where the Philippines is located? You will find out in the
 next section and also in the following module.

 Are We Lucky in the Philippines?

        Planet Earth is made up of different things - air, water, plants, animals,
 soil, rocks, minerals, crude oil, and other fossil fuels. These things are called
 natural resources because they are not made by people; rather they are
 gathered from nature. Sunlight and wind are also natural resources. We use all
 these things to survive or satisfy our needs.

       The Philippines is considered rich in natural resources. We have fertile,
 arable lands, high diversity of plant and animals, extensive coastlines, and rich
 mineral deposits. We have natural gas, coal, and geothermal energy. Wind and
 water are also harnessed for electricity generation.




      Photo: Courtesy of Cecile N. Sales   Photo: Courtesy of Kit Stephen S. Agad   http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:POTW_
                                                                                    MichelleELLA01.jpg
      Figure 5: What kind of natural resources are shown in the pictures? Do you have
      similar resources in your area?


        Why do we have rich natural resources? What geologic structures in the
 country account for these bounty? Is our location near the equator related to
 the presence of these natural resources?

       The next lessons will help you find answers to some questions about
 natural resources in the country namely, rocks and minerals, water, soil,
 varied life forms, and energy.



 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                                             181


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                                       97
   How does our latitude position affect the water, soil resources, and
             biodiversity in the country?
            What mineral deposits do we have in the country? Where are they
             located and why only in those places?
            Given our location, what energy resources are available?
               Which of our practices in using natural resources are sustainable?
             Which are not sustainable?
               How can we help conserve natural resources so that future
             generations can also enjoy them?

           Hopefully, the knowledge and skills acquired in the lessons will help you
     value your responsibility as a productive citizen so that you can help prevent
     protected and vulnerable places from being mined, forests from being overcut,
     and natural resources like metals from ending up in a dumpsite.

     Water Resources and Biodiversity

           The Philippines boasts of many different kinds of natural water forms,
     such as bays, rivers, lakes, falls, gulfs, straits, and swamps. Because it is made
     up of islands, the country's coastline (seashore) if laid end-to-end, would
     measure around 17.5 thousand kilometers. And you know how we are proud of
     our coastlines! The bodies of water and its surrounding environment not only
     support the survival of diverse organisms for food but are also used for other
     economic activities. All these you learned in Araling Panlipunan.

            In the previous activity you identified two big bodies of water on the west
     and east side of the country: the Pacific Ocean in the east and south China Sea
     in the west (sometimes referred to as the West Philippine Sea). These bodies of
     water are the origin of typhoons which on the average, according to Philippine
     Atmospheric, Geophysical and Astronomical Services Administration (PAGASA),
     is about 20 a year. Typhoons and the monsoons (amihan and habagat) bring
     lots of rain to the Philippines.

           What is your association with too much rainfall? For some, rain and
     typhoons result in flooding, landslides, and health related-problems. But water
     is one of nature’s gifts to us. People need fresh water for many purposes. We
     use water for domestic purposes, for irrigation, and for industries. We need
     water to generate electricity. We use water for recreation or its aesthetic value.
     Many resorts are located near springs, waterfalls or lakes.



     Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                              182


98                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Where does water in your community come from? You collect them when
 the rain falls or get them from the river, deep well, or spring. But where does
 water from rivers, lakes, and springs originate?

       They come from a watershed – an area of land on a slope which drains its
 water into a stream and its tributaries (small streams that supply water to a
 main stream). This is the reason why a watershed is sometimes called a
 catchment area or drainage basin. It includes the surface of the land and the
 underground rock formation drained by the stream.

       From an aerial view, drainage patterns in a watershed resemble a
 network similar to the branching pattern of a tree. Tributaries, similar to twigs
 and small branches, flow into streams, the main branch of the tree. Streams
 eventually empty into a large river comparable to the trunk.




                                                     http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Maria1637jf.JPG

 Figure 6. The network of streams in a watershed area is illustrated on the left and a
 photo of a watershed area is on the right. How does the concept “water runs downhill”
 apply to a watershed?

       Watersheds come in all shapes and sizes. They cross towns and
 provinces. In other parts of the world, they may cross national boundaries.

       There are many watersheds in the Philippines basically because we have
 abundant rainfall. Do you know that Mt. Apo in Davao-Cotabato, Makiling-
 Banahaw in Laguna and Quezon, and Tiwi in Albay are watersheds? You must
 have heard about La Mesa Dam in Metro Manila, Pantabangan Dam in
 Pampanga, and Angat Dam in Bulacan. These watersheds are sources of water
 of many communities in the area. The Maria Cristina Falls in Iligan City is in a
 watershed; it is used to generate electricity. Locate these places in your map.
 Ask elders where the watershed is in or near your area? Observe it is used in
 your community.



 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                        183


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                  99
But watersheds are not just about water. A single watershed may include
combination of forest, grassland, marshes, and other habitats. Diverse
organisms in the Philippines are found in these areas! Being a tropical country,
the Philippines has abundant rainfall, many bodies of water, and lots of
sunshine. The right temperature and abundant rainfall explain partly why our
country is considered to be a mega-diverse country. This means that we have
high diversity of plants and animals, both on land and in water (Philippine
Clearing House Mechanism Website, 2012).

      Reports show that in many islands of the Philippine archipelago, there is
a high number of endemic plants and animals (endemic means found only in
the Philippines). The country hosts more than 52,177 described species of
which more than half is found nowhere else in the world. They say that on a
per unit area basis, the Philippines shelters more diversity of life than any
other country on the planet.

      For now remember that the main function of a watershed is the
production of a continuous water supply that would maintain the lifeforms
within it and in the area fed by its stream. Later you will learn that besides
supporting the survival of varied life forms, abundant water in the country is
important in moderating temperature. This topic will be discussed later.

      Have you ever asked yourself the following questions? If we have
abundant rainfall to feed watersheds, why do we experience drought some
parts of the year? What factors affect the health of a watershed? Is there a way
of regulating the flow of water in watershed so that there will be enough for all
throughout the year? What can people do to keep watersheds ‘healthy’? Find
out about these in the next activity.



Activity 3
What are some factors that will affect the amount of
water in watersheds?
Objective

        You will design a procedure to show how a certain factor affects the
        amount of water that can be stored underground or released by a
        watershed to rivers, lakes and other bodies of water.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                               184


100                                        Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
What to do

 1.    In your group, choose one factor that you want to investigate.

       a.     Vegetation cover

        b.    Slope of the area

        c.    Kind of soil

        d.    Amount of rainfall


 2.    Identify the variables that you need to control and the variable that you
       will change.

 3.    Design a procedure to determine the effect of the factor you chose on
       watersheds.

 4.    Be ready to present your design in the class and to defend why you
       designed it that way.




 Soil Resources, Rainfall and Temperature

       Recall in elementary school science that soil is formed when rocks and
 other materials near the Earth’s surface are broken down by a number of
 processes collectively called weathering. You learned two types of weathering:
 the mechanical breaking of rocks or physical weathering, and the chemical
 decay of rocks or chemical weathering.

       Let us review what happens to a piece of rock when left under the Sun
 and rain for a long time. Do the next activity.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                              185


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                        101
Activity 4
 How are soils formed from rocks?
 Objectives

           1.     Using the information in the table, trace the formation of soil from
                  rocks.

           2.     Identify the factors acting together on rocks to form soil.

 What to use

           Drawing pens

 What to do

 1. Processes involved in soil formation are listed in the table below. Read the
    descriptions of the processes and make your own illustrations of the
    different processes. Draw in the designated spaces.

 2. Use the descriptions and your drawings to answer the following questions.

       Q1. What are the factors that act together on rocks to form soil?

       Q2. What does the following sentence mean, “Soils were once rocks”?


                Processes of soil formation                        Illustrations of processes

      When a piece of rock is exposed to the Sun,       Drawing A
      its outer part expands (becomes bigger)
      because it heats up faster than the inner part
      (Drawing A).


      On cooling, at night time, the outer part of      Drawing B
      the rock contracts or shrinks because the
      outer part of the rock cools faster than the
      inner portion (Drawing B). The process of
      expansion and contraction are repeated over
      the years and produce cracks in the rock
      causing the outer surface to break off.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                          186


102                                                    Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Processes of soil formation                      Illustrations of processes

     Once broken, water enters the cracks causing      Drawing C
     some minerals to dissolve. The rock breaks
     apart further. (Drawing C).




     Air also enters the cracks, and oxygen in the     Drawing D
     air combines with some elements such as
     iron to produce iron oxide (rust or kalawang)
     which is brittle and will easily peel off. In a
     similar way, carbon dioxide from the air
     reacts with water to form an acid causing the
     rock to soften further. Once soft and broken,
     bacteria and small plants start to grow in the
     cracks of the rock (Drawing D).
     After some time, the dead plants and
     animals die and decay causing the formation
     of more acidic substances which further
     breaks the rocks. The dead bodies of plants
     and animals are acted upon by
     microorganism and breakdown into smaller
     compounds while the minerals from the rock
     return to the soil.




         Soil covers the entire Earth. Temperature, rainfall, chemical changes,
  and biological action act together to continuously form soil. Climate, expressed
  as both temperature and rainfall effects, is often considered the most powerful
  soil-forming factor.

        Temperature controls how fast chemical reactions occur. Many reactions
  proceed more quickly as temperature increases. Warm-region soils are
  normally more developed or more mature than cold-region soils. Mature soils
  have more silt and clay on or near the surface. Thus, soils in the tropical areas
  are observed to sustain various farming activities and account for why the
  primary source of livelihood in the Philippines and other countries in the


  Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                187


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                           103
tropical region is their fertile land. What is the effect of very little rainfall on
food production?

      Climate (temperature and rainfall) is a significant factor not only in soil
formation but also in sustaining diversity of plants and animals in the country.
On the other hand, water also directly affects the movement of soluble soil
nutrients from the top soil to deep under the ground (leaching). These
nutrients may no longer be available to shallow rooted plants. Acidic rainwater
may also contribute to the loss of minerals in soil resulting in low yield. So
rainfall determines the kind of vegetation in an area. In turn, the degree of
vegetation cover, especially in sloping areas, determines how much soil is
removed. Are there ways to protect soil resources?


Rocks and Mineral Resources

      History tells us that rocks have been used by humans for more than two
million years. Our ancestors lived in caves; they carved rocks and stones to
make tools for hunting animals, cultivating crops, or weapons for protection.
Rocks, stones, gravel, and sand were and are still used to make roads,
buildings, monuments, and art objects.




      http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:DirkvdM_rocks.jpg   http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Pana_Banaue_Rice_Terraces.jpg


      Figure 7. What are the features of the                     Figure 8. What kind of tools do you think
      rocks? What environmental factors                          were used to build the Rice Terraces?
      may have caused such features?                             Why are terraces useful?


       The mining of rocks for their metal content has been considered one of
the most important factors of human progress. The mining industry has raised
levels of economy in some regions, in part because of the kind of metals
available from the rocks in those areas.



Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                                              188


104                                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Activity 5
 Where are the minerals deposits in the Philippines?
       Mineral deposits can be classified into two types: metallic and non-
 metalllic. You have already learned the symbols of some metals and nonmetals.
 Review them before you do the activity.

 Objectives

 After performing this activity, you will be able to

      1.    locate the metallic mineral deposits across the country;
      2.    find out what geologic features are common in areas where the deposits
            are found;
      3.    give a possible reason/s for the association between metallic mineral
            deposits and geologic features in the country; and
      4.    infer why your area or region is rich or not rich in metallic mineral
            deposits.

 What to use

      Figure 9: Metallic Deposits Map of the Philippines
      Figure 10: Map of Trenches and Faults in the Philippines
      Figure 11: Map of Volcanoes in the Philippines
      2 pieces of plastic sheet used for book cover, same size as a book page
      Marking pens (two colors, if possible)

 What to do

 Part I

 1.    Familiarize yourself with the physical map of the Philippines. Identify
       specific places of interest to you in the different regions.

 2.    In your notebook, make a four-column table with headings similar to
       Table 1.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                     189


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               105
Table 1: Metallic Minerals in the Philippines and Their Location

          Metal, in          Metal, in    Province/Region              Geologic Structure
          Symbols             Words      Where the Metals are          Near the Location
         (Example:                              Found                    of the Metallic
            Au)                                                             Deposits
            (1)                    (2)           (3)                           (4)




3.    As a group, study the Metallic Deposits Map of the Philippines. See Figure
      9. In the map you will see symbols of metals. Fill in the information
      needed in Columns 1 and 2 of your own table.

4.    Check with each other if you have correctly written the correct words for
      the symbol of the metals. Add as many rows as there are kinds of metals
      in the map.

5.    Analyze the data in Table 1.

      Q1. Identify five metals which are most abundant across the country. Put
          a number on this metal (1 for most abundant, 2 next abundant, and
          so on).

      Q2. Record in Column 3 where the five most abundant metals are located.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                    190


106                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Figure 9. Metallic Deposits in the Philippines




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                     191


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                               107
Figure 10. Trenches and Faults in the Philippines



 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                      192



108                                                Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Figure 11. Volcanoes in the Philippines


 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                193


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          109
Part II

 1.    Get two plastic sheets. On one sheet, trace the outlines of the trenches
       and faults from Figure 10. On the other sheet, trace the location of
       volcanoes from Figure 11.

 2.    Place the Trench and Fault plastic sheet over the Metallic Deposits map.

 3.    Place the Volcanoes plastic sheet over the two maps.
       Q3. What geologic structures are found near the location of the metallic
           deposits? Write trenches, faults or volcanoes in column 4 of Table 1.
       Q4. Write a statement to connect the presence of metallic deposits with
           trenches or volcanic areas.
       Q5. Why do you think are metallic deposits abundant in places where
           there are trenches or volcanoes?

 4.    Look for your province in the map.
       Q6. Are there metallic deposits in your area?
       Q7. What could be reason for the presence or absence of metallic deposits
           in your area? You can download the detailed map of Trenches, Faults
           and volcanoes in the Philippines from the website of Phivolcs.
       Q8. If there are metallic deposits, what activities tell you that there are
           indeed deposits in or near your area/province?



       The important metallic minerals found in various parts of the Philippines
 include gold, copper, iron, chromite (made up of chromium, iron, and other
 metals), nickel, cobalt, and platinum. The most productive copper and gold
 producers in the Philippines are found in Baguio, the province of Benguet, and
 in Surigao-Davao areas. Major producers of nickel are in Palawan and Surigao
 (DENR Website, 2012).

        Metals are important. The properties of metals make them useful for
 specific purposes. You learned these in Quarter 1. Iron is the main material for
 steel bars used in buildings and road construction. Copper is used in making
 electrical wires. Tin is the material for milk cans and other preserved food
 products. Nickel is mixed with copper or other metals to form stainless cooking
 wares. Gold is important in making jewelry.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                               194


110                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
What other metals are you familiar with? What are the uses of
 aluminum? What metal is used to make GI sheets for roofing? What metals are
 used to make artificial arms or legs? Are metals used in chairs and other
 furniture? Do you know that some dentists use gold for filling teeth cavities?
 Look around and find how versatile metals are.

        The Philippines has also varied nonmetallic resources including sand
 and gravel, limestone, marble, clay, and other quarry materials. Your teacher
 will show you a map of the nometallic deposits in the Philippines. Locate your
 area and determine what nonmetallic deposits are found there. How are these
 deposits recovered? How are they used in your community? For example: What
 are the uses of sand, gravel, or clay? How are marble stones used? Think of
 other nonmetals and their uses!




 Copper –iron ore                   Iron filings           Quartz                Copper ore

 Figure 12. From the drawing, what are ores? Have you noticed that a piece of ore can
 have more than one kind of mineral in it?

       Do you know that the Philippines is listed as the 5th mineral country in
 the world, 3rd in gold reserves, 4th in copper, and 5th in nickel! The ores
 (mineral-bearing rocks) are processed out of the country to recover the pure
 metal. We buy the pure metal. Is this practice advantageous to the Philippines?
 Why or why not?

       The richness of the Philippines
 in terms of mineral resources is being
 attributed to its location in the so-
 called Pacific Ring of Fire. See Figure
 13. This area is associated with over
 450 volcanoes (small triangles in the
 map) and is home to approximately
 75% of the world's active volcanoes.
 Why are there minerals where there Figure 13. Besides the Philippines, what
 are volcanoes?                          other countries are in the Ring of Fire? Do
                                                    you think they are also rich in mineral
                                                    resources?

 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                              195


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                        111
Geologists (scientists who study the Earth and the processes that occur
in and on it) explain that there is a continuous source of heat deep under the
Earth; this melts rocks and other materials (link to usgs website) The mixture
of molten or semi-molten materials is called magma. Because magma is hotter
and lighter than the surrounding rocks, it rises, melting some of the rocks it
passes on the way. If the magma finds a way to the surface, it will erupt as
lava. Lava flow is observed in erupting volcanoes.

      But the rising magma does not always reach the surface to erupt.
Instead, it may slowly cool and harden beneath the volcano and form different
kinds of igneous rocks. Under favourable temperature and pressure conditions,
the metal-containing rocks continuously melt and redeposit, eventually forming
rich-mineral veins.

      Though originally scattered in very small amounts in magma, the metals
are concentrated when magma convectively moves and circulates ore-bearing
liquids and gases. This is the reason why metallic minerals deposits such as
copper, gold, silver, lead, and zinc are associated with magmas found deep
within the roots of extinct volcanoes. And as you saw in the maps, volcanoes
are always near trenches and faults! You will learn more of this later.

       For now you must have realized that the presence of mineral deposits in
the Philippines is not by accident. It is nature’s gift. If before, your association
with volcanoes and trenches is danger and risk to life and property, now you
know that the presence of volcanoes, trenches and other geological structures
is the reason for the rich mineral deposits in the country.

      The existence of volcanoes also explains why the Philippines is rich in
geothermal energy (heat from the Earth). Energy resources will be discussed in
the next section.

Energy Resources

      The abundance of some metal resources in the Philippines is related to
geologic structures, specifically the presence of volcanoes and trenches in the
country. The year-round warm temperature and availability of water are effects
of our geographic location.

      The tropical climate and the geological conditions also provide several
possibilities to get clean and cheap energy. Do you know which energy


Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                196


112                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
resources are due to these factors? Were the following included in your list-
 solar energy, heat from the ground (geothermal energy), hydrothermal energy
 from falling water), wind energy, and natural gas?

       Solar energy is free and inexhaustible.
 This energy source will be discussed in a later
 science subject.

        Geothermal energy was briefly introduced
 in the lesson on mineral resources and their
 location. The Philippines ranked second to the
 United States in terms of geothermal energy
 deposits. Geothermal power plants are located
 in Banahaw-Makiling, Laguna, Tiwi in Albay,                      http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Hot_Spring.jpg

 Bacman in Sorsogon, Palimpinon in Negros
                                                                   Figure 14. Do you know that heat
 Occidental, Tongonan in Leyte, and Mt. Apo                        from the Earth may escape as
 side of Cotabato.                                                 steam in a hot spring?



       Try to locate places with geothermal power plants in your map? Does
 your area have geothermal energy deposits? How do you know?

        Hydrothermal or hydroelectric
 power plants use water to generate
 electricity. They provide for 27% of
 total electricity production in the
 country. Ambuklao in Benguet, Mt
 Province, Agus in Lanao del Sur and
 Agus in Lanao del Norte are large
 hydrothermal power plants. Small
 hydroelectric power plants are in
 Caliraya, Laguna, Magat in Isabela,
                                         Photograph courtesy of National Power Corporation, retrieved
 Loboc in Bohol, and other places. Used from http://www.industcards.com/hydro-philippines.htm
 water from hydropower plants flows
                                         Figure 15. How is water used to
 through irrigation systems. Many of the
                                         generate electricity?
 reservoir areas are used for sport
 activities.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                              197


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                        113
Again, locate places with hydroelectric power plants in your map? Does
your area have hydroelectric power plants? What other uses do you have for
water in these areas?

       Natural gas is a form of fossil fuel, so are coal and crude oil (sometimes
called petroleum). Fossil fuels were formed from plants and animals that lived
on Earth millions of years ago. They are buried deep in the Earth. Natural gas
and oil are taken from the deep through oil rigs while coal is extracted through
mining. Fossil fuels are used to produce electricity and run vehicles and factory
machines. Did you know that petroleum is the raw material for making
plastics?

      In the Philippines, we have coal
and natural gas deposits. Coal is a
black or brownish black, solid rock
that can be burned. It contains about
40% non-combustible components,
thus a source of air pollution when
used as fuel. Coal deposits are
scattered over the Philippines but the
largest deposit is located in Semirara   Figure 16. The black bands in the picture
                                         are coal deposits. Coal is not like the
Island, Antique. Coal mines are also
                                         charcoal you use for broiling fish or
located    in    Cebu,     Zamboanga     barbecue.   What do you think is the
Sibuguey,     Albay,    Surigao,  and    difference?
Negros Provinces.

       Our natural gas deposits are found offshore of Palawan. Do you know
where this place is? The Malampaya Deepwater Gas-to-Power Project employs
‘state-of-the-art deepwater technology’ to draw natural gas from deep beneath
Philippine waters. The gas fuels three natural gas-fired power stations to
provide 40-45% of Luzon's power generation requirements. The Department of
Energy reports that since October 2001, the Philippines has been importing
less petroleum for electricity generation, providing the country foreign-
exchange savings and energy security from this clean fuel.

      Natural gas is considered clean fuel because when burned, it produces
the least carbon dioxide, among fossil fuels. CO2 is naturally present in air in
small amounts. However, studies show that increase in carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere results in increase in atmospheric temperature, globally. You will
learn about global warming in the next module.


Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                               198


114                                        Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Did you know that in Ilocos Province, giant wind mills as shown in
Figure 5 of this module are used to generate electricity. In Quirino, Ilocos Sur
the electricity generated from wind mills runs a motorized sugarcane press for
the community's muscovado sugar production? This project is a joint effort
between the local farmers and local organizations with support from Japan. In
Bangui, Ilocos Norte, the windmills as high as 50 meters not only help
improve the tourism in Ilocos but it also provides 40% of the energy
requirements for electricity in the entire province. This proves that we do not
have to be dependent on fossil fuel in our country.


      What do you think are the environmental conditions in Ilocos Sur and
Ilocos Norte that allow them to use wind power for electricity? Do you think
there are places that have these conditions? Support your answers.

Conserving and Protecting Natural Resources

     There are two types of natural resources on Earth - renewable and
nonrenewable. What is the difference between these two kinds of resources?

       The food people eat comes from plants and animals. Plants are replaced
by new ones after each harvest. People also eat animals. Animals have the
capacity to reproduce and are replaced when young animals are born. Water in
a river or in a well may dry up. But when the rain comes the water is replaced.
Plants, animals, and water are resources that can be replaced. They are
renewable resources.

       Most plants grow in top soil. Rain and floods wash away top soil. Can top
soil be replaced easily? Soil comes from rocks and materials from dead plants
and animals. It takes thousands of years for soil to form. Soil cannot be
replaced easily, or it takes a very long time to replace. It is a nonrenewable
resource.

      Metals like copper, iron, and aluminum are abundant on Earth. But
people are using them up fast. They have to dig deeper into the ground to get
what they need. Coal, oil and natural gas (fossil fuels) were formed from plants
and animals that lived on Earth millions of years ago. It takes millions of years
for dead plants and animals to turn into fossil fuels. Soil, coal, oil and natural
gas are nonrenewable resources.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                 199


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          115
Before you do Activity 6, think of these sentences: “Too much is taken
from Earth!" and "Too much is put into Earth." You may write up a short essay
about your understanding of the sentences.



Activity 6
How do people destroy natural resources?
Objectives

      1.    Identify the effects of some human activities on natural resources.
      2.    Suggest ways to reduce the effects.

What to Do

1.    Study Table 2 and tell if you have observed the activities listed in your
      locality.

Table 2. Ways People Destroy Natural Resources
                    Activities                     Effects on Natural Resources
                       (1)                                      (2)
When roads are built, mountains are          Damage natural habitats               and/or      kill
blown off using dynamite.                    plants and animals.
Rice fields are turned into residential or
commercial centers.
People cut too many trees for lumber or
paper or building houses.
More factories are being built to keep up
with the demands of a fast growing
population and industrialization.

Too much mining and quarrying for the
purpose of getting precious metals and
stones and gravel.
Some farmers use too much chemical           Too much fertilizer destroys the quality of
fertilizers to replenish soil fertility.     the soil and is harmful to both human
                                             and animals.
Plastics and other garbage are burned.

Cars, trucks, and tricycles that emit dark
smoke (smoke belchers) are allowed to
travel.
Other activities




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                   200


116                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
2.     Discuss the effects of these activities on natural resources.

 3.     Write the effects on the column opposite the activities. An activity may
        have more than one effect. Some of the effects have already been listed in
        the table.

 4.     Do you know of other activities that destroy or cause the depletion of
        natural resources? Add them to the list and fill the corresponding effect in
        column 2.

 5.     What can you do to conserve resources?



Protecting Resources in Your Own Way

      All resources used by humans, including fuels, metals, and building
 materials, come from the Earth. Many of these resources are not in endless
 supply. It has taken many thousands and millions of years to develop and
 accumulate these resources.

       To conserve natural resources is to protect or use them wisely without
 wasting them or using them up completely. Conserving natural resources can
 make them last and be available for future generations. This is what
 sustainability of natural resources means. Each one of us should think about
 how to make things sustainable. Remember: The lives of future generations
 depend on how we use natural resources today.




 Activity 7
 Are you ready for “Make-a-Difference” Day?
        This activity involves you in hands-on activities that help you learn more
 about reducing waste, reusing materials instead of throwing them away,
 recycling, composting, and conserving natural resources and energy. There are
 many activities that you can include: conducting a "waste-free lunch" or
 building art materials out of cans, bottles, and other recyclable trash.
 Depending on the location and nature of your school, you might want to
 include river cleanup, trail maintenance, or tree planting. Or, you can mix
 these activities with a poster making contest for use in the campaign on non-
 use of plastic bags for shopping and/or marketing.


 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                  201


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                            117
What to do

 1.    In your group, make a list of what is done in your school that help
       conserve natural resources. Discuss your list before finalizing the report.

 2.    Make another list of what is done in your school that do not help conserve
       natural resources. For example, do you still have lots of things in the trash
       can or on the ground? What are they? What is being done with them?

 3.    Come up with a one-day plan on what else can be done in school to
       conserve natural resources. Present your plan to the class.

 4.    Based on the group presentation, decide which part in the plans will be
       adopted or adapted to make a class plan. The plan should consider the
       following:
        Easy to follow
        Who will be responsible for making the plan happen
        What should be done if the people responsible for making the plan
           happen will not or cannot do it
        What natural resources will be conserved
        Schedule of activities to include monitoring
        Why you think this plan is the best idea

 5.    With your teacher’s permission, make an appointment with your principal
       to present your plan and to solicit support. Maybe she might recommend
       the “Make-a-Difference” Day for the whole school!



       Hopefully, the “Make-a-Difference” Day will engage you in a variety of
 environmental activities that help foster not only an appreciation for the
 environment and the resources it provides but also develop a life-long
 environmental stewardship among your age group.

 Links and Other Reading Materials

 gdis.denr.gov.ph (Geohazard Map)
 http://www.phivolcs.dost.gov.ph
 http://www.jcmiras.net/surge/p124.htm (Geothermal power plants in the
      Philippines)
 http://www.industcards.com/hydro-philippines.htm (Hydroelectric power
      plants in the Philippines)


 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                202


118                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Suggested time allotment: 12 hours




     MODULE
                             SOLAR ENERGY AND THE
         2                   ATMOSPHERE

       In the previous module, you learned that the presence of different
natural resources in the Philippines is related to the country’s location. It
was also mentioned that the climate in a certain area depends on its
latitude. In this module, you are going to learn more about how the location
of the Philippines influences its climate and weather. To prepare you for this
lesson, you must first learn about the envelope of air that surrounds the
Earth where all weather events happen – the atmosphere.



Activity 1
What is the basis for dividing
Earth’s atmosphere into
layers?
      Earth’s atmosphere is divided into five
layers. What is the basis for subdividing the
atmosphere?

Objectives

      You will be able to gather information
about Earth’s atmosphere based on a graph.
Specifically, you will:

1.    describe the features of each of the five
      layers;
2.    compare the features of the five layers;
      and
3.    explain the basis for the division of the        Figure 1. What are the layers of the
      layers of the atmosphere.                        atmosphere?




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                    203
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                   119
What to use

          Graph in Figure 1
          A ruler, if available

 What to do

 1.       Study the graph.

          Q1.   What are the five layers? Estimate the height of each layer.
          Q2.   Describe the graph for each layer.
          Q3.   In which layer is temperature increasing with increasing altitude?
          Q4.   In which layer is temperature decreasing with increasing altitude?
          Q5.   What is the relationship between temperature and height in the
                - troposphere?
                - stratosphere?
                - mesosphere?
                - thermosphere?
                - exosphere?

          Q6. Observe the whole graph. What is the basis for the division of
              Earth’s atmosphere?
          Q7. From the graph, can you generalize that the higher the layer of the
              atmosphere (that is closer to the Sun), the hotter the temperature?
              Why or why not?
          Q8. What other information about Earth’s atmosphere can you derive
              from the graph?

 2.       Read the succeeding paragraphs and think of a way to organize and
          summarize the data about the atmosphere from the graph and the
          information in the discussion that follows.




        The troposphere is the layer closest to Earth’s surface. The
 temperature just above the ground is hotter than the temperature high
 above. Weather occurs in the troposphere because this layer contains most
 of the water vapor. Remember the water cycle? Without water, there would
 be no clouds, rain, snow or other weather features. Air in the troposphere is
 constantly moving. As a result, aircraft flying through the troposphere may
 have a very bumpy ride – what we know as turbulence. People who have
 used the airplane for travelling have experienced this especially when there
 is a typhoon in areas where the plane passes through.


120                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                            204
The stratosphere is the layer of air that extends to about 50 km from
 Earth’s surface. Many jet aircraft fly in the stratosphere because it is very
 stable. It is in the stratosphere that we find the ozone layer. The ozone layer
 absorbs much of the Sun’s harmful radiation that would otherwise be
 dangerous to plant and animal life.

        The layer between 50 km and 80 km above the Earth’s surface is
 called the mesosphere. Air in this layer is very thin and cold. Meteors or rock
 fragments burn up in the mesosphere.

       The thermosphere is between 80 km and 110 km above the Earth.
 Space shuttles fly in this area and it is also where the auroras are found.
 Auroras are caused when the solar wind strikes gases in the atmosphere
 above the Poles. Why can we not see auroras in the Philippines?

       The upper limit of our atmosphere is the exosphere. This layer of the
 atmosphere merges into space. Satellites are stationed in this area, 500 km
 to 1000 km from Earth.

       To summarize what has been discussed: More than three quarters of
 Earth’s atmosphere is made up of nitrogen while one fifth is oxygen. The
 remaining 1% is a mixture of carbon dioxide, water vapour, and ozone.
 These gases not only produce important weather features such as cloud and
 rain, but also have considerable influence on the overall climate of the
 Earth, through the greenhouse effect and global warming.


 What is the Greenhouse Effect?

      In order to understand the greenhouse effect, you need to first
 understand how a real greenhouse works.

       In temperate countries, a greenhouse is used to grow seedlings in the
 late winter and early spring and later, planted in the open field when the
 weather is warmer. Greenhouses also protect plants from weather
 phenomena such snowstorm or dust storms. In tropical countries,
 greenhouses are used by commercial plant growers to protect flowering and
 ornamental plants from harsh weather conditions and insect attack.

       Greenhouses range in size from small sheds to very large buildings.
 They also vary in terms of types of covering materials. Some are made of
 glass while others are made of plastic.



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                           121
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                            205
http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Gartengew%C3%A4chshaus.JPG

 Figure 2. Different sizes of greenhouses. How does a greenhouse work?




 Activity 2
 Does a greenhouse retain or release heat?

 Objectives

         The activity will enable you to

         1.      construct a model greenhouse.
         2.      find out if your model greenhouse retains heat
         3.      relate the concept of greenhouse to the increasing temperature of
                 Earth’s atmosphere.

 What to use

        2-liter plastic soft drink bottle
        2-plastic containers to serve as base of the bottles
        knife or scissors
        transparent tape
                                                            Be careful when
        two alcohol thermometers                           handling sharp
                                           CAUTION
        one reading lamp (if                               objects like knife or
         available), otherwise bring                        scissors and
         the setups under the Sun                           breakable equipment
                                                            like thermometer.


 What to do

 Constructing the model greenhouse

       For each model greenhouse you will need a two-liter plastic soft drink
 container (with cap) and a shallow plastic container for the base.


122                                                                  Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                                 206
1.    Remove the label of the soft drink bottle but keep the cap attached.

 2.    Cut off carefully, the end of the bottle approximately 5-6 cm from the
       bottom. Dispose of the bottom piece.

 3.    Place the bottle with cap in the plastic base. This is your model
       greenhouse. Label it Bottle A.

 4.    Use scissors or knife to cut several elongated openings or vents (1.5 x
       5.0 cm) on the sides of Bottle B. Leave Bottle A intact.

 5.    Tape a thermometer onto a piece of cardboard. Make sure that the
       cardboard is longer than the thermometer so that the bulb will not
       touch the plastic base. Make two thermometer setups, one for Bottle A
       and another for Bottle B. Place one thermometer setup in each bottle.




                     Figure 3. How to construct a model greenhouse

 6.    Place both bottles approximately 10 cm away             NOTE:
       from the lamp. DO NOT turn on the lamp yet.
                                                               If you have no lamp,
       Q1.      Predict which bottle will get hotter when
                                                               bring the setups
                you turn on the light or when they are         outside the classroom
                exposed to the Sun. How will you know          under the Sun where
                that one bottle is hotter than the other?      they will not be
                                                               disturbed.
       Q2.      Write down your prediction and the
                reason why you predicted that way.


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                      123
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                      207
7.    Turn on the light and begin collecting data every five minutes for 25
       minutes. (Note: But if you have no lamp, place the setups under the
       Sun. Read the temperature every 20 minutes for over two hours.)


 8.    Record the temperature readings of Bottle A and Bottle B in your
       notebook.


 9.    Graph your data separately for Bottles A and B.
       Q3.     What variable did you put in the x-axis? In the y-axis?
       Q4.     Why did you put these data in the x and y axes, respectively?
       Q5.     Describe the graph resulting from observations in Bottle A.
       Q6.     Describe the graph resulting from observations in Bottle B.
       Q7.     Explain the similarities in the graphs of Bottles A and B.
       Q8.     Explain the differences in the graphs of Bottles A and B.
       Q9.     Does this activity help you answer the question in the activity
               title: Do greenhouses retain heat? What is the evidence?




       Greenhouses allow sunlight to enter but prevent heat from escaping.
 The transparent covering of the greenhouse allows visible light to enter
 without obstruction. It warms the inside of the greenhouse as energy is
 absorbed by the plants, soil, and other things inside the building. Air
 warmed by the heat inside is retained in the building by the roof and wall.
 The transparent covering also prevents the heat from leaving by reflecting
 the energy back into the walls and preventing outside winds from carrying it
 away.

        The Earth’s atmosphere is compared to a greenhouse. You know that
 besides nitrogen and oxygen, Earth’s atmosphere contains trace gases such
 as carbon dioxide, water vapor, methane, and ozone. Like the glass in a
 greenhouse, the trace gases have a similar effect on the Sun’s rays. They
 allow sunlight to pass through, resulting in the warming up of the Earth’s
 surface. But they absorb the energy coming from the Earth’s surface,
 keeping the Earth’s temperature suitable for life on Earth. The process by
 which the Earth’s atmosphere warms up is called ‘greenhouse effect,’ and
 the trace gases are referred to as ‘greenhouse gases.’




124                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                           208
https://sites.google.com/site/glowar88/all-about-global-warming/1-what-is-global-warming

                       Figure 4. Why are greenhouse gases like the glass in
                       the greenhouse?


        The ‘greenhouse effect’ is a natural process and it warms the Earth.
 Without the greenhouse effect, Earth would be very cold, too cold for living
 things, such as plants and animals.

        To further understand the
 effect of greenhouse gases look at
 Figure 5. It contains some data
 about Venus and Earth, planets
 that are almost of the same size
 and     if  you   remember     from
 elementary school science, are near
 each other, so they are called twin
 planets.    The    composition    of
 atmosphere     and    the   average
 surface temperature of the two
 planets are also given. Why is the                           Figure 5. What gas is present in the
 average temperature of Venus very                            atmosphere of Venus that explains its
 much higher than that of Earth?                              high surface temperature?
 What could have caused this
 phenomenon?

      Both Earth and Venus have carbon dioxide, a greenhouse gas, in their
 atmospheres. The small amount of carbon dioxide on Earth’s gives the right
 temperature for living things to survive. With the high surface temperature



Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                                125
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                                 209
of Venus due to its high carbon dioxide concentration, do you think life
 forms like those we know of could exist there? Why or why not?

 Is Earth Getting Warmer? What is the Evidence?

       Studies have shown that before 1750 (called the pre-industrialization
 years), carbon dioxide concentration was about 0.028 percent or 280 parts
 per million (ppm) by volume. The graph below shows the concentration of
 carbon dioxide from 1958 to
 2003. What information can you
 derive from the graph?

       Recent studies report that
 in 2000-2009, carbon dioxide
 rose by 2.0 ppm per year. In
 2011, the level is higher than at
 any time during the last 800
 thousand        years.       Local
 temperatures             fluctuate
 naturally, over the past 50 years
 but      the    average     global
 temperature has increased at
 the fastest rate in recorded         http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Mauna_Loa_Carbon_Dioxi
 history.                             de-en.svg#file


                                      Figure 6. Carbon dioxide measurements in
                                      Mauna Loa Observatory, Hawaii



       So what if there is increasing emission of greenhouse gases like
 carbon dioxide into the atmosphere? What is the problem with a small
 increase in carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere?

       More carbon dioxide means that more heat is trapped in Earth’s
 atmosphere. More heat cannot return back into space. More heat trapped by
 the carbon dioxide means a warmer Earth.

        The increasing temperature phenomenon is known as ‘global
 warming’. Global means that all countries and people around the world are
 affected even if that country is not a major contributor of greenhouse gases.
 Many scientists now agree that many human activities emit more
 greenhouses gases into the atmosphere, making the natural greenhouse
 effect stronger. Scientists are also saying that if we carry on polluting the
 atmosphere with greenhouse gases, it will have a dangerous effect on the
 Earth.

126                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                           210
Sources of Greenhouse Gases

         Carbon dioxide is naturally produced when people and animals
 breathe. Plants and trees take in and use carbon dioxide to produce their
 own food. Volcanoes also produce carbon dioxide. Methane comes from
 grazing animals as they digest their food and from decaying matter in wet
 rice fields. Ozone is also naturally present in the stratosphere.

      But human activities emit a lot of greenhouse gases into the
 atmosphere.

          Study Figure 7.




                    http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Global_Carbon_Emission_by_Type
                    .png


                    Figure 7. Does burning of fossil fuels raise the
                    carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere?

      Which fossil fuel has the highest contribution to carbon dioxide
 concentration in the atmosphere?
          What human activities use this fuel? List at least three.
          Recall Module 1. What kind of fossil fuels are used in the Philippines?
      Are we also contributing to the increase                                   in    carbon   dioxide
 concentration in the atmosphere? Why or why not?

      Carbon dioxide comes from the burning of fossil fuel such as coal,
 crude oil and natural gas. Cutting down and burning of trees releases
 carbon dioxide. Methane can also be released from buried waste. For
 example, the left-over food, garden wastes, and animal wastes collected from
 our homes are thrown into dumpsites. When lots of wastes are compressed

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                                  127
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                   211
and packed together, they produce methane. Coal mining also produces
 methane.

        Another group of greenhouse gases includes the chlorofluorocarbons
 or CFCs for short. CFCs have been used in spray cans as propellants, in
 refrigerators as refrigerants, and in making foam plastics as foaming agents.
 They become dangerous when released into the atmosphere, depleting the
 ozone layer. For this reason, their use has been banned around the world.

        What have you learned about the atmosphere? There are natural
 processes in the atmosphere that protect and sustain life on Earth. For
 example, the greenhouse effect keeps temperature on Earth just right for
 living things. For as long as the concentration of greenhouse gases are
 controlled, we will have no problem.

        But human beings activities have emitted greenhouse gases into the
 atmosphere, increasing their levels to quantities that have adverse effects on
 people, plants, animals and the physical environment. Burning of fossil
 fuels, for example, has increased levels of carbon dioxide thus trapping more
 heat, increasing air temperature, and causing global warming. Such global
 phenomenon is feared to melt polar ice caps and cause flooding to low-lying
 areas that will result to reduction in biodiversity. It is even feared that global
 warming is already changing climates around the globe, causing stronger
 typhoons, and creating many health-related problems. You will learn more
 about climate change later.

 Common Atmospheric Phenomena

       In the next section, you will learn two concepts that will help you
 understand common atmospheric phenomena: why the wind blows, why
 monsoons occur, and what is the so-called intertropical convergence zone.
 All of these are driven by the same thing: the heat of the Sun or solar
 energy. Thus, we begin by asking, what happens when air is heated?



 Activity 3
 What happens when air is heated?
 Objective

       After this activity, you should be able to explain what happens when air
       is heated.




128                                           Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                         212
What to use

       two paper bags
       candle
       long straight stick
       match
       masking tape
       chair
                                         Figure 8. Setup for Activity 3
 What to do

 1. Attach a paper bag to each end of the stick (see drawing above). The
    open end of each bag should be facing down.

 2. Balance the stick with the paper bags on the chair (see drawing below.)

 3. Make a prediction: what do you
    think will happen if you place a
    lighted candle under the open end
    of one of the bags?

 4. Now, light the candle and place it
    below one of the bags. Caution: Do
    not place the candle too close to
    the paper bag. It may catch fire. Be
    ready with a pail of water or wet
    rag just in case.

                                                        Figure 9. Balance the stick with paper
                                                        bags on a chair.


 Q1. Was your prediction accurate?
     Describe what happened.



 Q2. Can you explain why?




                                                        Figure 10. What will happen when a
                                                        lighted candle is placed under one of
                                                        the bags?




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                          129
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                           213
This is the first concept that you need to know: Warm air rises. Now,
 try to answer the following question. When warm air is rising, what is its
 effect on the air in the surroundings? Will the air in the surroundings stay
 in place? Or will it be affected in some way by the rising air? Do the
 following activity and find out.




 Activity 4
 What happens to the air in the surroundings as warm
 air rises?
 Objective

     After performing this activity, you should be
 able to explain what happens to the air in the
 surroundings as warm air rises.

 What to use

 box                                candle
 scissors                           match
 cardboard tube                     smoke source
 clear plastic                        (ex. mosquito coil)

                                                                        Figure 11.
                                                                       Setup for Activity 4
 What to do

 Pre-activity

      Make two holes in the box: one hole on one side and another hole on
 top (see drawing). Place the cardboard tube over the hole on top and tape it
 in place. Make a window at the front side of the box so you can see inside.
 Cover the window with clear plastic to make the box airtight.

 Activity proper

 1.    Open the box and place the candle directly below the hole on top. Light
       up the candle and close the box.

 2.    Make a prediction: What do you think will happen if you place a smoke
       source near the hole?




130
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                     Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
                                                                                                   214
3.    Now, place the smoke source near
       the hole.

 Q1. Was your prediction accurate?

 Q2. What happened?

 Q3. Can you explain why?

                                                       Figure 12. What happens to the
                                                       smoke when the source is
                                                       placed near the hole?




 What Makes the Air Move?

        As you have seen in the activity, air in the surroundings can be
 affected by rising warm air. The drawing below shows how this happens.
 First, the air above the candle becomes warm because of the flame. What
 happens to this warm air? It rises. As warm air rises, what happens to the
 air in the surroundings? It will move toward the place where warm air is
 rising. But you cannot see air, how can you tell that it is moving? Did you
 see smoke from the mosquito coil? The movement of the smoke shows the
 movement of the air.




                            Figure 13. Air in the surroundings move
                           toward the place where warm air is rising.


       Let us now relate what happened in the activity to what happens in
 nature. During the day, the surface of the Earth becomes warm because of
 the Sun. Some parts of the Earth will warm up more quickly than others.
 Naturally, the air above the warmer surfaces will also become warm. What
 happens to the warm air? Just like in the activity, it will rise. How is the air
 in the surroundings affected? It will move toward the place where warm air

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                   131
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                    215
is rising. This is the other concept that you need to know: Air moves toward
 the place where warm air is rising.

        Whenever we feel the air moving, that means that somewhere, warm
 air is rising. And the air around us moves toward the place where warm air
 is rising. Do you remember that ‘moving air’ is called wind? Every time you
 feel the wind, it means that air is moving toward the place where warm air is
 rising. Strictly speaking, wind is air that is moving horizontally.

       Let us use now the two concepts you have learned to explain other
 things. You know that the surface of the Earth is made basically of two
 things: land and water. When the Sun’s rays strike land and water, do they
 heat up as fast as each other? Do land and water absorb heat from the Sun
 in the same way? Or is there a difference? Perform the next activity and find
 out.



 Activity 5
 Which warms up faster?
 Objectives

       After performing this activity, you should be able to

       1.     compare which warms up faster: sand or water
       2.     compare which cools faster: sand or water
       3.     use the results of the activity to explain sea breeze and land breeze

 What to use

       2 identical plastic containers           string
       2 thermometers                           water
       2 iron stands with clamps                sand

 What to do

 1.    In the shade, set up everything as shown below. The bulbs of the
       thermometer should be 2 cm below the surface of the water and sand.




132                                            Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                           216
Figure 14. Setup for Activity 5

 2.    Wait for 5 minutes, then read the initial temperature of the water and
       sand. Record the temperature readings below.

          Initial temperature reading for water: __________
          Initial temperature reading for sand: __________

 3.    Now, place the setup under the Sun. Read the thermometers again and
       record the temperature readings in Table 1. Read every 5 minutes for
       25 minutes.

                     Table 1. In the Sun
                       Observation                  Water              Sand
                     time (minutes)
                            0
                            5
                           10
                           15
                           20
                           25

 4.    After 25 minutes, bring the setup back to the shade. Read the
       thermometers and record the temperature readings in Table 2. Read
       every 5 minutes for 25 minutes.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                             133
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                              217
Table 2. In the shade
                      Observation         Water                  Sand
                    time (minutes)
                           0
                           5
                          10
                          15
                          20
                          25

 5.    Study the data in the tables and answer the following questions.

       Q1. Which has a higher temperature after 25 minutes in the Sun,
           water or sand?

       Q2. After 25 minutes, how many Celsius degrees was the increase in
           the temperature of the water? Of the sand?

 6.    Make a line graph using the temperature readings taken while the
       setup was in the Sun.

       Q3. Based on the graph, which became hot faster, water or sand?

       Q4. What happened to the temperature of the water and sand when
           brought to the shade?

       Q5. How many Celsius degrees was the decrease in temperature of the
           water after 25 minutes? Of the sand?

 7.    Make a line graph using the temperature readings taken when the
       setup was in the shade.

       Q6. Based on the graph, which cooled down faster, water or sand?



 Sea Breeze and Land Breeze

        The sand and water in the previous activity stand for land and water
 in real life. From the activity, you have learned that sand heats up faster
 than water, and that sand cools down faster than water. In the same way,
 when land surfaces are exposed to the Sun during the day, they heat up
 faster than bodies of water. At night, when the Sun has set, the land loses
 heat faster than bodies of water. How does this affect the air in the
 surroundings?




134                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                              218
Imagine that you are standing by the sea, along the shore. During the
 day, the land heats up faster than the water in the sea. The air above land
 will then become warm ahead of the air above the sea. You know what
 happens to warm air: it rises. So the warmer air above the land will rise. The
 air above the sea will then move in to replace the rising warm air. (See
 drawing below.) You will then feel this moving air as a light wind—a sea
 breeze.




 Figure 15. When does sea breeze occur?

        What will happen at night, when the Sun is gone? The land and sea
 will both cool down. But the land will lose heat faster than the water in the
 sea. In other words, the sea will stay warm longer. This time the air above
 the sea will be warmer than that above land. The warm air above the sea will
 then rise. Air from land will move out to replace the rising warm air. (See
 drawing below.) This moving air or wind from land is called a land breeze.




 Figure 16. When does land breeze occur?


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          135
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                           219
In the illustration above, you can see an arrow pointing upward. This
 represents rising warm air. The place where warm air rises is a place where
 air pressure is low. In other words, the place where warm air is rising is a
 low-pressure area. In contrast, cold air is dense and tends to sink. The place
 where cold air is sinking is a high-pressure area. Based on what you learned
 so far, in what direction does air move, from a low-pressure area to a high-
 pressure area or the other way around? You probably know the answer
 already. But the next section will make it clearer for you.

 Monsoons

       Do you know what monsoons are? Many people think that monsoons
 are rains. They are not. Monsoons are wind systems. But these winds
 usually bring abundant rainfall to the country and this is probably the
 reason why they have been mistaken for rains. In Filipino, the monsoons are
 called amihan or habagat, depending on where the winds come from. Find
 out which is which in the following activity.




 Activity 6
 In what direction do winds blow–from high to low
 pressure area or vice versa?
 Objectives

       After performing this activity, you should be able to

       1.    Interpret a map to determine direction of wind movement
       2.    Explain why it is cold around in December to February and warm
             around July.
       3.    Illustrate why habagat brings lots of rain
       4.    Give examples how the monsoons (amihan and habagat) affect
             people.

 What to use

       Figure 17: Pressure and Winds in January
       Figure 18: Pressure and Winds in July
       pencil




136                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                         220
What to do

 Part I.

 Study Figure 17. It shows the air pressure and direction of winds in different
 parts of the world in January. Low-pressure areas are marked by L and
 high-pressure areas are marked by H. Broken lines with arrowheads show
 the direction of the wind.

 Q1. Choose a low-pressure area and study the direction of the winds
     around it. Do the winds move toward the low-pressure area or away
     from it?


 Q2. Choose a high-pressure area and study the direction of the winds
     around it. Do the winds move toward the high-pressure area or away
     from it?


 Q3. In what direction do winds blow? Do winds blow from high-pressure
     areas to low-pressure areas? Or, from low-pressure areas to high-
     pressure areas?


 Q4. Where is North in the map? South? West? East? Write the directions on
     the map.


 Q5. Where is the Philippines on the map? Encircle it.


 Q6. Study the wind direction near the Philippine area. From what direction
     does the wind blow near the Philippines in January?




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          137
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                           221
138
                                                     Figure 17. Pressure and Winds in January




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
                                                    Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space            222
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
                                                    Figure 18. Pressure and Winds in July




139
                                                    Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space        223
Part II.

 Study Figure 18. It shows the air pressure and direction of winds in different
 parts of the world in July.

 Q7.     Study the wind direction near the Philippine area. From what direction
         does the wind blow in the vicinity of the Philippines in July?



       Figure 17 shows what happens during the colder months. The wind
 blows from the high-pressure area in the Asian continent toward the low-
 pressure area south of the Philippines. The cold air that we experience from
 December to February is part of this wind system. This monsoon wind is locally
 known as amihan. As you can see from Figure 17, the wind passes over some
 bodies of water before it reaches the Philippines. The wind picks up moisture
 along the way and brings rain to the eastern part of the Philippines.

       Now, what happens during the warmer months? Study Figure 18
 carefully. What do you observe about the low-pressure area and high-pressure
 area near the Philippines? They have changed places. (You will learn why in the
 next module.) As a result, the direction of the wind also changes. This time the
 wind will move from the high-pressure area in Australia to the low-pressure
 area in the Asian continent. This monsoon wind is locally called habagat. Trace
 the path of the habagat before it reaches the Philippines. Can you explain why
 the habagat brings so much rain? Which part of the Philippines does the
 habagat affect the most?

        The monsoons, habagat and amihan, affect people in different ways. Try
 to explain the following. Why do farmers welcome the monsoons? Why are
 fisherfolk not so happy about the monsoons? Why do energy providers
 appreciate the monsoons? Why are fishpen owners worried about the
 monsoons? How do the monsoons affect your own town?

      In the next section, you will apply the two concepts once more to explain
 another weather event.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                              224


140                                        Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
The Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ)

        Many people who listen to weather forecasts are confused about the
 intertropical convergence zone. But it is easy to understand it once you know
 that warm air rises, and air moves toward the place where warm air is rising.
 Take a look at the drawing below.




                              Figure 19. Sun’s rays at the equator and
                              at a higher latitude

      Figure 19 shows the rays of the Sun at two different places at noon.
 Study the drawing carefully. Where would you observe the Sun directly above
 you? When you are at the equator? Or when you are at a higher latitude?

        As you can see, the position of the Sun at midday depends on where you
 are. At the equator, the Sun will be directly overhead and the rays of the Sun
 will hit the ground directly. At a higher latitude, the Sun will be lower in the
 sky and the Sun’s rays will strike the ground at a lower angle. Where do you
 think will it be warmer?

        It is clear that it is warmer at the equator than anywhere else. Because of
 that, the air over the equator will be warmer than the air over other parts of the
 Earth. And you already know what happens to warm air. It rises. And when
 warm air rises, air in the surroundings will then move as a result.




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                 225


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                           141
Figure 20. How does the air move at the equator?


        As you can see from Figure 20, air from north of the equator and air from
 south of the equator will move toward the place where warm air is rising. Thus,
 the intertropical convergence zone is the place where winds in the tropics meet
 or converge. (Recall that the area near the equator is called the tropics.) In time
 the rising warm air will form clouds, which may lead to thunderstorms. Now
 you know why weather forecasters often blame the ITCZ for some heavy
 afternoon rains. The band of white clouds in the following picture shows the
 location of the ITCZ.




 Figure 21. Satellite photo showing the location of ITCZ




 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                                       226



142                                                 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Summary

      This module discussed global atmospheric phenomena like the
greenhouse effect and global warming (including ozone depletion) that affect
people, plants, animals and the physical environment around the world. And
though the greenhouse effect is a natural phenomenon, there is a growing
concern that human activities have emitted substances into the atmosphere
that are causing changes in weather patterns at the local level.

       Highlighted in this module are concepts used to explain common
atmospheric phenomena: why the wind blows, why monsoons occur, and what
is the so-called inter tropical convergence zone.

      It is important for everyone to understand the varied atmospheric
phenomena so that we can all prepare for whatever changes that occur in the
environment and cope with these changes.

       There are still many things to learn about the atmosphere, specifically on
weather and climate. You have just been provided with the basic concepts. You
will learn more as you move to Grade 8 and onwards.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                 227


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                          143
144   Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Suggested time allotment: 10 hours




   MODULE


         3                   SEASONS AND ECLIPSES

Overview

      In Grade 6, you have learned about the major members of our solar
system. Like the other planets, the Earth moves mainly in two ways: it spins
on its axis and it goes around the Sun. And as the Earth revolves around
the Sun, the Moon is also revolving around the Earth. Can you imagine all
these “motions” happening at the same time? The amazing thing is we do
not feel that the Earth is moving. In reality, the planet is speeding around
the Sun at 30 kilometers each second. (The solar system is also moving
around the center of the Milky Way!)

      But even if we do not actually see the Earth or Moon moving, we can
observe the effects of their motion. For example, because the Earth rotates,
we experience day and night. As the Moon goes around the Earth, we see
changes in the Moon‘s appearance.

      In this module you will learn that the motions of the Earth and Moon
have other effects. Read on and find out why.

Seasons

        In Grade 6, you tracked the weather for the whole school year. You
found out that there are two seasons in the Philippines: rainy and dry. You
might have noticed too that there are months of the year when it is cold and
months when it is hot. The seasons follow each other regularly and you can
tell in advance when it is going to be warm or cold and when it is going to be
rainy or not. But can you explain why there are seasons at all? Do you know
why the seasons change? The following activity will help you understand
why.




Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                         228
Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                        145
Activity 1
 Why do the seasons change?
 Objective

      After performing this activity, you should be able to give one reason why
      the seasons change.

 What to use

      Figures 1 to 5

 What to do

 1.    Study Figure 1 carefully. It shows the Earth at different locations along
       its orbit around the Sun. Note that the axis of Earth is not
       perpendicular to its plane of orbit; it is tilted. The letter “N” refers to the
       North Pole while “S” refers to the South Pole.




             Figure 1. The drawing shows the location of the Earth at
             different times of the year. Note that the axis of Earth is not
             vertical; it is tilted. (Not drawn to scale)

       Q1. In which month is the North Pole tilted toward the Sun– in June or
           December?

       Q2. In which month is the North Pole tilted away from the Sun– in June
            or December?




146                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                            229
2.    Study Figure 2 carefully. The drawing shows how the Earth is oriented
       with respect to the Sun during the month of June.




            Figure 2. Where do direct rays from the Sun fall in June?




       Q3. In June, which hemisphere receives direct rays from the Sun– the
           Northern Hemisphere or Southern Hemisphere?

 3.    Study Figure 3 carefully. The drawing shows how the Earth is oriented
       with respect to the Sun during the month of December.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                       147
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                        230
Figure 3. Where do direct rays from the Sun fall in December?



       Q4. In December, which hemisphere receives direct rays from the Sun-
           the Northern Hemisphere or Southern Hemisphere?




       Look at Figure 1 again. Note that the axis of the Earth is not
 perpendicular to the plane of its orbit; it is tilted from the vertical by 23.5
 degrees. What is the effect of this tilt?

       In June, the North Pole is tilted toward the Sun. Naturally, the
 Northern Hemisphere will also be tilted toward the Sun. The Northern
 Hemisphere will then receive direct rays from the Sun (Fig. 2). When the
 Sun’s rays hit the ground directly, the place will become warmer than when
 the rays are oblique (Figures 4 and 5). This is why it is summer in the
 Northern Hemisphere at this time.

      But the Earth is not stationary. The Earth goes around the Sun. What
 happens when the Earth has moved to the other side of the Sun?

       After six months, in December, the North Pole will be pointing away
 from the Sun (Figure 1). The Northern Hemisphere will no longer receive
 direct rays from the Sun. The Northern Hemisphere will then experience a
 time of cold. For temperate countries in the Northern Hemisphere, it will be
 winter. In tropical Philippines, it is simply the cold season.


148                                              Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                             231
What’s the angle got to do
                                                          with it?

                                                          “Direct rays” means that the
                                                          rays of the Sun hit the
                                                          ground at 90°. The rays are
                                                          vertical or perpendicular to
                                                          the ground. When the Sun’s
                                                          rays strike the ground at a
                                                          high angle, each square
                                                          meter of the ground receives
                                                          a greater amount of solar
                                                          energy than when the rays
                                                          are inclined. The result is
                                                          greater     warming.    (See
                                                          Figure 4.)

                                                          On the other hand, when the
      Figure 4. In the tropics, the warm season is due
                                                          Sun’s rays come in at an
      to the Sun’s rays hitting the ground directly. To
      an observer, the position of the Sun at noon will   oblique angle, each square
      be exactly overhead.                                meter of the ground will
                                                          receive a lesser amount of
         Which part of the Earth receives the             solar energy. That’s because
 direct rays of the Sun in December? As you               at lower angles, solar energy
 can see in Figure 3, it is the South Pole that           will be distributed over a
 is tilted toward the Sun. This time the Sun’s            wider area. The place will
 direct rays will fall on the Southern                    then experience less heating
 Hemisphere. It will then be summer in the                up. (See Figure 5.)
 Southern Hemisphere. Thus, when it is cold
 in the Northern Hemisphere, it is warm in the
 Southern Hemisphere.

      After another six months, in June of the following year, the Earth will
 have made one full trip around the Sun. The Sun’s direct rays will fall on the
 Northern Hemisphere once more. It will be warm in the Northern
 Hemisphere and cold in the Southern Hemisphere all over again. Thus, the
 seasons change because the direct rays of the Sun shift from one
 hemisphere to the other as the Earth goes around the Sun.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                     149
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                      232
Figure 5. The cold season is the result of the
                      Sun’s rays striking the ground at a lower angle.
                      To an observer, the Sun at midday will not be
                      directly above; it will be lower in the sky.


        Now you know one of the reasons why the seasons change. Sometimes
 the Sun’s direct rays fall on the Northern Hemisphere and sometimes they
 fall on the Southern Hemisphere. And that is because the Earth is tilted and
 it goes around the Sun. There is another reason why the seasons change.
 Find out in the next activity.




 Activity 2
 How does the length of daytime and nighttime affect
 the season?
 Objectives

      After performing this activity, you should be able to

      1. Interpret data about sunrise and sunset to tell when daytime is long
         and when daytime is short;
      2. Infer the effect of length of daytime and nighttime on seasons;



150                                               Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                             233
3. Summarize the reasons why seasons change based on Activity 1 and
         Activity 2.

 What to use

          Table 1

 What to do

 1.     Study the table below. It shows the times of sunrise and sunset on one
        day of each month.

            Table 1: Sunrise and sunset in Manila on selected days of 2011

                     Day               Sunrise      Sunset    Length of daytime

               Jan 22, 2011           6:25 AM       5:50 PM       11h 25m

               Feb 22, 2011           6:17 AM       6:02 PM       11h 45m

               Mar 22, 2011           5:59 AM       6:07 PM       12h 08m

               Apr 22, 2011           5:38 AM       6:11 PM       12h 33m

               May 22, 2011           5:27 AM       6:19 PM       12h 52m

               Jun 22, 2011           5:28 AM       6:28 PM       13h 00m

               Jul 22, 2011           5:36 AM       6:28 PM       12h 52m

               Aug 22, 2011           5:43 AM       6:15 PM       12h 32m

               Sep 22, 2011           5:45 AM       5:53 PM       12h 08m

               Oct 22, 2011           5:49 AM       5:33 PM       11h 44m

               Nov 22, 2011           6:00 AM       5:24 PM       11h 24m

               Dec 22, 2011           6:16 AM       5:32 PM       11h 16m



        Q1. Compare the times of sunrise from January, 2011 to December,
            2011. What do you notice?

        Q2. Compare the times of sunset during the same period. What do you
            notice?

        Q3. Compare the time of sunrise on June 22, 2011 with that on
            December 22, 2011. On which day did the Sun rise earlier?


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                 151
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                  234
Q4. Compare the time of sunset on June 22, 2011 with that on
           December 22, 2011. On which day did the Sun set later?

       Q5. When was daytime the longest?

       Q6. When was daytime the shortest?



       You know that there are 24 hours in a day. You probably think that
 daytime and nighttime are always equal. But you can infer from the activity
 that the length of daytime changes from month to month. When the North
 Pole is tilted toward the Sun, daytime will be longer than nighttime in the
 Northern Hemisphere.

       What happens when daytime is longer than nighttime? The time                       of
 heating up during the day will be longer than the time of cooling down                   at
 night. The Northern Hemisphere steadily warms up and the result                          is
 summer. At the same time, in the Southern Hemisphere, the opposite                       is
 happening. Nights are longer than daytime. It is winter there.

        But when the Earth has moved farther along its orbit, the North Pole
 will then be tilted away from the Sun. Nighttime will then be longer than
 daytime in the Northern Hemisphere. There would be a shorter time for
 heating up and longer time to cool down. The result is winter in the
 Northern Hemisphere. In tropical Philippines, it is the cold season.
 Meanwhile, it will be summer in the Southern Hemisphere.

       At this point, you should now be able to explain why the seasons
 change. Your explanation should include the following things: the tilt of the
 Earth; its revolution around the Sun; the direct rays of the Sun, and the
 length of daytime. There are other factors that affect the seasons but these
 are the most important.

       After discussing the motions of the Earth, let us now focus on the
 motions of another celestial object, the Moon. You have seen that the shape
 of the Moon appears to change from night to night. You have learned in
 Grade 5 that the changing phases of the Moon are due to the revolution of
 the Moon. The movement of the Moon also produces other phenomena
 which you will learn in the next section.




152                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                        235
Shadows and Eclipses

       Do you know how shadows are formed? How
 about eclipses? Do you know why they occur? Do
 you think that shadows and eclipses are related in
 any way?

        In this section, you will review what you know
 about shadows and later on perform an activity on
 eclipses. Afterwards, you will look at some common
 beliefs about eclipses and figure out if they have any
 scientific bases at all.

      Using a shadow-play activity, your teacher will demonstrate how
 shadows are formed and how shadows affect the surroundings. The
 demonstrations should lead you to the following ideas:

             When a light source is blocked by an object, a shadow of that
              object is cast. The shadow will darken the object on which it falls.

             The distance of the object from the light source affects the size of
              its shadow. When an object is closer to the light source, its shadow
              will appear big. But when it is farther from the light source, its
              shadow is smaller.

             The occurrence of shadows is an ordinary phenomenon that you
              experience every day. Shadows can be seen anywhere. Sometimes,
              the shadow appears bigger than the original object, other times
              smaller.

       How about in outer space? Are shadows formed there, too? How can
 you tell when you are here on Earth?

        The next activity will help you answer these questions. The materials
 that you will use in the activity represent some astronomical objects in
 space. You will need to simulate space by making the activity area dark.
 Cover the windows with dark materials such as black garbage bag or dark
 cloth.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                             153
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                              236
Activity 3
 Are there shadows in space?

 Objective

         After performing this activity, you should be able to explain how
         shadows are formed in space.

 What to use

            1 big ball (plastic or Styrofoam ball)
            1 small ball (diameter must be about ¼ of the big ball)
            flashlight or other light source
            2 pieces barbecue stick (about one ruler long)
            any white paper or cardboard larger than the big ball
            Styrofoam block or block of wood as a base

 What to do

 Note: All throughout the activity, stay at the back or at the side of the
       flashlight as much as possible. None of your members should stay at
       the back of the big ball, unless specified.

 1.    Pierce the small ball in the middle with the barbecue
       stick. Then push the stick into a Styrofoam block to make
       it stand (see drawing on the right). The small ball
       represents the Moon. Do the same to the big ball. The big
       ball represents the Earth.

 2.    Hold the flashlight and shine it on the small ball (see drawing below).
       The distance between the flashlight and the ball is one footstep.
       Observe the small ball as you shine light on it. The flashlight represents
       the Sun.

                           Sun              Moon



                               1 footstep


       Q1. What is formed on the other side of the Moon?

154                                                Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                               237
3.    Place the Earth one footstep away from the Moon (see drawing below).
       Make sure that the Sun, Moon, and Earth are along a straight line.
       Turn on the flashlight and observe.

                                Sun                 Moon             Earth



                            1 footstep        1 footstep


       Q2. What is formed on the surface of the Earth?

 4.    Place the white paper one footstep away from the Earth (see drawing
       below). The white paper must be facing the Earth. Observe what is
       formed on the white paper.
                            Sun               Moon                 Earth



                                   1 footstep         1 footstep           1 footstep


       Q3. What is formed on the white paper?

 5.    Ask a group mate to move the Moon along a circular path as shown
       below.




                                                                                        X



                                          Circular path


       Q4. What happens to the shadow of the Moon as you move the Moon
           around the Earth?

       Q5. Observe the appearance of the Moon. What is the effect of the
           shadow of the Earth on the Moon as the Moon reaches position X
           (see drawing above)?




Grade 77 Science:Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade Science: Earth and Space                                                             155
                                                                                            238
You have just simulated the formation of shadows of astronomical
 objects in space. The formation and darkening is exactly the same as the
 formation of shadows commonly seen around you. When shadows are
 formed on astronomical objects, a darkening effect is observed. This
 phenomenon is called an eclipse.

 How Do Eclipses Happen?

       In the earlier grades, you learned about the members of the solar
 system. You know that the Sun gives off light. As the different members of
 the solar system move around the Sun, they block the light from the Sun
 and form shadows. What this means is that planets have shadows, and even
 their moons have shadows, too. But we cannot see the shadows that they
 form because we are far from them. The only shadows that we can observe
 are the shadows of the Moon and Earth.




     Figure 6. Look at the shadows of the Moon and Earth. Where does the shadow
     of the Moon fall? Where does the shadow of the Earth fall?



        Look at Figure 6. (Note that the objects are not drawn to scale.) In the
 drawing, there are two Moons. Of course, you know that we only have one
 Moon. The figure is just showing you the Moon at two different locations as
 it goes around the Earth.

       The figure shows where the shadows of the Moon and Earth are as
 viewed in space. But here on Earth, you cannot observe these shadows.
 Why? Look at the shadow of the Moon in positions A and B. In position A,
 the Moon is too high; its shadow does not fall on Earth. In position B, the
 Moon is too low; the shadow of the Earth does not fall on the Moon. The
 shadows of the Earth and Moon are cast in space. So, when can we observe
 these shadows? In what positions can we see these shadows? Let us look at
 another arrangement.

156                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                         239
Figure 7. When does the shadow of the Moon fall on Earth? When does Earth
       cast a shadow on the Moon?

        In Figure 7, the Earth has moved along its orbit, taking the Moon
 along. The Moon is shown in two different locations once more. Note that at
 these positions, the Moon is neither too high nor too low. In fact, the Moon
 is in a straight line between the Sun and the Earth. You can say that the
 three objects are perfectly aligned.

        At position A, where does the shadow of the Moon fall? As you can
 see, the shadow of the Moon now falls on the Earth. When you are within
 this shadow, you will experience a solar eclipse. A solar eclipse occurs
 when the Moon comes directly between the Sun and Earth (Figure 7,
 position A). You have simulated this solar eclipse in Activity 3.




        Figure 8. Where is the Moon in relation to the Sun and Earth during a solar
        eclipse?



       Let us look at the Sun, Moon, and Earth in Figure 8. Look at the tip of
 the shadow of the Moon as it falls on Earth. Is the entire shadow of the
 Moon completely dark? Do you notice the unequal shading of the shadow?
 Actually this unequal shading is comparable to what you have observed in
 your simulation activity.


Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                                     157
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                      240
Remember the shadow of the
                                            small ball (Moon) on the big ball
                                            (Earth) in your activity? It has a gray
                                            outer part and a darker inner part
                                            (Figure 9). In the case of the Moon’s
                                            shadow, this gray outer region is the
                                            penumbra while the darker inner
                                            region is the umbra.

                                               If you are standing within the
                                        umbra of the Moon’s shadow, you will
 Figure 9. Is the shadow of the small   see the Sun disappear from your view.
 ball uniformly dark?                   The surroundings appear like it is
                                        early evening. In this case, you are
 witnessing a total solar eclipse. In comparison, if you are in the penumbra,
 you will see the Sun partially covered by the Moon. There are no dramatic
 changes in the surroundings; there is no noticeable dimming of sunlight. In
 this case, you are observing a partial solar eclipse.

       Let us go back to Figure 7. Look at the Moon in position B. Do you
 notice that at this position the Moon is also aligned with the Sun and Earth?
 At this position, a different type of eclipse occurs. This time, the Moon is in
 the shadow of the Earth. In this case, you will observe a lunar eclipse. A
 lunar eclipse occurs when the Moon is directly on the opposite side of the
 Earth as the Sun.

       The occurrence of a lunar eclipse was simulated in the activity. Do
 you remember the small ball (Moon) in position X? You noticed that the
 shadow of the big ball (Earth) darkened the whole surface of the small ball.
 In a lunar eclipse, the shadow of the Earth also darkens the Moon (Figure
 10).




        Figure 10. Where is the Earth in relation to the Sun and Moon during a
        lunar eclipse?


158                                             Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                           241
Focus your attention on the shadow of the Earth in Figure 10. The
 shadow is wider than that of the Moon. It also has an umbra and a
 penumbra. Which part of the Earth’s shadow falls on the Moon? Is the Moon
 always found within the umbra?

        The appearance of the Moon is dependent on its location in the
 Earth’s shadow. When the entire Moon is within the umbra, it will look
 totally dark. At this time you will observe a total lunar eclipse. But when the
 Moon passes only through a part of the umbra, a partial lunar eclipse will
 be observed. A part of the Moon will look dark while the rest will be lighter.

       In earlier grades, you learned that it takes about one month for the
 Moon to complete its trip around the Earth. If that is the case, then we
 should be observing monthly eclipses. In reality, eclipses do not occur every
 month. There are only about three solar eclipses and three lunar eclipses in
 a year. What could be the reason for this?

         The answer lies in the orbit of the Moon. Look at the orbit of the Earth
 and the Moon in Figures 6 and 7. Do their orbits have the same
 orientations? As you can see the Moon’s orbit is slightly inclined. The orbit
 is tilted by 50 from the plane of the orbit of the Earth. As the moon moves
 around the Earth, it is sometimes higher or lower than the Earth. In these
 situations, the shadow of the Moon does not hit the surface of the Earth.
 Thus, no eclipses will occur. Eclipses only happen when the Moon aligns
 with the Sun and Earth.

 Facts, Myths, and Superstitions

       Some people believe that a sudden darkening during the day (solar
 eclipse) brings bad luck. Others say that it is also bad luck when the Moon
 turns dark during a Full Moon (lunar eclipse).

       Do you think these beliefs regarding eclipses are true? Let us find that
 out in the next activity.



 Activity 4
 Does a Bakunawa cause eclipses?
 Objective

        When you finish this activity, you should be able to evaluate some
        beliefs about eclipses.

Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                            159
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                             242
What to do

 1. Collect some beliefs about eclipses. You               Ancient Tagalogs call eclipses as
    may ask older people in your family or in              laho. Others call it as eklepse
    the community Or, you may read on some                 (pronounced as written). Old
    of these beliefs.                                      people would tell you that
                                                           during laho or eklepse, the Sun
                                                           and the Moon are eaten by a big
      Table 2. Beliefs related to eclipses and its
                                                           snake called Bakunawa. The
                   scientific bases
                                                           only way to bring them back is
         Beliefs           Scientific explanations
                                                           to create a very loud noise. The
                                                           Bakunawa gets irritated with
                                                           the noise and spews out the Sun
                                                           and the Moon back to the
                                                           people.


      Q1. Which beliefs and practices have
          scientific bases? Why do you say so?

      Q2. Which beliefs and practices have no scientific bases? Support your
          answer.



       Which among the beliefs you have collected do you consider true? Do
all the beliefs you have collected have scientific bases? Are the explanations
of the occurrences of eclipses related to these beliefs? Are there any proofs
that tell you they are true?

       In science, explanations are supported with evidence. Beliefs related
to eclipses, such as the Sun being swallowed by Bakunawa (a large animal),
or the increase of harmful microorganisms during an eclipse, are passed on
by adults to young children. But until now, no proof has been offered to
show that they are true.

      However, there are beliefs that have scientific bases. For example, it is
bad to look directly at the Sun during a solar eclipse. Doing so will damage
your eyes. This is true. Even if only a thin crescent of the Sun is left
uncovered by the Moon, it will still be too bright for you to observe. In fact, it
is 10,000 times brighter than the Full Moon and it will certainly harm your
retina. So if you ever observe a solar eclipse, be ready with a solar filter or
welder’s goggles to protect your eyes.



160                                          Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                                         243
Now you are an informed student on the occurrence of eclipses. The
 next time an eclipse occurs, your task is to explain to your family or the
 community the factors that cause eclipse.

 Summary

       You may still be wondering why the topics Seasons and Eclipses were
 discussed together in a single module. The reason is that these phenomena
 are mainly the result of the motions of the Earth and Moon through space.
 As the Earth goes around the Sun, the northern and southern hemispheres
 are alternately exposed to the direct rays of the Sun, leading to the annual
 changes in seasons. And as the Moon goes around the Earth, it sometimes
 forms a straight line with the Sun and Earth, leading to the occurrence of
 eclipses. We do not directly see nor observe the motions of the Earth and
 Moon, but we can observe the phenomena that arise because of them.




Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)                        161
 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space                                        244
For inquiries or feedback, please write or call:

             DepEd-Bureau of Secondary Education, Curriculum
             Development Division

             3/F Bonifacio Bldg., DepEd Complex
             Meralco Avenue, Pasig City, Philippines 1600

             Telefax: (632) 632-7746 or 633-7242

              E-mail Address: lolitaandrada@yahoo.com




      ISBN: ___________


162                                         Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)

More Related Content

PDF
K TO 12 GRADE 7 LEARNING MATERIAL IN SCIENCE (Q1-Q2)
PDF
K TO 12 GRADE 7 LEARNING MODULE IN SCIENCE (Q3-Q4)
DOCX
FIRST PERIODICAL EXAM IN SCIENCE 7,SCIENCE 8 AND AUTOMOTIVE SERVICING 8 WITH TOS
PDF
Integrated Science Module for Grade 7 -- Quarter 1-2
PPTX
Electricity and ohm’s law
PDF
G7 science student modules 3rd & 4th qrtr
PPTX
Filipino sa Piling Larangan - TechVoc
PDF
Science 7-4th Quarter The Philippine Environment
K TO 12 GRADE 7 LEARNING MATERIAL IN SCIENCE (Q1-Q2)
K TO 12 GRADE 7 LEARNING MODULE IN SCIENCE (Q3-Q4)
FIRST PERIODICAL EXAM IN SCIENCE 7,SCIENCE 8 AND AUTOMOTIVE SERVICING 8 WITH TOS
Integrated Science Module for Grade 7 -- Quarter 1-2
Electricity and ohm’s law
G7 science student modules 3rd & 4th qrtr
Filipino sa Piling Larangan - TechVoc
Science 7-4th Quarter The Philippine Environment

What's hot (20)

PDF
Integrated Science Module for Grade 7 --Quarter 3-4
PPTX
4th Quarter Topics ALL IN- Grade 7 Science
PPTX
Grade 7 science 4th Quarter M1
PDF
Sci 9 tg draft 3.31.2014
PPT
BOYLE'S LAW SCIENCE GRADE 10
DOCX
DLL SCIENCE QUARTER 2 WEEK 1-9.docx
PDF
Grade 7 Science Learner's Module 3rd and 4th QTR Modules
PPTX
Grade 9 uniformly accelerated motion
DOCX
seafloor spreading theory LP
DOCX
DLL-(daily lesson log) second week science grade 10
PPTX
Qualitative description of image formed in mirror and lens.pptx
PPT
Grade 10 _Plate Tectonics2_Science10.ppt
DOCX
Science grade 7 Module- Table of Contents
DOCX
science 8 electricity lesson plan
PPTX
Understanding typhoon
PPTX
Module 2: Earth's Interior
PPTX
Volcanoes In the Philippines
PDF
Deped - Grade 10 -- Science Teacher's Guide_Quarter 3
DOCX
Science 9 lesson plan UAM: Vertical and Horizontal
PDF
Science 10 Learner's Material Unit 2
Integrated Science Module for Grade 7 --Quarter 3-4
4th Quarter Topics ALL IN- Grade 7 Science
Grade 7 science 4th Quarter M1
Sci 9 tg draft 3.31.2014
BOYLE'S LAW SCIENCE GRADE 10
DLL SCIENCE QUARTER 2 WEEK 1-9.docx
Grade 7 Science Learner's Module 3rd and 4th QTR Modules
Grade 9 uniformly accelerated motion
seafloor spreading theory LP
DLL-(daily lesson log) second week science grade 10
Qualitative description of image formed in mirror and lens.pptx
Grade 10 _Plate Tectonics2_Science10.ppt
Science grade 7 Module- Table of Contents
science 8 electricity lesson plan
Understanding typhoon
Module 2: Earth's Interior
Volcanoes In the Philippines
Deped - Grade 10 -- Science Teacher's Guide_Quarter 3
Science 9 lesson plan UAM: Vertical and Horizontal
Science 10 Learner's Material Unit 2
Ad

Similar to DepEd Science 7 Learner's Module (Part 2) (20)

PDF
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01
PDF
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01 (1)
PDF
G7 science student modules
PDF
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01
PDF
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01 (1)
PDF
G7 science teachers guide
PDF
Science g8 front matters tg
PDF
Teacher guide grade 8
PDF
Science tg-g7
PDF
Smart Science Grade2
PDF
THE ENGLISH VILLAGE 5 - CUADERNO DE ACTIVIDADES
PDF
Math for Smart Kids Gr.1
PDF
section_reviews_(all)_holt_physics.pdf
PDF
Pre calculus Grade 11 Learner's Module Senior High School
PDF
Pre Calculus Learners Guide Module Grade 11
PDF
Smart Science Grade 4
PDF
Smart Science Grade 3
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01 (1)
G7 science student modules
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01
G7sciencestudentmodules 3rd4thqrtr-121107053926-phpapp01 (1)
G7 science teachers guide
Science g8 front matters tg
Teacher guide grade 8
Science tg-g7
Smart Science Grade2
THE ENGLISH VILLAGE 5 - CUADERNO DE ACTIVIDADES
Math for Smart Kids Gr.1
section_reviews_(all)_holt_physics.pdf
Pre calculus Grade 11 Learner's Module Senior High School
Pre Calculus Learners Guide Module Grade 11
Smart Science Grade 4
Smart Science Grade 3
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
PDF
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
PPTX
The Healthy Child – Unit II | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc Nursing 5th Semester
PDF
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
PDF
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
PPTX
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
PDF
TR - Agricultural Crops Production NC III.pdf
PDF
Insiders guide to clinical Medicine.pdf
PPTX
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
PDF
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
PPTX
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
PDF
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
PPTX
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
PDF
Basic Mud Logging Guide for educational purpose
PDF
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
PPTX
Introduction to Child Health Nursing – Unit I | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc...
PPTX
Week 4 Term 3 Study Techniques revisited.pptx
PDF
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PDF
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
ANTIBIOTICS.pptx.pdf………………… xxxxxxxxxxxxx
The Healthy Child – Unit II | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc Nursing 5th Semester
Module 4: Burden of Disease Tutorial Slides S2 2025
Anesthesia in Laparoscopic Surgery in India
Pharmacology of Heart Failure /Pharmacotherapy of CHF
TR - Agricultural Crops Production NC III.pdf
Insiders guide to clinical Medicine.pdf
Pharma ospi slides which help in ospi learning
Complications of Minimal Access Surgery at WLH
Institutional Correction lecture only . . .
VCE English Exam - Section C Student Revision Booklet
human mycosis Human fungal infections are called human mycosis..pptx
Basic Mud Logging Guide for educational purpose
Classroom Observation Tools for Teachers
Introduction to Child Health Nursing – Unit I | Child Health Nursing I | B.Sc...
Week 4 Term 3 Study Techniques revisited.pptx
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
Pre independence Education in Inndia.pdf

DepEd Science 7 Learner's Module (Part 2)

  • 1. 7 Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 1
  • 2. 2 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 3. 7 Learner’s Material (Second Part) GOVERNMENT PROPERTY NOT FOR SALE ALLOTTED TO District/ School: _________________________________________ Division _________________________________________________ First Year of Use:_________________________________________ Source of Fund (Year included):__________________________ Kagawaran ng Edukasyon Republika ng Pilipinas i Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 3
  • 4. Science- Grade 7 Learner’s Material: Second Part First Edition, 2012 ISBN: ___________ Republic Act 8293, section 176 indicates that: No copyright shall subsist in any work of the Government of the Philippines. However, prior approval of the government agency or office wherein the work is created shall be necessary for exploitation of such work for profit. Such agency or office may among other things, impose as a condition the payment of royalties. Published by the Department of Education Secretary: Br. Armin Luistro FSC Undersecretary: Dr. Yolanda S. Quijano Development Team of the Learner’s Material Unit 3: Energy in Motion Reviewer: Josefina Ll. Pabellon Coordinator: Merle C. Tan Authors: Alvie J. Asuncion, Leticia V. Catris, Cerilina M. Maramag, and Marie Paz E. Morales Unit 4: Earth and Space Reviewers: Eligio C. Obille Jr., Risa L. Reyes, and Merle C. Tan Coordinator: Merle C. Tan Authors: Ivy P. Mejia, Eligio C. Obille Jr., and Merle C. Tan Illustrators: Alvin J. Encarnacion, Rizaldo Ramoncito S. Saliva Layout Artist: Cecile N. Sales Inilimbag sa Pilipinas ng ____________ Department of Education-Instructional Materials Council Secretariat (DepEd-IMCS) nd Office Address: 2 Floor Dorm G, PSC Complex, Meralco Avenue. Pasig City, Philippines 1600 Telefax: (02) 634-1054 or 634-1072 E-mail Address: imcsetd@yahoo.com 4 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 5. TABLE OF CONTENTS (2nd Part) Unit 3: Energy in Motion Page Module 1. Describing Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Activity 1: Where is it? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Activity 2: My home to school roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Activity 3: Fun walk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Activity 4: Doing detective work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Module 2. Waves Around You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Activity 1: Let’s Make Waves! What happens when waves pass by?. . . . . . . . 18 Activity 2: Anatomy of a Wave: How do you describe waves? . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Activity 3: Mechanical vs. Electromagnetic Waves: How do waves propagate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Module 3. Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Activity 1: My own sounding box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Activity 2: Properties and characteristics of sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Activity 3: Big time gig! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Module 4. Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Activity 1: Light sources: Langis kandila or lampara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Activity 2: My spectrum wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Activity 3: Colors of light – color of life! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Activity 4: Light up straight! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Module 5. Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Activity 1: Warm me up, cool me down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Activity 2: Which feels colder? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Activity 3: Move me up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Activity 4: Keep it cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Activity 5: All at once . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Module 6. Electricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Activity 1: Charged interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Activity 2: To charge or not to charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Activity 3: Pass the charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Activity 4: When lightning strikes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Activity 5: Let there be light! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 5
  • 6. Unit 4: Earth and Space Page Module 1. The Philippine Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Activity 1: Where in the world is the Philippines (Part I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Activity 2: Where in the world is the Philippines (Part II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Activity 3: What are some factors that will affect the amount of water in the watersheds?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Activity 4: How is soil formed from rocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Activity 5: Where are the mineral deposits in the Philippines? . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Activity 6: How do people destroy natural resources? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Activity 7: Are you ready for “Make-a-Difference” Day? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Module 2. Solar Energy and the Atmosphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Activity 1: What is the basis for dividing Earth’s atmosphere into layers? . . . 119 Activity 2: Does a greenhouse retain or release heat? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Activity 3: What happens when air is heated? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Activity 4: What happens to the air in the surroundings as warm air rises?. . 130 Activity 5: Which warms up faster? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Activity 6: In what direction do winds blow–from high to low pressure area or vice versa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Module 3. Seasons and Eclipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Activity 1: Why do the seasons change? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Activity 2: How does the length of daytime and nighttime affect the season? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Activity 3: Are there shadows in space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Activity 4: Does a Bakunawa causes eclipses? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 6 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 7. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 1
  • 8. 2 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 9. Suggested time allotment: 8 to 10 hours MODULE 1 DESCRIBING MOTION Many of the things around us move. Some move slowly like the turtles and clouds, others move much more quickly like the satellites. Because motion is so common, it seems to be very simple. But in science, describing motion actually entails careful use of some definitions. This module provides you with scientific knowledge and skills necessary to describe motion along a straight path. You will learn to describe the motion of objects in terms of position, distance travelled, and speed. You will also learn to analyze or represent motion of objects using charts, diagrams, and graphs. While these all provide the same information about the motion of objects, you will find out that one may be more helpful than the other depending on your particular objective. At the end of this module, you are expected to answer the following questions:  When can we say that an object is in motion?  How do we describe the motion of an object? Where? Before you will be able to describe the motion of an object, you must first be able to tell exactly where it is positioned. Describing exact position entails two ideas: describing how far the object is from the point of reference and describing its direction relative to that point of reference. You will learn about the importance of point of reference and direction when you perform Activity 1. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 3 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 85
  • 10. Activity 1 Where is it? Objective In this activity, you should be able to describe in words the position of an object within the room or the school ground. Procedure 1. Obtain from your teacher the piece of paper that describes where you will find the object. Q1. Were you able to find the object? Was it easy or difficult? Q2. Is the instruction clear and easy to follow? What made it so? 2. Put back the object to its place, if you found it. Otherwise, ask your teacher first where it is located before you move on to the next step. 3. Revise the instruction to make it more helpful. Write it on a separate sheet of paper and let another group use it to find the object. Q3. Were they successful in finding the object? Was it easy for them or difficult? Q4. What other details or information included in your instruction that made it clearer and easier to follow? Q5. In your own words, what is point of reference and how important it is? Describing through visuals The position of an object can be described in many ways. You can use words, like what you did in Activity 1. You can also use visuals, like diagrams or graphs. Use the examples to explore how these help in providing accurate descriptions of positions of objects. Using diagrams Consider the diagram in Figure 1. The positions of the objects are described in the diagram by their coordinates along the number line. 4 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 86
  • 11. -15m -10m - 5m 0m 5m 10m 15m Figure 1 Q6. What is the position of the dog? Q7. What is the position of the tree? Q8. What is the position of the dog with respect to the house? Q9. What is the position of the tree with respect to the dog? Here is another example. In this diagram, the positions of the ball rolling are shown at equal intervals of time. You can use the diagram to describe the position of the ball at any given time. (Timer) 00 : 00 00 : 05 00 : 10 00 : 15 min sec min sec min sec min sec 0m 5m 10m 15m Figure 2 Q10. What is the initial position of the ball? What is its final position? Q11. What is the position of the ball at 10 seconds? Q12. At what time is the position of the ball equal to 5 meters? Using graphs Another way to describe the motion of the ball is by the use of motion graphs. Convert the diagram in Figure 2 to graph by following the guide below. I. Fill up Table 1 using the data in Figure 2. Note that the positions of the ball are shown every 5 seconds. Grade 77Science: Learner’sIn Motion (Second Part) Grade Science: Energy Material 87 5
  • 12. Table 1: Position of the ball vs time Time (s) Position of the ball (m) 0 0 II. Plot the values in Table 1 as points on the graph in Figure 3. Note that time is plotted on the X-axis while position is plotted on the Y-axis. An example is given below. 15 Position (m) 10 5 (20s, 5m) 0 5 10 15 20 Time (s) Figure 3 III. Lastly, draw a straight diagonal line through the points in the graph. The graph that you have just drawn in Figure 3 is called position-time graph. You can also use this graph to describe the position of the ball at any given time. For example, if you are asked to find the position of the ball at 10 seconds, all you need to do is to find the point along the diagonal line where the vertical line at the 10 second-mark intersects (Figure 4). Then find where the horizontal line from that point of intersection will cross the Y axis, which is the position axis. This will give you the position of the ball at 10 seconds. 6 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 88
  • 13. Point of intersection Position (m) 0 10 Time (s) Figure 4 Now try answering the following questions using your own position- time graph. Q13. What is the position of the ball at 7.5 seconds? Q14. At what time is the position of the ball equal to 12.5 meters? How Far? In science, motion is N defined as the change in position W E for a particular time interval. You 10m can then start describing motion 5m S with the question, “How far did 10m the object travel?” There are actually two ways to answer this question. First is by getting the Figure 5 total length of the path travelled by the object. In Figure 5 for example, the dog ran 10m to the east, then 5m to the south, and another 10m to the west. So it has travelled a total of 25 meters. The other way is by measuring the distance between the initial position and final position of the object. Based again on Figure 5, the dog has travelled 5 meters to the south. In science, the first measurement gives the distance travelled by the object (represented by broken lines) while the second measurement gives its displacement (represented by continuous line). Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 7 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 89
  • 14. Here are more illustrations showing the difference between distance travelled (represented by broken lines) by an object and its displacement (represented by continuous lines). a. b. c. Figure 6 Can you give one difference between distance and displacement based on the given examples? When can displacement be equal to zero? Is it possible to get zero displacement? What if the ball, the car, and the dog in the illustration go back to their starting positions, what will happen to their respective distances? How about their displacements? If you answered these questions correctly, then you have most probably understood the difference between distance and displacement.  Distance refers to the length of the entire path that the object travelled.  Displacement refers to the shortest distance between the object’s two positions, like the distance between its point of origin and its point of destination, no matter what path it took to get to that destination. When a graph is plotted in terms of the distance travelled by the object and the time it took to cover such distance, the graph can be called distance-time graph. If the graph is plotted in terms of displacement and 8 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 90
  • 15. time, it is called displacement-time graph. Refer to the graph in Figure 7. What is the displacement of the object after 2 seconds? What is its displacement after 6 seconds? How will you describe the motion of the object between 0s and 2s, between 2s and 4s, and between 4s and 6s? Displacement (m) 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Time (s) Figure 7 Activity 2 My home to school roadmap Objective In this activity you should be able to make a roadmap that shows how you get to school from your house. Procedure 1. Devise a way to easily measure distance. Let your teacher check your non-standard measurement for precision. 2. Using your measuring device, gather the data that you will need for your roadmap. Make sure that you take down notes of all names of the roads, landmarks, corners, posts, and establishments you pass by. Record your data properly. 3. Using your gathered data, draw your house-school roadmap on a short bond paper. Decide on the most convenient scale to use when you draw your roadmap. An example is shown below. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 9 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 91
  • 16. 1 cm Scale: 1 cm = 1 km 2 km 5 km 3 km Figure 8 4. Label your roadmap properly, including names of the roads, establishments, etc. Specify also the length of road. 5. Finally, let your teacher check again your work. Q1. What is the total length of your travel from your house to your school? Q2. What is the total displacement of your travel? How fast? After determining how far the object moves, the next question will be “How fast did the object move?” This information can be provided by the object’s speed or velocity. Are you familiar with the traffic signs below? These signs tell us the maximum or minimum speed limits allowed by law for road vehicles. In general, the minimum speed limit in the Philippines is 60 km/h and the maximum speed limit is 100 km/h. What are the units used in the above examples of speed limits? What quantities do these units represent that are related to speed? 10Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 92 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 17. Activity 3 Fun walk Objective In this activity you should be able to gather data to determine who walks fastest. Procedure 1. Start by choosing a spacious place to walk straight. 2. Half of the group will walk while the other half will observe and record data. 3. Mark on the ground the starting line. All participants must start from the starting line at the same time. 4. Upon receiving the go signal, all participants must start to walk as fast as they could. The other members should observe closely as the participants walk and determine who walks fastest. 5. Repeat #4 but this time, collect data to support your conclusion. Discuss within your group how you are going to do this. Q1. What quantities did you measure for your data? Q2. How did you combine these quantities to determine how fast each participant was walking? Q3. How did you use the result to determine who walked fastest? Speed The questions in the above activity are actually referring to speed. If you know the speed of each participant, you can tell who is the fastest. Speed is defined as distance travelled divided by the time of travel. dis tan ce travelled speed  time of travel The units of speed can be miles per hour (mi/h), kilometres per hour (km/h), or meters per second (m/s). Q4. At constant distance, how is speed related to the time of travel? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 11 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 93
  • 18. Q5. At constant time to travel, how is speed related to the distance travelled? Q6. Who was travelling faster than the other, a person who covered 10 meters in 5 seconds or the one who took 10 seconds to cover 20 meters? Speed and direction In describing the motion of an object, we do not just describe how fast the object moves. We also consider the direction to where it is going. Speed with direction is referred to as velocity. The sample weather bulletin below will show you the importance of knowing not just the speed of the storm but also its direction. Table 2: Sample weather bulletin Weather Bulletin: Tropical Storm "Juaning" Wednesday, 27 July 2011 at 09:27:14 AM Location of 90 km East of Infanta, Center Quezon Coordinates 14.8°N, 122.5°E Strength of the Max. wind speed of 85 km/hr near the center & gustiness of up to 100 winds km/hr Movement 11km/hr going West-Northwest Forecast On Wednesday AM: Expected to make landfall over Polillo Island between 8am to 10am and over Southern Aurora by 1pm to 3pm and will traverse Central Luzon Whenever there is a storm coming, we are notified of its impending danger in terms of its speed and direction. Aside from this, we are also informed about its strength. Do you know that as the storm moves, its winds move in circles? The circular speed of the winds of the storm determines its strength. Different storm signals are given in places depending on the circular speed of the winds of the storm and the distance from the center. Study again the weather bulletin above. Which is the speed for the circular motion of the typhoon winds? Which is the speed for the motion of the storm as a whole along the path? How important are speed and direction in determining the weather forecast for the next hours? 12 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 94
  • 19. Constant speed vs instantaneous speed If you solved for the distance travelled by each participant over the time he took to cover such distance, then you have computed for his average speed. But why average speed and not just speed? It is considered average speed because it represents the speed of the participant throughout his travel. During his travel, there were instants that his speed would vary. His speed at an instant is called instantaneous speed. Similarly, the velocity of a moving body at an instant is called instantaneous velocity. The instantaneous speed may be equal, greater than, or less than the average speed. When an object’s instantaneous speed values are always the same, then it means that the object is moving with constant speed. We refer to this as constant motion. Where you will be and what time you will reach your destination is easily predicted when you move at constant speed or velocity. Are you familiar with the speedometer? Speedometer is a device used to measure the instantaneous speed of a vehicle. Speedometers are important to the drivers because they need to know how fast they are going so they know if they are already driving beyond the speed limit or not. How fast is the velocity changing? In reality, objects do not always move at constant velocity. Storms like “Juaning” also do change their speeds, directions, or both. The next activity will help you analyze examples of motion with changing velocities (or with changing speed, since we are only trying to analyze examples of motion in only one direction) using Source: http://drrm.region4a.dost.gov.ph/ tape charts and motion graphs. Figure 9. Track of tropical storm “Juaning” Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 13 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 95
  • 20. Activity 4 Doing detective work Consider this situation below: Supposed you were having your on-the-job training in a private investigating company. You were asked to join a team assigned to investigate a ‘hit and run’ case. The alleged suspect was captured by the CCTV camera driving down a road leading to the place of incident. The suspect denied the allegation, saying that he was then driving very slowly with a constant speed. Because of the short time difference when he was caught by the camera and when the accident happened, he insisted that it was impossible that he would already be at the place when the crime happened. But when you were viewing the scene again on the camera, you noticed that his car was leaving oil spots on the road. When you checked these spots on site, you found out that they are still evident. So you began to wonder if the spots can be used to investigate the motion of the car of the suspect and check whether he was telling the truth or not. Here is an activity that you can do to help you with your investigation. You will analyze the motion using strips of papers with dots. For this activity, assume that the dots represent the ‘oil drops’ left by the car down the road. Materials  ruler  paper strips with dots  cutter or pair of scissors Procedure A. Using tape chart 1. Obtain from your teacher paper strips with dots. 2. Label each dot. Start from 0, then 1, 2, 3, and so on. In this example, each dot occurred every 1 second. 1 sec 0 1 2 3 Figure 10 14Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 96
  • 21. 3. Examine the distances between successive dots. Q1. How will you compare the distances between successive dots? 4. Cut the strip at each drop, starting from the first to the last drop, and 4 paste them side by side on a graph 3 paper to form a tape chart as 2 shown in Figure 11. 1 Q2. How do the lengths of the tapes compare? Figure 11. Sample tape chart Q3. If each tape represents the distance travelled by the object for 1 second, then what ‘quantity’ does each piece of tape provide? Q4. What does the chart tell you about the speed of the car? The difference in length between two successive tapes provides the object’s acceleration or its change in speed or velocity for a time interval of 1 second. Q5. How will you compare the changes in the lengths of two successive tapes? Q6. What then can you say about the acceleration of the moving car? B. Using motion graphs Table 3 5. Measure the distance travelled Time of travel (s) Distance travelled (m) by the car after 1 second, 2 1 seconds, and so on by 2 measuring the distance between 3 drops 0 and 1, 0 and 2, and so 4 on. Enter your measurements in 5 Table 3 on the right. 6. Plot the values in Table 3 as points on the graph in Distance (cm) Figure 12 on the right. Q7. How does your distance-time graph look like? 0 Time (sec) Figure 12 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 15 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 97
  • 22. 7. Join the mid-points of the tops of the tapes with a line. You 4 have now converted your tape Speed (cm/s) chart to a speed-time graph. 3 Q8. How does you graph look 2 like? How is this different 1 from your graph in Figure 12? 1 2 3 4 Time (s) Q9. How will you interpret this graph in terms of the speed Figure 13 and acceleration of the moving car? Q10. If you found out in your investigation that the arrangement of oil drops left by the car is similar to what you used in this activity, was the suspect telling the truth when he said that he was driving with constant speed? In this module, you have learned how to describe the motion of objects in terms of position, distance and displacement, speed and velocity, and acceleration. You have also learned how to represent motion of objects using diagrams, charts, and graphs. Let us summarize what you have learned by relating distance, displacement, speed, velocity, and acceleration.  If an object does not change its position at a given time interval, then it is at rest or its speed is zero or not accelerating.  If an object covers equal distance at equal intervals of time, then it is moving at constant speed and still not accelerating.  If an object covers varying distances at equal intervals of time, then it is moving with changing speed or velocity. It means that the object is accelerating. Links and References Chapter 2: Representing Motion. Retrieved March 14, 2012 from http://igcse-physics--41-p2-yrh.brentsvillehs.schools.pwcs.edu/modules Chapter 3: Accelerated Motion. Retrieved March 14, 2012 from http://igcse- physics--41-p2-yrh.brentsvillehs.schools.pwcs.edu/modules HS Science IV: Physics in your environment. Teacher’s Edition. 1981. Science Education Center. Quezon City 16 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 98
  • 23. Suggested time allotment: 4 to 5 hours MODULE 2 WAVES AROUND YOU Waves occur all around you in the physical world. When you throw a stone into a lake, water waves spread out from the splash. When you strum the strings of a guitar, sound waves carry the noise all around you. When you switch on a lamp, light waves flood the room. Water, sound, and light waves differ in important ways but they all share the basic properties of wave motion. For instance, you can see water waves and surfers would say that they enjoy riding the waves. On the other hand, you don’t see sound waves and light waves but you experience them in other ways. Your ears can detect sound waves and your skin can get burned by ultraviolet waves if you stay under the sun for too long. A wave is a periodic disturbance that moves away from a source and carries energy with it. For example, earthquake waves show us that the amount of energy carried by a wave can do work on objects by exerting forces that move objects from their original positions. Have you personally experience an earthquake? How did it feel? Did you know that you can understand earthquakes by studying waves? In this module, you would be doing three activities that would demonstrate the properties of wave motion. After performing these activities, you should be able to: 1. explain how waves carry energy from one place to another; 2. distinguish between transverse and longitudinal waves; 3. distinguish between mechanical and electromagnetic waves; and 4. create a model to demonstrate the relationship among frequency, amplitude, wavelength, and wave velocity. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 17 99
  • 24. Warm up. What are Waves? Activity 1 will introduce you to different types of waves distinguished according to the direction of vibrations of particles with respect to the direction in which the waves travel. Activity 2 will give you a background of the terms and quantities used in describing periodic waves. Finally, Activity 3 will strengthen your understanding of the properties of waves and how they propagate. Try to wave at your seatmate and observe the motion of your hand. Do you make a side-to-side motion with the palm of your hand? Do you do an up- and-down motion with your hand? 1. Describe your personal hand wave. Waving is a common The repetitive motion that you do with your gesture that people do hand while waving is called a vibration. A vibration to catch someone’s causes wave motion. When you observe a wave, the attention or to convey source is always a vibration. a farewell. 2. Think of a still lake. How would you generate water waves on the lake? Activity 1. Let’s Make Waves! What happens when waves pass by? Objective In this activity, you will observe and draw different types of waves and describe how they are produced. You will also describe the different types of waves. Time Allotment: 30 minutes 18 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 100
  • 25. Materials  A rope (at least five meters long)  A colored ribbon  A coil spring (Slinky™)  A basin filled with water  A paper boat Procedure A. What are transverse waves? 1. Straighten the rope and place it above a long table. Hold one end of the rope and vibrate it up and down. You would be able to observe a pulse. Draw three sketches of the rope showing the motion of the pulse at three subsequent instances (snapshots at three different times). Draw an arrow to represent the direction of the pulse’s motion. Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 a. What is the source of the wave pulse? b. Describe the motion of your hand as you create the pulse. c. Describe the motion of the pulse with respect to the source. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 19 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 101
  • 26. You will now tag a specific part of the rope while making a series of pulses. A periodic wave can be regarded as a series of pulses. One pulse follows another in regular succession. Figure 1. Periodic wave Tie one end of the rope on a rigid and fixed object (e.g heavy table, door knob, etc). Figure 2. Rope tied to a rigid object Attach a colored ribbon on one part of the rope. You may use adhesive tape to fix the ribbon. Make a wave by continuously vibrating the end of the rope with quick up-and-down movements of your hand. Draw the waveform or the shape of the wave that you have created. Ask a friend to vibrate the rope while you observe the motion of the colored ribbon. Remember that the colored ribbon serves as a marker of a chosen segment of the rope. a. Does the wave transport the colored ribbon from its original position to the end of the rope? 20 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 102
  • 27. b. Describe the vibration of the colored ribbon. How does it move as waves pass by? Does it move in the same direction as the wave? B. What are longitudinal waves? 1. Connect one end of a long table to a wall. Place coil spring on top of table. Attach one end of the coil spring to the wall while you hold the other end. Figure 3. Coil spring on a flat table with one end attached to a wall Do not lift the coil spring. Ask a friend to vibrate the end of the coil spring by doing a back-and-forth motion parallel to the length of the spring. Observe the waves along the coil spring. Draw how the coil spring looks like as you move it back-and-forth. 2. Attach a colored ribbon on one part of the coil spring. You may use an adhesive tape to fix the ribbon. Ask a friend to vibrate the coil spring back-and-forth while you observe the motion of the colored ribbon. Remember that the colored ribbon serves as a marker of a chosen segment of the coil spring. a. Does the wave transport the colored ribbon from its original position to the end of the rope? b. Describe the vibration of the colored ribbon. How does it move as waves pass by? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 21 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 103
  • 28. C. What are surface waves? 1. Place a basin filled with water on top of a level table. Wait until the water becomes still or motionless. Create a wave pulse by tapping the surface of the water with your index finger and observe the direction of travel of the wave pulse. Tap the surface of the water at regular intervals to create periodic waves. View the waves from above and draw the pattern that you see. In your drawing, mark the source of the disturbance. 2. Wait for the water to become still before you place your paper boat on the surface. Create periodic waves and observe what happens to your paper boat. a. Do the waves set the paper boat into motion? What is required to set an object into motion? b. If you exert more energy in creating periodic waves by tapping the surface with greater strength, how does this affect the movement of the paper boat? 3. If you were somehow able to mark individual water molecules (you used a colored ribbon to do this earlier) and follow them as waves pass by, you would find that their paths are like those shown in the figure below. Figure 4. Surface waves 22 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 104
  • 29. a. As shown in the figure, the passage of a wave across a surface of a body of water involves the motion of particles following a ___________ pattern about their original positions. b. Does the wave transport water molecules from the source of the vibration? Support your answer using the shown figure. D. Summary 1. Waves can be typified according to the direction of motion of the vibrating particles with respect to the direction in which the waves travel. a. Waves in a rope are called ____________ waves because the individual segments of the rope vibrate ____________ to the direction in which the waves travel. b. When each portion of a coil spring is alternatively compressed and extended, ____________ waves are produced. c. Waves on the surface of a body of water are a combination of transverse and longitudinal waves. Each water molecule moves in a _______________ pattern as the waves pass by. 2. How do we know that waves carry energy? 3. What happens when waves pass by? Activity 2. Anatomy of a Wave How do you describe waves? Background You had the experience of creating periodic waves in Activity 1. In a periodic wave, one pulse follows another in regular succession; a certain waveform – the shape of individual waves – is repeated at regular intervals. Most periodic waves have sinusoidal waveforms as shown below. The highest point and lowest point of a wave are called the crest and the trough respectively. The amplitude is the maximum displacement of a vibrating particle on either side of its normal position when the wave passes. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 23 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 105
  • 30. Figure 5. Sinusoidal wave Objective In this activity, you will identify the quantities used in describing periodic waves. Time Allotment: 40 minutes Materials  A ruler  A basin filled with water  A rope (at least five meters long)  A colored ribbon  A watch or digital timer Procedure A. How can you measure the wavelength of a wave? 1. The wavelength of a wave refers to the distance between any successive identical parts of the wave. For instance, the distance from one crest to the next is equal to one full wavelength. In the following illustration, this is given by the interval B to F. Identify the other intervals that represent one full wavelength. _____________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________ 24 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 106
  • 31. 2. Place a basin filled with water on top of a level table. Wait for the water to become still. Create a vibration by regularly tapping the surface of the water with your index finger. You would be able to see the subsequent crest of the water waves. Figure 6. Crest and trough on a water wave Draw the water waves as you see them from the top of the basin. Label one wavelength in your drawing. 3. Increase the rate of the vibrations you create by tapping the surface of the water rapidly. What happens to the wavelength of the waves? _______________________________________________ Draw the water waves as you see them from the top of the basin. Compare it with your drawing in number 2. B. How do you measure the frequency of a wave? 1. The frequency of a series of periodic waves is the number of waves that pass a particular point every one second. Just like what you have done in Activity 1, attach a colored ribbon on a rope to serve Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 25 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 107
  • 32. as a tag. Tie one end of the rope on a fixed object and ask a friend to create periodic waves by regularly vibrating the other end of the rope. 2. You will count how many times the colored ribbon reached the crest in 10 seconds. You will start counting once the ribbon reaches the crest a second time. It means that one wave has passed by the ribbon’s position. Ask another friend with a watch or a digital timer to alert you to start counting and to stop counting after 10 seconds. Record the results in Table 1. 3. It is also useful to consider the period of a wave, which is the time required for one complete wave to pass a given point. The period of 1 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑜𝑑 = each wave is 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 From the identified frequency of the observed periodic waves, the period can be calculated. For example, if two waves per second are passing by, each wave has a period of ½ seconds. Table 1. Frequency and period of the wave Number of waves Frequency Period (N cycles) that passed by of the waves of the waves (seconds) the ribbon in 10 seconds (N cycles/10 seconds) The unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz); 1 Hz = 1 cycle/second. 4. If you increase the frequency of vibration by jerking the end of the rope at a faster rate, what happens to the wavelength? __________________________________________________________________ C. How do you measure the speed of a wave? 1. Using the rope with ribbon. Create periodic waves and estimate their wavelength. Count the number of waves that pass by the ribbon in ten seconds. Compute the frequency of the waves. Record the results in Table 2. 26 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 108
  • 33. 2. The wave speed is the distance traveled by the wave per second. 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 = 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑 = 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑥 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ From the basic formula that applies to all periodic waves, you can see that wave speed, frequency and wavelength are independent of the wave’s amplitude. a. Using the data from number 1, calculate the wave speed of the observed periodic waves. Record the result in Table 2. Table 2. The speed of a wave Estimated Number of waves Frequency Wave speed wavelength (N cycles) that of the waves (meter/second) (meters) passed by the (N cycles/10 ribbon in 10 seconds) seconds Summary 1. What is the relationship between wave speed, wavelength and frequency? 2. Suppose you observed an anchored boat to rise and fall once every 4.0 seconds as waves whose crests are 25 meters apart pass by it. a. What is the frequency of the observed waves? b. What is the speed of the waves? Activity 3. Mechanical vs. Electromagnetic Waves How do waves propagate? Objective In this activity, you will differentiate between mechanical waves and electromagnetic waves. Time Allotment: 30 minutes Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 27 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 109
  • 34. Materials  Findings from Activity 1  Chart of the electromagnetic spectrum A. What are mechanical waves? 1. When you created waves using a rope in Activity 1 Part A, you were able to observe a moving pattern. In this case, the medium of wave propagation is the rope. a. In Activity 1 Part B, what is the medium of wave propagation? b. In Activity 1 Part C, what is the medium of wave propagation? 2. The waves that you have created in Activity 1 all require a medium for wave propagation. They are called mechanical waves. a. How can you generate mechanical waves? The medium of propagation for the wave shown above is the rope. 3. All three kinds of waves – transverse, longitudinal, and surface – are sent out by an earthquake and can be detected many thousands of kilometers away if the quake is a major one. a. What do you think is the source of earthquake waves? b. What is the medium of propagation of earthquake waves? B. What are electromagnetic waves? 1. Energy from the sun reaches the earth through electromagnetic waves. As opposed to mechanical waves, electromagnetic waves require no material medium for their passage. Thus, they can pass through empty space. Locate the electromagnetic spectrum chart in your classroom. A smaller image of the chart is shown below. Identify the common name of each wave shown in the chart. 28 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 110
  • 35. 1. ______________________ 5. _______________________ 2. ______________________ 6. _______________________ 3. ______________________ 7. _______________________ 4. ______________________ 2. The electromagnetic spectrum shows the various types of electromagnetic waves, the range of their frequencies and wavelength. The wave speed of all electromagnetic waves is the same and equal to the speed of light which is approximately equal to 300 000 000 m/s. Figure 7. The electromagnetic spectrum a. Examine the electromagnetic spectrum. 1. Describe the relationship between frequency and wavelength of each electromagnetic wave. 2. Draw waves to represent each electromagnetic wave. Your illustrations must represent the wavelength of a wave relative to the others. For instance, gamma rays have a very small wavelength compared to the other waves in the spectrum. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 29 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 111
  • 36. 1. Gamma Rays 2. __________ 3. __________ 4. __________ 5. __________ 6. __________ 7. __________ b. The Sun is an important source of ultraviolet (UV) waves, which is the main cause of sunburn. Sunscreen lotions are transparent to visible light but absorb most UV light. The higher a sunscreen’s solar protection factor (SPF), the greater the percentage of UV light absorbed. Why are UV rays harmful to the skin compared to visible light? Compare the frequency and energy carried by UV waves to that of visible light. C. Summary 1. Mechanical waves like sound, water waves, earthquake waves, and waves in a stretched string propagate through a _______________ while __________________ waves such as radio waves, visible light, and gamma rays, do not require a material medium for their passage. Review. Waves Around You The activities that you have performed are all about wave motion or the propagation of a pattern caused by a vibration. Waves transport energy from one place to another thus they can set objects into motion. 30 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 112
  • 37. What happens when waves pass by? Activity 1 introduced you to transverse waves, longitudinal waves, and surface waves. You observed the motion of a segment of the material through which the wave travels. 1. Transverse waves occur when the individual particles or segments of a medium vibrate from side to side perpendicular to the direction in which the waves travel. 2. Longitudinal waves occur when the individual particles of a medium vibrate back and forth in the direction in which the waves travel. 3. The motion of water molecules on the surface of deep water in which a wave is propagating is a combination of transverse and longitudinal displacements, with the result that molecules at the surface move in nearly circular paths. Each molecule is displaced both horizontally and vertically from its normal position. 4. While energy is transported by virtue of the moving pattern, it is important to remember that there is not net transport of matter in wave motion. The particles vibrate about a normal position and do not undergo a net motion. How can you describe waves? In Activity 2, you have encountered the important terms and quantities used to describe periodic waves. 1. The crest and trough refer to the highest point and lowest point of a wave pattern, respectively. 2. The amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of a particle of the medium on either side of its normal position when the wave passes. 3. The frequency of periodic waves is the number of waves that pass a particular point for every one second while the wavelength is the distance between adjacent crests or troughs. 4. The period is the time required for one complete wave to pass a particular point. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 31 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 113
  • 38. 5. The speed of the wave refers to the distance the wave travels per unit time. It is related to the frequency of the wave and wavelength through the following equation: 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒 𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 = 𝑓𝑟𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑦 𝑥 𝑤𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ How do waves propagate? Finally, Activity 3 prompted you to distinguish between mechanical and electromagnetic waves. 1. In mechanical waves, some physical medium is being disturbed for the wave to propagate. A wave traveling on a string would not exist without the string. Sound waves could not travel through air if there were no air molecules. With mechanical waves, what we interpret as a wave corresponds to the propagation of a disturbance through a medium. 2. On the other hand, electromagnetic waves do not require a medium to propagate; some examples of electromagnetic waves are visible light, radio waves, television signals, and x-rays. Up Next. Light In the next module, you would learn about visible light, the most familiar form of electromagnetic waves, since it is the part of the electromagnetic spectrum that the human eye can detect. Through some interesting activities, you would come across the characteristics of light, how it is produced and how it propagates. You would need the concepts that you learned from this module to fully understand and appreciate the occurrence of light. 32 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 114
  • 39. Pre/Post Test Consider the diagram below to answer questions 1 and 2. 1. The wavelength of the wave in the diagram above is given by letter ______. 2. The amplitude of the wave in the diagram above is given by letter _____. 3. Indicate the interval that represents a half wavelength. a. A to E c. A to B b. B to F d. C to E 4. A pulse sent down a long string eventually dies away and disappears. What happens to its energy? a. The energy disappears with the wave. b. The energy is remains along the length of the string. c. The energy is transferred from the wave to the environment. d. The pulse does not carry energy. 5. Mechanical waves transport energy from one place to another through a. Alternately vibrating particles of the medium b. Particles traveling with the wave c. Vibrating particles and traveling particles d. None of the above 6. In a transverse wave, the individual particles of the medium a. move in circles b. move in ellipses c. move parallel to the direction of travel d. move perpendicular to the direction of travel Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 33 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 115
  • 40. 7. The higher the frequency of a wave, a. the lower its speed c. the greater its amplitude b. the shorter its wavelength d. the longer its period 8. Of the following properties of a wave, the one that is independent of the others is its a. amplitude c. wavelength b. wave speed d. frequency 9. Waves in a lake are 5.00 m in length and pass an anchored boat 1.25 s apart. The speed of the waves is a. 0.25 m/s b. 4.00 m/s c. 6.25 m/s d. impossible to find from the information given 10. Energy from the sun reaches the earth through a. ultraviolet waves c. mechanical waves b. infrared waves d. electromagnetic waves References and Web Links Anatomy of an electromagnetic wave. Available at: http://missionscience.nasa.gov/ems/02_anatomy.html Electromagnetic waves. Available at: http://www.colorado.edu/physics/2000/waves_particles/ [3] Hewitt, P. (2006). Conceptual Physics 10th Ed. USA: Pearson Addison- Wesley. The anatomy of a wave. Available at: http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/waves/u10l2a.cfm The nature of a wave. Available at: http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/waves/u10l1c.cfm 34 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 116
  • 41. Suggested time allotment: 8 to 10 hours MODULE 3 SOUND Would you like to try placing your palm on your throat while saying – “What you doin?” What did your palm feel? Were there vibrations in the throat? Try it again and this time, say – “Mom! Phineas and Ferb are making a title sequence!” Terms to Remember In the previous module you learned Longitudinal Wave about wave properties and common - Wave whose motion is parallel characteristics like pitch and loudness. You to the motion of the particles of will also learn the 2 kinds of waves according the medium Mechanical wave to propagation. These are the longitudinal and - Wave that need a medium in transverse waves. Sound is an example of a order to propagate longitudinal wave. It is also classified as a mechanical wave. Thus there has to be matter for which sound should travel and propagate. This matter is better known as medium. Figure 1. Longitudinal wave How does sound propagate? In Activity 1, you will try to explore how sound is produced. You are going to use local materials available in your community to do this activity. You can do “Art Attack” and be very creative with your project. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 35 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 117
  • 42. Activity 1 My own sounding box Objectives In this activity, you should be able to construct a sounding box to 1. demonstrate how sound is produced; and 2. identify factors that affect the pitch and loudness of the sound produced. Materials Needed  shoe box  variety of elastic or rubber bands (thin and thick)  extra cardboard – optional  pair of scissors or cutter Handle all sharp  ruler TAKE tools with care. CARE! Procedure 1. Cut and design your shoe box as shown in Figure 2. 2. Put the rubber bands around the box. Make sure that the rubber bands are almost equally spaced and that the rubber bands are arranged according to increasing thickness from the lower end to the other Figure 2. My sounding box end of the box. 36 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 118
  • 43. 3. Use your finger to pluck each rubber band. Listen to the sound produced. Q1. What physical signs did you observe when you plucked each band. Did you hear any sound? What produced the sound? Q2. How different are the sounds produced by each band with different thickness? 4. This time use the fingers of one hand to stretch one of the elastics. Pluck the elastic with the fingers of the other hand and observe. Q3. Are there changes in the note when you plucked the stretched band? 5. Repeat step 4 with the other elastic bands. Q4. Arrange the elastics in sequence from the highest note to the lowest note produced. When we talk or make any sound, our vocal cords vibrate. When there are no vibrations felt, no sound is produced. This means that sounds are caused by vibrations. Vibrations of molecules are to the to-and-fro or back- and-forth movement of molecules. Vibrations are considered as a disturbance that travels through a medium. This vibratory motion causes energy to transfer to our ears and is interpreted by our brain. Sound waves are examples of longitudinal waves. They are also known as mechanical waves since sound waves need medium in order to propagate. In Activity 1, vibrations produced by the elastic band produced sound. The sounding box amplified (increase in amplitude) this sound. Sound waves can travel in air. When they come in contact with our eardrums, the vibrations of the air force our eardrums to vibrate which is sensed and interpreted by our brain. Can sound waves also travel in other media like solids and liquids? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 37 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 119
  • 44. You can try this one. Place your ear against one end of a tabletop. Ask a friend to gently tap the other end of the table with a pencil or a ruler. What happens? Then ask your friend to again gently tap the other end of the table but this time, make sure that your ear is not touching the table. What happens? In which situation did you encounter louder and more pronounced sound? In which situation did you encounter the sound clearly? Sound is produced by the slight tapping of the table with a pencil or a ruler. This can be heard clearly at the other end of the table. This shows that sound waves can also travel through wood or solid. Sound is more distinct in solids than in air. This also means that sound is heard much louder when it travels in solids than in air. What about in liquids? Can sound travel in liquids too? Liquids are better transmitters of sound than gases. If two bodies are struck together underwater, the sound heard by a person Figure 3: Molecules of different media who is underwater is louder than when heard in air, but softer than in solids. As you can see in Figure 3, particles of solids are more closely packed than particles of liquid and gas. This is why sound produced in solids is much more distinct and loud than when it is propagated or produced in liquids and gas. Between liquids and gases, on the other hand, liquid particles appear more closely spaced than gases. This means that louder sound will be produced in liquids than in gases. Spacing of particles of the medium like solid, liquid and gas is an important factor on how would is transmitted. Take a look at Figure 3, liquid particles are closer to each other than the particles in the gas. Sound waves are transmitted easier in liquids. Between liquids and solids, the particles of solids are even closer together than the liquid molecules; therefore, sound travels even faster in solids than in liquids. Since different media transmit sound differently, sound travels at different speeds in 38 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 120
  • 45. different materials. Since solid is the best transmitter of sound, sound travels fastest in solids and slowest in gases. The table below shows the speed of sound in different materials. Table 1: Speed of sound in different materials Speed of Sound Materials V (m/s) Air (0oC) 331 He (0oC) 1005 H (20oC) 1300 Water 1440 Seawater 1560 Iron and Steel 5000 Aluminum 5100 Hard wood 4000 Sound speed is dependent on several factors such as (1) atmospheric pressure, (2) relative humidity, and (3) atmospheric temperature. Remember these weather elements you studied in your earlier grades? High values of these elements lead to faster moving sound. When you are in the low lands and the surrounding is hot, sound travels fast. Do you want to know why sound travels faster in hot air? There are more molecular interactions that happen in hot air. This is because the hot particles of air gain more kinetic energy and so there is also an increase in the mean velocity of the molecules. Since sound is a consequence of energy transfer through collisions, more collisions and faster collisions means faster sound. Going a little deeper on this, speed of sound basically depends on the elastic property and the inertial property of the medium on which it propagates. The elastic property is concerned with the ability of the material to retain or maintain its shape and not to deform when a force is applied on it. Solids as compared to liquids and gases have the highest elastic property. Consequently, solid is the medium on which sound travels fastest. This means that the greater the elastic property, the faster the sound waves travel. The iniertial property, on the other hand, is the tendency of the material to maintain its state of motion. More inertial property means the more inert (more massive or greater mass density) the individual particles of the medium, the less responsive they will be to the interactions between neighbouring particles and the slower that the wave will be. Within a single phase medium, like air for example, humid air is more inert than humid air. This is because water that has changed to vapor is mixed with the air. This phenomenon increases the mass density of air and so increases the inertial Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 39 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 121
  • 46. property of the medium. This will eventually decrease the speed of sound on that medium. Sound cannot travel in a vacuum. Remember that sound is a mechanical wave which needs medium in order to propagate. If no matter exists, there will be no sound. In the outer space, sound would not be transmitted. Sound waves possess characteristics common to all types of waves. These are frequency, wavelength, amplitude, speed or velocity, period and phase. Just like other waves, sound also exhibits wave properties just like reflection, refraction, diffraction, and interference. More than these properties are pitch and loudness of sound. Pitch refers to the highness or lowness of sound. Loudness is how soft or how intense the sound is as perceived by the ear and interpreted by the brain. Do you want to find out more characteristics and properties of sound? Activity No. 2 will let your discover some of these properties using your sounding box. Activity 2 Properties and characteristics of sound Objective In this activity, you will use your sounding box to describe the characteristics of sound and compare them with those of sound produced by a guitar. Materials Needed  Sounding Box  Wooden rod  Ruler  Guitar Procedure Part 1: Sounding the Box... 1. Label the rubber bands of your sounding box as S1, S2 and so on. Labeling should start with the thinnest rubber band. 40 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 122
  • 47. 2. Pluck each rubber band. Listen to the sounds produced. Q1. What did you observed when you plucked each of the rubber bands and sound is produced? How then is sound produced? Q2. Is there a difference in the sound produced by each of the rubber bands? How do they differ? Q3. Which band produced a higher sound? Which band produced a lower sound? Q4. How can you make a softer sound? How can you make a louder sound? Q5. What factors affect the pitch and loudness of the sound produced by the rubber bands? 3. Stretch one of the rubber bands and while doing so, pluck it again. Q6. Is there a change in the sound produced when you pluck the rubber band while stretching it? How does stretching the rubber band affect the pitch of the sound produced? 4. Place a ruler (on its edge) across ruler ruler the sounding box as shown in Figure 3. Pluck each rubber band and observe. Q7. Is there a difference in the sound produced when the ruler is placed across the Figure 3: With stretch rubber box? bands 5. Move the ruler off center to the left or to a diagonal position so that one side of each rubber band is shorter than the other side (Figure 4). Pluck again each rubber band on each side of the ruler and observe. Figure 4: Diagonal Stretching of the bands Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 41 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 123
  • 48. Q8. Which part of the rubber band (shorter side or longer side) provides higher pitch? Which part provides lower pitch? Q9. Again, what factors affect the pitch of the sound produced by the rubber bands? Part 2: The Guitar... 6. Strum each guitar string without holding the frets. (String #0 is the lower most string while string #6 is the uppermost string.) 7. Record all you observations in the table provided. String # Pitch (High or Low) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Q10. Which string vibrates fastest when strummed? Q11. Which string vibrates slowest when strummed? Q12. Which string has the highest frequency? Q13. Which string has the highest pitch? Q14. Which has the lowest frequency? Q15. Which string has the lowest pitch? Q16. How would you relate pitch and frequency? The highness or lowness of sound is known as the pitch of a sound or a musical note. In Activity No. 2 you were able to relate vibrations, frequency and pitch using your improvised sounding box and a guitar. The pitch of a high frequency sound is also high and a low frequency sound is also; lower in pitch. 42 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 124
  • 49. When you were in your earlier grades you studied about the human ear. Our ear and that of animals are the very sensitive sound detectors. The ear is a part of the peripheral auditory system. It is divided into three major parts: the outer ear, the middle ear and the inner ear. The outer ear called the pinna collects the sound waves and focuses them into the ear Figure 4: The human ear canal. This canal transmits the sound waves to the eardrum. The ear canal is the eardrum membrane or the tympanum. It separates the outer and the middle ears physically. Air vibrations set the eardrum membrane in motion that causes the three smallest bones (hammer, anvil and stirrup) to move. These three bones convert the small- amplitude vibration of the eardrum into large-amplitude oscillations. These oscillations are transferred to the inner ear through the oval window. Behind the oval window is a snail-shell shaped liquid –filled organ called the cochlea. The large-amplitude oscillations create waves that travel in liquid. These sounds are converted into electrical impulses, which are sent to the brain by the auditory nerve. The brain, interprets these signals as words, music or noise. Did you know that we can only sense within the frequency range of about 20 Hz to about 20000 Hz? Vibrational frequencies beyond 20 000 Hz is called ultrasonic frequencies while extremely low frequencies are known as infrasonic frequencies. Our ear cannot detect ultrasonic or infrasonic waves. But some animals like dogs can hear sounds as high as 50 000 Hz while bats can detect sounds as high as 100 000 Hz. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 43 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 125
  • 50. We can see images of your baby brother or sister when the OB-Gyne asks your mommy or nanay to undergo ultrasound. Ultrasonic waves are used to help physicians see our internal organs. Nowadays, ultrasonic technology is of three kinds: 2-dimensional, 3-dimensional, and 4- dimensional categories. In the 3- and 4-dimensional ultrasonic technologies, the features of the fetus are very clearly captured. Figure 5: Ultrasound It has also been found that ultrasonic waves can be used as rodent and insect exterminators. The very loud ultrasonic sources in a building will usually drive the rodents away or disorient cockroaches causing them to die from the induced erratic behavior. What other applications of sound do you have in mind? Do you want to share them too? Loudness and Intensity Do you still remember intensity of light in the previous module? In sound, intensity refers to the amount of energy a sound wave. Figure 6 shows varying intensity of sound. High amplitude sounds usually carry large energy and have higher intensity while low amplitude sound carry lesser amount of energy and have lower intensity. Figure 6: Varying sounds Sound intensity is measured by various instruments like the oscilloscope. Loudness is a psychological sensation that differs for different people. Loudness is subjective but is still related to the intensity of sound. In fact, despite the subjective variations, loudness varies nearly logarithmically with intensity. A logarithmic scale is used to describe sound intensity, which roughly corresponds to loudness. The unit of intensity level for sound is the decibel (dB), which was named after Alexander Graham Bell 44 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 126
  • 51. who invented the telephone. On the decibel scale, an increase of 1 dB means that sound intensity is increased by a factor of 10. Father and son duo interprets the loudness of a sound differently. The son considers the rock music a soft music while the father considers it a loud sound. The father may even interpret the sound as a distorted sound, which is known as noise. Figure 7: Father and Son Duo Noise is wave that is not pleasing to the senses. Table 2. Sound Levels of different sound sources Source of sound Level (dB) Jet engine, 30 m away 140 Threshold of pain 120 Amplified rock music 115 Old subway train 100 Average factory 90 Busy street traffic 70 Normal conversation 60 Library 40 Close whisper 20 Normal breathing 10 Threshold of hearing 0 Let’s see how you interpret sound yourselves. Look for 3 more classmates and try Activity 3. This will test your ability to design and at the same time show your talents! Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 45 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 127
  • 52. Activity 3 Big time gig! Objectives In this activity, you should be able to: 1. create musical instruments using indigenous products and 2. use these instruments to compose tunes and present in a Gig. Students may also utilize other indigenous musical instruments. Materials Needed  Indigenous materials such as sticks, bottles or glassware available in your locality to be used as musical instrument  Localized or improvised stringed instruments  Localized or improvised drum set Procedure 1. Form a group of four (4). One can play a stringed instrument, while the other can play the drum and the 3rd member can use the other instrument that your group will design or create. The last member will be your group’s solo performer. 2. Look for local materials which you can use to create different musical instruments. 3. Try to come up with your own composition using the instruments you have created. 4. In the class GIG you are to play and sing at least 2 songs (any song of your choice and your original composition). 5. Check the Rubric included to become familiar with the criteria for which you will be rated. 46 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 128
  • 53. Big Time Gig! Rubric Scoring Task/ 4 3 2 1 Score Criteria  Makes use of  Makes use local or  Makes use  Makes use of local indigenous of local of local materials materials materials materials only. Improvised/  The improvised only. only.  The sound Localized instruments  The  The produced by musical produce good improvised improvised the instruments quality sound instruments instruments improvised comparable to produce produce fair instruments standard good quality quality is not clear musical sound. sound. and instruments. distinct. The group’s The group’s The group’s The group’s original original original original composition has composition composition composition good melody. has fair melody has fair melody has fair melody Composition and the lyrics and the lyrics and the lyrics The lyrics provided provided are provided are provided are are thematic and NEITHER thematic and NOT thematic meaningful thematic nor meaningful but meaningful meaningful  The group  The group  The group  The group was was able to was able to was able to able to successfully use the use the successfully use use the improvised improvised the improvised improvised musical musical musical musical instruments instruments instruments in Performance instruments but some but MOST their GIG. in their were out of were out of  The group was GIG. tune tune able to provide  The group  The group  The group good quality was able to was able to was able to rendition or provide fair provide fair provide fair performance. rendition. rendition. rendition 3 out of 4 2 out of 4 Each one of them members completed their Cooperation completed their task completed their Only 1 out of task so as to and Team so as to come up task so as to the 4 members come up with Work with the expected come up with did his/her job the expected output - GIG the expected output - GIG output - GIG TOTAL Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 47 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 129
  • 54. How was your GIG? Did you enjoy this activity? Aside from the concepts and principles in sound you learned and applied for a perfect performance what other insights can you identify? Can you extend your designs to come up with quality instruments using indigenous materials? You can be famous with your artworks... Sound waves are mechanical waves than need for a medium for sound to propagate. Vibrations of the medium create a series of compression and rarefaction which results to longitudinal waves. Sound can travel in all media but not in vacuum. Sound is fastest in matter that is closely packed like solid and slowest in gas. Speed of sound is dependent on factors like temperature, humidity and air pressure. High temperature brings much faster sound. Increased humidity, on the other hand makes sound travel slower. As pressure is increased, speed is also increased. Inertial and elastic properties of the medium also play an important part in the speed of sound. Solids tend to be highly elastic than gases and thus sound travel fastest in solids. In a single phase matter however, the inertial property which is the tendency of the material to maintain its motion also affect speed of sound. Humid air is more massive and is more inert than dry air. This condition brings lesser molecular interactions and eventually slower sound. Sound, just like other waves do have characteristics such as speed, frequency, wavelength, amplitude, phase and period. Like any other wave, sound exhibit properties like reflection, refraction, interference and diffraction. Other properties are loudness and pitch. Pitch is dependent on the frequency of sound wave. The higher frequency the higher the pitch of the sound produced. Organisms like us are capable of sensing sound through our ears. Just like other organism, our ears do have parts that perform special tasks until the auditory signals reach and are interpreted by our brain. Frequencies beyond the audible to human are known as ultrasonic (beyond the upper limit) and infrasonic (below the lower limit). Intensity and loudness are quantitative and qualitative descriptions of the energy carried by the wave. High amplitude waves are intense and are sensed as loud sound. Low amplitude sound waves are soft sound. Music is a special sound that forms patterns and are appealing to our sense of hearing. Reading Materials/Links/Websites http://www.physicsclassroom.com/Class/sound/u11l2c.cfm http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sound#Sound_wave_properties_and_characteristics http://personal.cityu.edu.hk/~bsapplec/characte.htm http://www.slideshare.net/agatonlydelle/physics-sounds 48 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 130
  • 55. Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours MODULE LIGHT 4 Do you still remember Sir Isaac Newton? What about Christian Huygens? Did you meet them in your earlier grades? These people were the first to study about light. In this module, you will learn about light. You will also find out that there are different sources of light and that light exhibits different characteristics and properties. Finally, you will design a simple activity to test whether light travels in a straight light or not. What are the common sources of light? How do these common sources produce light? What are the common properties and characteristics of light? Sir Isaac Newton believed that light behaves like a particle while Christian Huygens believed that light behaves like a wave. A 3rd scientist, Max Planck came up with what is now known as the Dual-Nature of Light. He explained that light can be a particle and can also be a wave. To complete our knowledge about the nature of light, James Clark Maxwell proposed the Electromagnetic Theory of Light. While these scientists dig deep into the nature of light and how light are propagated, let us be more familiar with ordinary materials we use as common sources of light. The Sun for example is known as a natural source of light. Sun is also considered as a luminous body (an object capable of producing its own light). Other sources are the lamps, bulbs, and candles. These are the artificial sources. In your earlier grades you learned about energy transformation. Energy transformation is needed to convert or transform forms of energy to light or other forms. In bulbs, electric potential is converted to light. In lamps, chemical energy is transformed to light. Grade 7 7 Science:Learner’s In Motion(Second Part) Grade Science: Energy Material 49 131
  • 56. In Activity 1, you will try to observe transformation of chemical energy from chemical substances such as oil to light. Further, you will also gather data which chemical substance is best by relating it to the brightness of the light produced. In this activity, you will use the langis kandila or lampara as we call it in the Philippines or the Diwali lights as it is known in other countries like India. Activity 1 Light sources: Langis kandila or lampara Objectives In this activity, you should be able to: 1. construct a simple photometer; 2. determine which chemical substance produce the brightest light; and 3. infer that brightness of light is dependent on the distance of the source. Materials Needed  an electric glow lamp (Small lamp is needed)  candle - weighing 75 grams  wedge with sloping surfaces (sharp angle about 60° to 70° that serve as the photometer (made of white wood or paper)  langis kandila or lampara  variety of vegetable oil (about 5)  aluminum pie containers or small clay pots  cotton string for wick  set of books or tripod that will serve as platform for Diwali lights Procedure Part 1: Improvised Photometer Arrange the electric glow lamp, the candle and the wedge as shown on the right. Make sure that you do 1 2 this activity in a dark room for good Figure 1. Improvised photometer set up results. 50 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 132
  • 57. Illuminate the side “A” of the wedge by the lamp and side “B” by the candle. In general the lamp side will look brighter than the other. Move the wedge nearer to the candle to a spot at which you as an observer, looking down on the two surfaces of the wedge (from “C”) cannot see any difference between them in respect of brightness. (They are then equally illuminated; that is to say the candle light falling on “B” is equal in intensity to the electric light falling on “A.”) Calculate the power of the lamp relative to the candle. (E.g. If both side of the wedge showed equal illumination when it is about 200 cm from 1, and 50 cm from 2, the distances are as 4 to 1. But as light falls off according to the square of the distance: (200)2 = 40 000 and (50)2 = 2 500 or 16 to 1.). Thus the candle-power of the lamp is 16. Q1. What is the candle power of your set up? (Include your computations.) Part 2: Langis Kandila or Lampara 1. Make 5 langis kandila or lampara using aluminium pie containers or small clay pots as shown. Label your langis kandila as DL- KL1, DL-KL2 and so on. Figure 2: Langis kandila or lampara 2. Pour different variety of vegetable oil in each of the pot. 3. Use the improvised photometer to determine the brightness of each of the candle. 4. Replace the candle you used in the 1st part with the langis kandila. 5. Compute the candle power of the lamp with respect to the langis kandila. You may refer to step 4 for the step by step process of determining the candle power using the improvised photometer. Record your data on the provided table: Table 1. Brightness of Vegetable Oil Variety Diwali Lights/Langis Vegetable Oil Brightness/Luminous Kandila Variety Intensity (Candela) DL-LK 1 Canola Oil DL-LK 2 Butter DL-LK 3 Margarine DL-LK 4 Corn Oil DL-LK 5 Olive Oil Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 51 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 133
  • 58. Q2. Which among the langis kandila or lampara is the brightest? Part 3: Intensity vs Distance from light source 1. Position your brightest Diwali light or langis kandila 20 inches or about 50 cm from the wedge. Compute the brightness of the Diwali light. 2. Move the langis kandila or Diwali light 10 cm closer then compute the brightness. 3. Repeat step 2 and each time move the langis kandila or Diwali light 10 cm closer to the wedge. Compute the corresponding brightness and record your data on the table below. Distance from the Brightness Observation Wedge (cm) (Candela) 50 40 30 20 10 Q3. How would you relate the brightness or intensity of light with the distance from the source? Brightness of light depends on the source and the distance from the source. Brightness however, is qualitative and is dependent of the person’s perception. Quantitatively, brightness can be expressed as luminous intensity with a unit known as candela. The unit expression came from the fact that one candle can approximately represent the amount of visible radiation emitted by a candle flame. However, this decades-ago assumption is inaccurate. But we still used this concept in Activity 1 as we are limited to an improvised photometer. If you are using a real photometer on the other hand, luminous intensity refers to the amount of light power emanating from a point source within a solid angle of one steradian. Further, in Activity 1, varied chemical sources produced different light intensity. Likewise, different distances from the light source provided varied intensity. As mentioned earlier, James Clark Maxwell discovered the Electromagnetic Theory of Light. He combined the concepts of light, electricity and magnetism to come up with his theory forming electromagnetic waves. Since these are waves they also exhibit different 52 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 134
  • 59. characteristics of waves such as wavelength, frequency and wave speed which you have studied in the previous module. There are different forms of electromagnetic waves arranged according to frequency. This arrangement of the electromagnetic waves is known as Electromagnetic spectrum. The visible part of which is known as white light or visible light. The next activity will lead you to explore the characteristics of the electromagnetic spectrum. Activity 2 My spectrum wheel Objectives In this activity, you should be able to 1. construct a spectrum wheel and 2. explore the characteristics of light such as energy, frequency and wavelength. Materials Needed  Spectrum Wheel Pattern TAKE Handle all sharp  Cardboard or illustration board objects with care.  Button fastener CARE!  Glue or paste Procedure Part 1: Spectrum Wheel Cut the two art files that make up the wheel on the next pages. Cut along the lines drawn on the top wheel. The small window near the center of the wheel should be completely cut out and removed. Punch a whole into the center of the two wheels together. You may use a button fastener to hold the two wheels securely in place, one on top of the other, but they should be free to rotate relative to each other. When you see a region of the EM spectrum show up in the open window and the "W,F,E" that correspond to that region showing up under the flaps then you know that you have done it right. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 53 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 135
  • 60. Source: Sonoma State University (http://www.swift.sonoma.edu 54 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 136
  • 61. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 55 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 137
  • 62. Part 2: Characteristics of Light Try out your Spectrum Wheel by positioning the inner most of the flaps on EM SPECTRUM. This will simultaneously position the other flaps to ENERGY, WAVELENGTH & FREQUENCY. Turn the upper wheel and observe the combinations. Fill in the table below with the corresponding combinations you have observed using your Spectrum Wheel. Table 1. Characteristics of Light Frequency x EM Spectrum Energy Frequency Wavelength wavelength Radio Microwave Infrared Visible Light Ultraviolet X-Ray Gamma Ray Q1. How are frequency and wavelength related for a specific region of the spectrum? Q2. What can you observe with the values of the product of frequency and wavelength in the different spectra? Q3. How is ENERGY related to FREQUENCY? Now that we are familiar with the electromagnetic spectrum and the corresponding energies, frequencies and wavelength probably we can see some applications of these in everyday living. UV rays are highly energetic than other spectral regions on its left. This could be a possible reason why we are not advised to stay under the sun after 9:00 in the morning. Prolong use of mobile phones may cause ear infection. This may be due to a higher energy emitted by microwaves used in cellular phones than radio waves commonly used in other communication devices. What about the visible spectrum? Do you want to know more about this spectral region? 56 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 138
  • 63. What are the frequencies and energies of the visible spectrum? This is the visible light. Sir Isaac Newton used a prism to show that light which we ordinarily see as white consists of different colors. Dispersion is a phenomenon in which a prism separates white light into its component colors. Activity 3 will provide you more information about visible light. In this activity, you will be able to detect Figure 3. Color spectrum relationships between colors, energy, frequency, wavelength and intensity. Activity 3 Colors of light – color of life! Objectives In this activity, you should be able to 1. make a color spectrum wheel; 2. explore the characteristics of color lights; and 3. observe how primary colors combine to form other colors. Materials Needed  Color Spectrum Wheel Pattern Cardboard or illustration board  white screen  plastic filters (green, blue and red)  3 pieces of high intensity flashlights  button fastener  glue or paste Handle all sharp TAKE objects with care CARE! Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 57 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 139
  • 64. Procedure Part 1: Color Wheel 1. Cut the two art files that make up the wheel on the next pages. 2. Cut along the lines drawn on the top wheel. Cut the 2 sides as shown. The small window near the center of the wheel should be completely cut out and removed. 3. Punch a hole at the center of the two wheels. You may use a button fastener to secure the two wheels together one on top of the other, but they should be free to rotate relative to each other. 4. When you see a region of the Color spectrum show up in the open window and the "W,F,E" that correspond to that region showing up under the flaps then you know that you have done it right. 58 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 140
  • 65. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 59 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 141
  • 66. 60 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 142
  • 67. Part 2: Characteristics of Light 1. Try out your Color Spectrum Wheel by positioning the inner most of the flaps on COLOR SPECTRUM. This will simultaneously position the other flaps to ENERGY, WAVELENGTH & FREQUENCY. 2. Turn the upper wheel and observe the combinations. 3. Fill in the table below with the corresponding combinations you have observed using your Spectrum Wheel. Table 1. Characteristics of Color Lights Color Energy Frequency Wavelength Frequency x wavelength Spectrum (eV) (THz) (nm) (m/s) Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Violet 4. You will need to convert the equivalents of frequencies to Hz and the equivalent wavelengths to meters. Note that terra (T) is a prefix for 1014 while nano (n) is a prefix equivalent to 10-9. Q1. Which color registers the highest frequency? shortest wavelength? Q2. Which color registers the lowest frequency? longest wavelength? Q3. What do you observe with the wavelength and frequency of the different colors? Q4. What did you observe with the product of wavelength and frequency for each color? What is the significance of this value? Q5. What can you say about the speed of the different colors of light in air? Q6. Give a plausible explanation as to why white light separate into different colors. Part 3: Combining Colors 1. Cover the lens of the flashlight with blue plastic filter. Do the same with the 2 other flashlights. The 2nd flashlight with green plastic filter and the 3rd with red plastic filter. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 61 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 143
  • 68. 2. Ask 2 other groupmates to hold the 2 other flashlight while you hold on to the 3rd one. Shine these flashlights on the white screen and note the colors projected on the screen. 3. Let 2 color lights from the flashlights overlap. Observe what color is produced and fill in the table below. Table 2. Color that you see Color of Plastic Filter Color that you see projected on the screen Green Blue Red Table 3. Color Mixing Color Combination Resulting Color Green + Blue Blue + Red Red + Green Red + Green + Blue Dispersion, a special kind of refraction, provided us color lights. This phenomenon is observed when white light passes through a triangular prism. When white light enters a prism and travels slower in speed than in vacuum, color separation is observed due to variation in the frequencies (and wavelength) of color lights. Remember the concept of refractive indices in the previous module? The variations in frequencies (and wavelengths) are caused by the different refractive indices of the varying color light. Thus, blue light with greater refractive index refracts more and appears to bend more than red light. But do you really think that light will bend when travelling in space? The last activity in this module will test your ability to design an experiment to test if light travels in a straight line or not. Activity 4 Light up straight! Objective In this activity, you should be able to design an experiment given several materials to show that light travels in a straight line. 62 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 144
  • 69. Materials Needed  2 pieces of cardboard Handle all sharp  cutting tool objects with care.  bright room TAKE CARE! Handle all lighting  ruler or meter stick tools with care to  permanent marker avoid being burnt.  pencil  any object (e.g. medium size Johnson’s face powder box) General Instructions 1. Given the materials design a 5-6 step procedure to test that light follows a straight line or not. 2. Remember that you are only allowed to use the materials specified in this particular activity. 3. Check the rubric scoring for your guide. Lighting Up Straight! Rubric Scoring Task/ 4 3 2 1 Score Criteria  Steps are  Steps are  Steps are  Steps are logically logically logically logically presented. presented. presented. presented.  The procedure  The  The  The included about procedure procedure procedure 5-6 steps. included included included  All materials about 3-4 about 3-4 about 2-3 Experiment given to the steps. steps. steps. Procedure group are  75% of the  50% of the  25% of the utilized in the materials materials materials procedure given to the given to the given to the group are group are group are utilized in the utilized in utilized in procedure the the procedure procedure Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 63 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 145
  • 70. The group has The group has The group has The group had successfully attained the partially some effort but attained the object object to prove attained the was not able to to prove that light that light travels object to prove attained the Result of travels in a in a straight line that light object to prove Experiment straight line using using their travels in a that light Try-out/ their designed designed straight line travels in a Feasibility procedure. procedure but using their straight line there are some designed using their steps that are not procedure. designed. very clear. Each one of them About 75% of the About 50% of About 25% of completed their members the members the members Cooperation task so as to come completed their completed their did his/her job and Team up with the task so as to task so as to Work expected output. come up with the come up with expected output. the expected output. TOTAL Light, accordingly has wavelike nature and particle-like nature. As a wave, it is part of the electromagnetic waves as the visible spectrum. This visible spectrum is also known as white light. White light undergoes dispersion when it passes through a prism. The variations of refractive indices result to variations in the refraction of color lights dependent on the frequencies (and wavelength) of the color lights. This brings about blue light being refracted more than the other color lights and thus appears to be bent. However, light travels in a straight line path in a particular medium. Brightness or intensity and colors are special properties of light. These can be observed in different phenomena such as rainbows, red sunset, and blue sky. You can identify many other applications of light and colors as you become keen observers of natural phenomena. Reading Materials/Links/Websites http://amazing-space.stsci.edu/resources/explorations/groundup/ lesson/glossary/term-full.php?t=dispersion http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/refrn/u14l4a.cfm 64 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 146
  • 71. Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours MODULE HEAT 5 For sure, you have used the word ‘heat’ many times in your life. You have experienced it; you have observed its effects. But have you ever wondered what heat really is? In your earlier grades, you learned that heat moves from the source to other objects or places. Example is the kettle with water placed on top of burning stove. The water gets hot because heat from the burning stove is transferred to it. This module aims to reinforce your understanding of heat as an energy that transfers from one object or place to another. You will determine the conditions necessary for heat to transfer and the direction by which heat transfers by examining the changes in the temperature of the objects involved. You will observe the different methods of heat transfer and investigate some factors that affect these methods. The results will help you explain why objects get hot or cold and why some objects are seemingly colder or warmer than the others even if they are exposed to the same temperature.  How is heat transferred between objects or places?  Do all objects equally conduct, absorb, or emit heat? What is Heat? Have you ever heard of the term “thermal energy” before? Any object is said to possess thermal energy due to the movement of its particles. How is heat related to thermal energy? Like any other forms of energy, thermal energy can be transformed into other forms or transferred to other objects or places. Heat is a form of energy that refers to the thermal energy that is ‘in Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 65 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 147
  • 72. transit’ or in the process of being transferred. It stops to become heat when the transfer stops. After the energy is transferred, say to another object, it may again become thermal energy or may be transformed to other forms. Thermometer Heat transfer is related to change in temperature or change in the relative hotness or coldness of an object. Most of the activities found in Figure 1. Thermometer this module will ask you to collect and analyze temperature readings to arrive at the desired concepts. To achieve this, you have to use the laboratory thermometer, which is different from the clinical thermometer we use to determine our body temperature. The kind that you most probably have in your school is the glass tube with fluid inside, usually mercury or alcohol. Always handle the thermometer with care to avoid breaking the glass. Also, be sure that you know how to read and use the device properly to get good and accurate results. Inform your teacher if you are not sure of this so that you will be guided accordingly. Activity 1 Warm me up, cool me down Objective In this activity, you should be able to describe the condition necessary for heat transfer to take place and trace the direction in which heat is transferred. Materials Needed  2 small containers (drinking cups or glasses)  2 big containers (enough to accommodate the small containers)  tap water  hot water  food coloring  laboratory thermometers (with reading up to 100oC) Procedure 1. Label the small and big containers as shown in Figure 2. Figure 2 66 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 148
  • 73. 2. Half fill containers 1, 2, and A with tap water. Half fill also container B with hot water. Be careful when you pour hot water into the container. 3. Add few drops of food coloring on the larger containers. 4. Measure the initial temperature of Setup 1 Setup 2 water in each of the 4 containers, in degree Celsius (°C). Record your measurements in Table 1. 5. Carefully place container 1 inside container A (Figure 3). This will be Figure 3 your Setup 1. 6. Place also container 2 inside container B. This will be your Setup 2. 7. Measure the temperature of water in all containers 2 minutes after arranging the setups. Record again your measurements in the table (after 2 minutes). 8. Continue to measure and record the temperature of water after 4, 6, 8, and 10 minutes. Write all your measurements in the table below. Table 1. Temperature readings for Setup 1 and Setup 2 Temperature (°C) of Water After Container 0 min 2 4 6 8 10 (initial) mins mins mins mins mins Setup 1-Tap water 1 A-Tap water Setup 2-Tap water 2 B-Hot water Q1. In which setup did you find changes in the temperature of water inside the containers? In which setup did you NOT find changes in the temperature of water inside the containers? Q2. In which setup is heat transfer taking place between the containers? Q3. What then is the condition necessary for heat transfer to take place between objects? 9. Refer to the changes in the temperature of water in the setup where heat transfer is taking place. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 67 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 149
  • 74. Q4. Which container contains water with higher initial temperature? What happens to its temperature after 2 minutes? Q5. Which container contains water with lower initial temperature? What happens to its temperature after 2 minutes? Q6. If heat is related to temperature, what then is the direction of heat that transfers between the containers? Q7. What happens to the temperature of water in each container after 4, 6, 8, and 10 minutes? What does this tell us about the heat transfer taking place between the containers? Q8. Until when do you think will heat transfer continue to take place between the containers? If your teacher allows it, you may continue to measure the temperature of the water in both containers for your basis in answering Q8. And if you plot the temperature vs. time graph of the water in both containers, you will obtain a graph similar to Figure 4. Temperature (°C) Time (s) Figure 4 10. Analyze the graph and answer the following questions: Q9. What does the blue curved line on the graph show? Which container does this represent? Q10. What does the red curved line on the graph show? Which container does this represent? Q11. What does the orange broken line in the graph show? Is heat transfer still taking place during this time? If yes, where is heat transfer now taking place? 68 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 150
  • 75. If you do not have laboratory thermometers in your school, you may still perform the activity above using your sense of touch. You can use your fingers or hands to feel the objects being observed. But be very careful with this especially if you are dealing with hot water. You have to take note also that touching is not always reliable. Try out this simple activity below. Prepare three containers. Half fill one container with hot water, but not hot enough to burn your hand. Pour very cold water into the second container and lukewarm water in the third container. First, simultaneously place your left hand in the hot water and your right hand in the cold water. Keep them in for a few minutes. Then take them out, and place both of them together into the container with lukewarm water. How do your hands feel? Do they feel equally cold? If you try out this activity, you will observe that your left hand feels the water cold while your right hand feels it warm. This is due to the initial conditions of the hands before they were placed into the container with lukewarm water. So if you use sensation to determine the relative hotness or coldness of the objects, make sure to feel the objects with different hands or fingers. How Does Heat Transfer? In the previous activity, you explored the idea that heat transfers under certain conditions. But how exactly is heat transferred? The next activities will allow you to explore these different methods by which heat can be transferred from one object or place to another. Activity 2 Which feels colder? Objective In this activity, you should be able to describe heat transfer by conduction and compare the heat conductivities of materials based on their relative coldness. Materials Needed  small pieces of different objects (copper/silver coin, paper, aluminum foil, iron nail, etc.)  laboratory thermometer Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 69 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 151
  • 76. Procedure Part A: To be performed one day ahead. 1. Place a laboratory thermometer inside the freezer of the refrigerator. 2. Place also your sample objects inside the freezer at the same time. Leave them inside the freezer overnight. Part B: To be performed the next day. 3. Take the temperature reading from the thermometer inside the freezer. Q1. What is the temperature reading inside the freezer? Q2. If ever there is a way to measure also the temperature of the objects placed inside the freezer, how do you think will their temperature compare with each other and with the temperature reading from the thermometer? 4. Touch one object lightly with your finger and feel it. Q3. Did heat transfer take place between your finger and the object? If yes, how and in what direction did heat transfer between them? Q4. Did you feel the object cold? What made it so? (Relate this to your answer in Q3.) 5. Touch the rest of the objects inside the freezer using different fingers, then observe. Q5. Did the objects feel equally cold? What does this tell us about the amount of heat transferred when you touch each object? Q6. Which among the objects feels ‘coldest’? Which feels ‘warmest’? Q7. Which among the objects is the best conductor of heat? Which object is the poorest conductor of heat? Activity 2 demonstrates heat transfer by conduction, one of the methods by which heat is transferred. Conduction takes place between objects that are in contact with each other. The energy from the object of higher temperature is transferred to the other object through their particles that are close or in contact with each other. Then the particles receiving the energy will also transfer the energy to other places within the object through their neighboring particles. During this process, only the energy moves, not the matter itself. This can be observed in Activity 1. You have observed that the hot colored water stayed inside container B and did not mix with the 70 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 152
  • 77. water inside container 2. So this shows that only the energy transferred between the containers. Here is another example of heat transfer by conduction. Think of a metal spoon put in a bowl of a hot champorado that you were about to eat when you suddenly remembered that you had to do first a very important task. When you came back, you noticed that the handle of the spoon became really hot! How do you think this happened? The heat from the champorado is transferred to the part of the spoon that is in direct contact with the food by conduction. Then it is transferred to the cooler regions of the spoon through its particles. Why did you feel the spoon hot? When you touched the spoon, heat is also transferred to your hand by conduction. So your hand gained heat or thermal energy, and this makes you feel the object hot. Can you now explain why your hand that was previously dipped into hot water felt the lukewarm water cold while the other hand that was previously dipped into very cold water felt it hot? Heat Conductivities In the previous activity, you found out that some objects conduct heat faster than the others. This explains why we feel some objects colder or warmer than the others even if they are of the same temperature. Which usually feels warmer to our feet – the tiled floor or the rug? More accurate and thorough experiments had been carried out long before to determine the heat or thermal conductivity of every material. The approximate values of thermal conductivity for some common materials are shown below: Table 2: List of thermal conductivities of common materials Conductivity Conductivity Material Material W/(m·K) W/(m·K) Silver 429 Concrete 1.1 Copper 401 Water at 20°C 0.6 Gold 318 Rubber 0.16 Polypropylene Aluminum 237 0.25 plastic Ice 2 Wood 0.04 - 0.4 Glass, ordinary 1.7 Air at 0°C 0.025 Solids that conduct heat better are considered good conductors of heat while those which conduct heat poorly are generally called insulators. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 71 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 153
  • 78. Metals are mostly good conductors of heat. When we use a pot or pan to cook our food over a stove, we usually use a pot holder made of fabrics to grasp the metal handle. In the process, we are using an insulator to prevent our hand from being burned by the conductor, which is the metal pan or pot. Why are woven fabrics that are full of trapped air considered good insulators? Activity 3 Move me up You have previously learned that water is a poor conductor of heat, as shown in Table 2. But why is it that when you heat the bottom of the pan containing water, the entire water evenly gets hot quickly? Think of the answer to this question while performing this next activity. Objective In this activity, you should be able to observe and describe convection of heat through liquids. Materials Needed  2 transparent containers (drinking glass, beaker, bottle)  dropper  hot water  cold water  piece of cardboard Be careful not to bump the table or shake the container at any time during the experiment. Procedure 1. Fill one of the glass containers with tap water. 2. While waiting for the water to become still, mix in a separate container a few drops of food coloring with a small amount of very cold water. (You may also make the food coloring cold by placing the bottle inside the refrigerator for at least an hour before you perform the activity.) 3. Suck a few drops of cold food coloring using the dropper and slowly dip the end of the medicine dropper into the container with tap water, down 72 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 154
  • 79. to the bottom. See to it that the colored water does not come out of the dropper yet until its end reaches the bottom of the container. 4. Slowly press the dropper to release a small amount of the liquid at the bottom of the container. Then slowly remove the dropper from the container, making sure not to disturb the water. Observe for few minutes. Q1. Does the food coloring stay at the bottom of the container or does it mix with the liquid above it? 5. Fill the other container with hot water. 6. Place the cardboard over the top of the container with hot water. Then carefully place the container with tap water on top of it. The cardboard must support the container on top as shown in Figure 5. Q2. What happens to the food coloring after placing the container above the other Figure 5 container? Why does this happen? Q3. How is heat transfer taking place in the setup? Where is heat coming from and where is it going? Q4. Is there a transfer of matter, the food coloring, involved during the transfer of heat? Q5. You have just observed another method of heat transfer, called convection. In your own words, how does convection take place? How is this process different from conduction? Q6. Do you think convection only occurs when the source of heat is at the bottom of the container? What if the source of heat is near the top of the container? You may try it by interchanging the containers in your previous experiment. What you found out in this experiment is generally true with fluids, which include liquids and gases. In the next quarter, you will learn about convection of heat in air when you study about winds. So what happens in your experiment? When you placed the glass on top of another glass with hot water, heat transfer takes place from the hot water to the tap water including the colored water. This makes these liquids expand and become lighter and float atop the cooler water at the top of the container. This will then be replaced by the cooler water descending from above. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 73 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 155
  • 80. Activity 4 Keep it cold So far you have learned that heat can be transferred by conduction and convection. In each method, a material, either a solid or a liquid or gas, is required. But can heat also transfer even without the material? If we stay under the sun for a while, do we not feel warm? But how does the heat from this very distant object reach the surface of the earth? The transfer of energy from the sun across nearly empty space is made possible by radiation. Radiation takes place even in the absence of material. Do you know that all objects, even ordinary ones, give off heat into the surrounding by radiation? Yes, and that includes us! But why don't we feel it? We do not feel this radiation because we are normally surrounded by other objects of the same temperature. We can only feel it if we happen to stand between objects that have different temperature, for example, if we stand near a lighted bulb, a burning object, or stay under the Sun. All objects emit and absorb radiation although some objects are better at emitting or absorbing radiation than others. Try out this next activity for you to find out. In this activity, you will determine how different surfaces of the object affect its ability to absorb heat. Introduction One hot sunny day, Cobi and Mumble walked into a tea shop and each asked for an order of iced milk tea for takeout. The crew told them as part of their promo, their customers can choose the color of the tumbler they want to use, pointing to the array of containers made of the same material but are of different colors and textures. Cobi favored the container with a dull black surface, saying that the milk tea will stay cooler if it is placed in a black container. Mumble remarked that the tea would stay even cooler if it is in a container with bright shiny surface. Prediction 1. If you were in their situation, which container do you think will keep the iced milk tea cooler longer? Explain your choice. 2. Assuming an initial temperature of 5°C, predict the possible temperatures of the milk tea in each container after 5, 10, 15, and 20 minutes. Assume that the containers are covered. 74 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 156
  • 81. Temperature (°C) Cup 0 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min Dull black 5°C container Bright shiny 5°C container Task: Design a laboratory activity that will enable you to test your prediction. See to it that you will conduct a fair investigation. Start by answering the questions below:  What problem are you going to solve? (Testable Question) _____________________________________________________________________  What are you going to vary? (Independent variable) _____________________________________________________________________  What are you not going to vary? (Controlled Variables) _____________________________________________________________________  What are you going to measure? (Dependent variables) _____________________________________________________________________ 1. Write down your step by step procedure. Note that you may use the light from the sun or from the lighted bulb as your source of energy. 2. Collect your data according to your procedure. Present your data in tabulated form. 3. Analyze your data and answer the following questions: Q1. Which container warmed up faster? Q2. Which container absorbs heat faster? Q3. Which container will keep the milk tea cooler longer? Is your prediction correct? Q4. Will the same container also keep a hot coffee warmer longer that the other? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 75 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 157
  • 82. Activity 5 All at once So far, you have learned that heat can be transferred in various ways. You have also learned that different objects absorb, reflect, and transmit heat differently. In the next activities, you will not perform laboratory experiments anymore. All you have to do is to use your understanding so far of the basic concepts of heat transfer to accomplish the given tasks or answer the questions being asked. Task 1 Heat transfer is evident everywhere around us. Look at the illustration below. This illustration depicts several situations that involve heat transfer. Your task is to identify examples of situations found in the illustration that involve the different methods of heat transfer. Figure 6 1. Encircle three situations in the drawing that involve any method of heat transfer. Label them 1, 2, and 3. 2. Note that in your chosen situations, there could be more than one heat transfer taking place at the same time. Make your choices more specific by filling up Table 3. 76 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 158
  • 83. Table 3: Examples of heat transfer Which object Which object What is the method of Description gives off heat? receives heat? heat transfer? 1 2 3 Task 2 Below is a diagram showing the basic parts of the thermos bottle. Examine the parts and the different materials used. Explain how these help to keep the liquid inside either hot or cold for a longer period of time. Explain also how the methods of heat transfer are affected by each material. Stopper made of plastic or cork Silvered inner and outer glass wall Vacuum between inner and Hot outer wall liquid Outer casing made of plastic or metal Figure 7: Basic parts of Ceramic base a thermos bottle Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 77 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 159
  • 84. In the next module, you will learn about another form of energy which you also encounter in everyday life, electricity. Specifically, you will learn about the different types of charges and perform activities that will demonstrate how objects can be charged in different ways. You will also build simple electric circuits and discuss how energy is transferred and transformed in the circuit. Links and References Sootin, H. (1964). Experiments with heat. W.W. Norton and Company, Inc. Where is Heat coming from and where is it going? Retrieved March 10, 2012 from http://www.powersleuth.org/docs/EHM%20Lesson%204%20FT.pdf Conduction, Convection, Radiation: Investigating Heat Transfers. Retrieved March 10, 2012 from http://www.powersleuth.org/docs/EHM%20Lesson%205%20FT.pdf 78 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 160
  • 85. Suggested time allotment: 5 to 6 hours MODULE ELECTRICITY 6 In Module 5, you learned about heat as a form of energy that can be transferred through conduction, convection and radiation. You identified the conditions that are necessary for these processes to occur and performed activities that allowed you to investigate the different modes of heat transfer. Finally, you learned to distinguish between insulators and conductors of heat and were able to identify the uses of each. Now you will learn about another form of energy which you encounter in everyday life, electricity. You must be familiar with this energy since it is the energy required to operate appliances, gadgets, and machines, to name a few. Aside from these manmade devices, the ever-present nature of electricity is demonstrated by lightning and the motion of living organisms which is made possible by electrical signals sent between cells. However, in spite of the familiar existence of electricity, many people do not know that it actually originates from the motion of charges. In this module, you will learn about the different types of charges and perform activities that will demonstrate how objects can be charged in different ways. You will also learn the importance of grounding and the use of lightning rods. At the end of the module you will do an activity that will introduce you to simple electric circuits. The key questions that will be answered in this module are the following: What are the different types of charges? How can objects be charged? What is the purpose of grounding? How do lighting rods work? What constitutes a complete electrical circuit? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 79 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 161
  • 86. Activity 1 Charged interactions Objectives After performing this activity, you should be able to: 1. charge a material by friction; 2. observe the behavior of charged objects; 3. distinguish between the two types of charges; and 4. demonstrate how objects can be discharged. Materials Needed:  Strong adhesive tape (transparent)  Smooth wooden table  Meter stick  Piece of wood (~1 meter long) to hold tape strips  Moistened sponge Procedure: 1. Using a meter stick, pull off a 40- to 60- cm piece of adhesive tape and fold a short section of it (~1 cm) to make a nonsticky "handle" at that end of the tape. 2. Lay the tape adhesive side down and slide your finger along the tape to firmly attach it to a smooth, dry surface of a table. 3. Peel the tape from the surface vigorously pulling up on the handle you have made on one end. See figure below. Make sure that the tape does not curl up around itself or your fingers. Figure 1. How to peel the tape off the surface 4. While holding the tape up by the handle and away from other objects, attach the tape to the horizontal wooden piece or the edge of your table. 80 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 162
  • 87. Make sure that the sticky side does not come in contact with other objects. Figure 2. Attaching the tape to a holder 5. Bring your finger near, but not touching, the nonsticky side of the tape. Is there any sign of interaction between the tape and the finger? 6. Try this with another object. Is there any sign of interaction between the tape and this object? 7. Prepare another tape as described in steps 1 to 3. 8. Bring the nonsticky side of the two charged tapes you prepared near each other. Do you observe any interaction? 9. Drag a moistened sponge across the nonsticky side of the tapes and repeat steps 5, 6 and 8. Do you still observe any interaction? 10. Record your observations. Types of Charges You have learned in previous modules that all matter are made up of atoms or combinations of atoms called compounds. The varying atomic composition of different materials gives them different electrical properties. One of which is the ability of a material to lose or gain electrons when they come into contact with a different material through friction. In activity 1, when you pulled the tape vigorously from the table, some of the electrons from the table’s surface were transferred to the tape. This means that the table has lost some electrons so it has become positively charged while the tape has gained electrons which made it negatively charged. The process involved is usually referred to as charging up the material, and in this particular activity the process used is charging by friction. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 81 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 163
  • 88. It is important to remember that during the charging process, ideally, the amount of charge lost by the table is equal to the amount of charge gained by the tape. This is generally true in any charging process. The idea is known as: The Law of Conservation of Charge Charges cannot be created nor destroyed, but can be transferred from one material to another. The total charge in a system must remain constant. Electric Force When you brought your finger (and the other object) near the charged tape, you must have observed that the tape was drawn towards your finger as if being pulled by an invisible force. This force is called electric force which acts on charges. An uncharged or neutral object that has balanced positive and negative charges cannot experience this force. We learned from the previous section that the tape is negatively charged. The excess negative charge in the tape allowed it to interact with your finger and the other object. Recall also that when you placed the two charged tapes near each other they seem to push each other away. These observations tell us that there are two kinds of electric force which arises from the fact that there also two kinds of electrical charges. The interactions between the charges are summarized in the following law: Electrostatic Law Like charges repel and unlike charges attract. But your finger and the other object are neutral, so how did they interact with the charged tape? Generally, a charged object and an uncharged object tend to attract each other due to the phenomenon of electrostatic polarization which can be explained by the electrostatic law. When a neutral object is placed near a charged object, the charges within the neutral object are rearranged such that the charged object attracts the opposite charges within the neutral object. This phenomenon is illustrated in Figure 3. 82 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 164
  • 89. Figure 3. Polarization of a neutral object Discharging In Activity 1, after dragging a moistened sponge on the surface of the tape, you must have noticed that the previous interactions you observed has ceased to occur. What happened? The lack of interaction indicates that the electrical force is gone which can only happen when there are no more excess charges in the tape, that is, it has become neutral. The process of removing excess charges on an object is called discharging. When discharging is done by means of providing a path between the charged object and a ground, the process may be referred to as grounding. A ground can be any object that can serve as an “unlimited” source of electrons so that it will be capable of removing or transferring electrons from or to a charged object in order to neutralize that object. Grounding is necessary in electrical devices and equipment since it can prevent the build-up of excess charges where it is not needed. In the next activity, you will use the idea of grounding to discover another way of charging a material. Activity 2 To charge or not to charge Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to apply the phenomenon of polarization and grounding to charge a material by induction. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 83 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 165
  • 90. Materials Needed:  Styrofoam cup  soft drink can  balloon Procedure: 1. Mount the soft drink can on the Styrofoam cup as seen in Figure 4. Figure 4. Mounting of soft drink can 2. Charge the balloon by rubbing it off your hair or your classmate’s hair. Note: This will work only if the hair is completely dry. 3. Place the charged balloon as near as possible to the soft drink can without the two objects touching. Figure 5. Balloon placed near the can 4. Touch the can with your finger at the end opposite the balloon. 5. Remove your hand and observe how the balloon and the can will interact. Figure 6. Touching the can Q1. What do you think is the charge acquired by the balloon after rubbing it against your hair? Q2. In which part of the activity did polarization occur? Explain. Q3. What is the purpose of touching the can in step #4? Q4. Were you able to charge the soft drink can? Explain how this happened. Q5. Based on your answer in Q1, what do you think is the charge of the soft drink can? 84 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 166
  • 91. Conductors vs. Insulators The behavior of a charged material depends on its ability to allow charges to flow through it. A material that permits charges to flow freely within it, is a good electrical conductor. A good conducting material will allow charges to be distributed evenly on its surface. Metals are usually good conductors of electricity. In contrast to conductors, insulators are materials that hinder the free flow charges within it. If charge is transferred to an insulator, the excess charge will remain at the original location of charging. This means that charge is seldom distributed evenly across the surface of an insulator. Some examples of insulators are glass, porcelain, plastic and rubber. The observations you made had in Activity 2 depended on the fact that the balloon and the Styrofoam are good insulators while the soft drink can and you are good conductors. You have observed that the soft drink can has become charged after you touched one of its ends. The charging process used in this activity is called induction charging, where an object can be charged without actual contact to any other charged object. In the next activity you will investigate another method of charging which depends on the conductivity of the materials Activity 3 Pass the charge Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to charge a material by conduction. Materials Needed:  2 styrofoam cups  2 softdrink cans  balloon Procedure: 1. Repeat all steps of Activity 2. Figure 7. Putting the two set-ups 2. Let the charged can-cup set-up from into contact. Activity 2 touch a neutral can-cup set-up as shown in Figure 7. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 85 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 167
  • 92. 3. Separate the two set-ups then observe how the charged balloon interacts with the first and second set-up. Q1. Were you able to charge the can in the second set-up? Explain how this happened. Q2. Is it necessary for the two cans to come into contact for charging to happen? Why or why not? Q3. From your observation in step 3, infer the charge acquired by the can in the second set-up. The charging process you performed in Activity 3 is called charging by conduction which involves the contact of a charged object to a neutral object. Now that you have learned the three types of charging processes, we can discuss a natural phenomenon which is essentially a result of electrical charging. You will investigate this phenomenon in the following activity. Activity 4 When lightning strikes Objectives: After performing this activity, you should be able to: 1. explain how lightning occurs; 2. discuss ways of avoiding the dangers associated with lightning; and 3. explain how a lightning rod functions. Materials Needed:  access to reference books or to the Internet Procedure: 1. Learn amazing facts about lightning by researching the answers to the following questions:  What is a lightning?  Where does a lightning originate?  How ‘powerful’ is a lightning bolt?  Can lightning’s energy be caught stored, and used?  How many people are killed by lightning per year? 86Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 168
  • 93. What can you do to prevent yourself from being struck by lightning?  Some people have been hit by lightning many times. Why have they survived?  How many bushfires are started by lightning strikes?  ‘Lightning never strikes twice in the same place.’ Is this a myth or a fact?  What are lightning rods? How do they function? As introduced at the beginning of this module, electrical energy has numerous applications. However many of this applications will not be possible unless we know how to control electrical energy or electricity. How do we control electricity? It starts by providing a path through which charges can flow. This path is provided by an electric circuit. You will investigate the necessary conditions for an electric circuit to function in the following activity. Activity 5 Let there be light! Objectives: After performing this activity, you should be able to: 1. identify
the
appropriate arrangements
of
wire, bulb
and battery
which
successfully light a
bulb; and 2. describe the
two requirements for an
electric
circuit to function. Materials Needed:  3- or 1.5-volt battery  2-meter copper wires/ wires with alligator clips  pliers/ wire cutter  1.5- watt bulb/ LED Procedure: 1. Work with a partner and discover the appropriate arrangements of wires, a battery and a bulb
that will
make the bulb light. 2. Once you are successful
in the arrangement, draw a diagram representing your circuit. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 87 Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 169
  • 94. 3. Compare your output with other pairs that are successful in their arrangement. Q1. What difficulties did you encounter in performing this activity? Q2. How does your work compare with other pair’s work? Q3. What was necessary to make the bulb light? Energy Transfer in the Circuit In Activity 5, you have seen that with appropriate materials and connections, it is possible for the bulb to light. We know that light is one form of energy. Where did this energy come from? The law of conservation of energy tells us that energy can neither be created nor destroyed but can be transformed from one form to another. This tells us that the light energy observed in the bulb must have come from the electrical energy or electricity in the circuit. In fact, all electrical equipment and devices are based on this process of transformation of electrical energy into other forms of energy. Some examples are: 1. Flat iron – Electrical energy to thermal energy or heat 2. Electric fan – Electrical energy to mechanical energy 3. Washing machine – electrical energy to mechanical energy. Can you identify other examples? References “Instructor Materials: Electricity” by American Association of Physics Teachers © 2001. Retrieved June 11, 2012 from https://aapt.org/Publications/pips_samples/2_ELECTRICITY/INSTRUCTO R/099_e4.pdf http://www.physicsclassroom.com/class/estatics/U8L2a.cfm (Date accessed: June 11, 2012) http://museumvictoria.com.au/pages/7567/lightning-room-classroom- activities.pdf (Date accessed: June 12, 2012) http://hyperphysics.phy-astr.gsu.edu/hbase/hframe.html (Date accessed: June 12, 2012) 88 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Energy In Motion 170
  • 95. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 89
  • 96. 90 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 97. Suggested time allotment: 14 hours MODULE THE 1 PHILIPPINE ENVIRONMENT Overview Everything that we see around us makes up our environment. The landforms and bodies of water that make up the landscape, the mountains and valleys, rivers and seas; the climate, the rains brought by the monsoons, the warm, humid weather that we frequently experience; the natural resources that we make use of; every plant and animal that live around us. Truly, the environment is made up of a lot of things. All these things that we find in our surroundings and all the natural phenomena that we observe are not due to some random luck or accident. What makes up our environment is very much related to where our country is on the globe. Or, to say it in a different way, the characteristics of our environment are determined by the location of the Philippines on the planet. Latitude and Longitude Before we learn about the characteristics of our environment, let us first talk about the location of the Philippines. Where is the Philippines? The Philippines is on Earth, of course, but where exactly is it located? To answer this question, you have to learn a new skill: locating places using latitude and longitude. Activity 1 Where in the world is the Philippines? (Part I) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 175 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 91
  • 98. Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to describe the location of the Philippines using latitude and longitude. What to use globes What to do 1. Study the image of a globe on the right. Then get a real globe and identify the parts that are labelled in the image. Be ready to point them out when your teachers asks you. 2. After studying the globe and the image on the right, try to define “equator” in your own words. Give your own definition when your teacher asks you. Figure 1. What does the globe represent? 3. The “northern hemisphere” is that part of the world between the North Pole and the equator. Show the northern hemisphere on the globe when your teacher asks you. 4. Where is the “southern hemisphere”? Show the southern hemisphere on the globe when your teacher asks you. 5. Study the drawing on the right. It shows the lines of latitude. Q1. Describe the lines of latitude. Q2. Show the lines of latitude on the globe when your teacher asks you. Figure 2. What is the reference line when determining the latitude? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 176 92 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 99. Q3. The starting point for latitude is the equator. The equator is at latitude 0° (0 degree). At the North Pole, the latitude is 90°N (90 degrees north). At the South Pole, the latitude is 90°S (90 degrees south). Show the following latitudes when your teacher calls on you: 15°N; 60°N; 30°S; 45°S. Q4. The globe does not show all lines of latitude. If you wish to find 50°N, where should you look? 6. Study the drawing on the right. It shows the lines of longitude. Q5. Describe the lines of longitude. Q6. Show the lines of longitude on the globe when your teacher asks you. Q7. The starting point for longitude is the Prime Meridian. The Prime Meridian is at longitude 0°. Show the Prime Figure 3. What is the Meridian on the globe when your reference line when teacher asks you. determining the longitude? Q8. To the right of the Prime Meridian, the longitude is written this way: 15°E (15 degrees east), 30°E (30 degrees east), and so on. To the left of the Prime Meridian, the longitude is written as 15°W (15 degrees west), 30°W (30 degrees west), and so on. On your globe, find longitude 180°. What does this longitude represent? Q9. Not all lines of longitude are shown on a globe. If you want to find 20°W, where should you look? Q10. The location of a place may be described by using latitude and longitude. To the nearest degree, what is the latitude and longitude of Manila? Q11. Compared to the size of the world, Manila is just a tiny spot, and its location may be described using a pair of latitude and longitude. But how would you describe the location of an “area” such as the whole Philippines? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 177 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 93
  • 100. Now you know how to describe the location of a certain place using latitude and longitude. The lines of latitude are also known as parallels of latitude. That is because the lines of latitude are parallel to the equator and to each other. Five lines of latitude have special names. They are listed in the table below. The latitude values have been rounded off to the nearest half- degree. Latitude Name 0° Equator 23.5°N Tropic of Cancer 23.5°S Tropic of Capricorn 66.5°N Arctic Circle 66.5°S Antarctic Circle Get a globe and find the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn. Trace the two lines of latitude with a red chalk. The part of the world between the two chalk lines is called the tropics. Countries that are located in this zone experience a tropical climate where the annual average temperature is above 18°C. Now, find the Arctic Circle and the Antarctic Circle on the globe. Trace them with blue chalk. Between the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic Circle is the northern temperate zone; between the Tropic of Capricorn and the Antarctic Circle is the southern temperate zone. Countries in these zones go through four seasons – winter, spring summer, and autumn. Finally, the areas within the Arctic Circle and Antarctic Circle are called the polar regions or frigid zones. People who choose to live in these areas have to deal with temperatures that never go above 10°C. It is cold all year round and even during the summer months, it does not feel like summer at all. To sum up, the closer the latitude is to the equator, the warmer the climate. The closer it is to the poles, the colder. Thus, it is clear that there is a relationship between the latitude of a place and the climate it experiences, and you will find out why in the next module. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 178 94 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 101. Landmasses and Bodies of Water Using latitude and longitude is not the only way that you can describe the location of a certain area. Another way is by identifying the landmasses and bodies of water that are found in that area. So, what are the landmasses and bodies of water that surround the Philippines? Do the following activity and get to know the surrounding geography. Activity 2 Where in the world is the Philippines? (Part II) Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to describe the location of the Philippines with respect to the surrounding landmasses and bodies of water. What to use globe or world map What to do 1. Using a globe or a world map as reference, label the blank map below. 2. Your labelled map should include the following: A. Landmasses B. Bodies of water Philippine archipelago Philippine Sea Asian continent South China Sea Malay peninsula Indian Ocean Isthmus of Kra Pacific Ocean Indonesian archipelago Australian continent Q1. Which bodies of water in the list are found to the west of the Philippines? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 179 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 95
  • 102. Q2. Which body of water in the list is located to the east of the Philippines? Q3. Which large landmass is found to the north of the Philippines? 3. Be ready to show the map with your labels when your teachers asks you. Figure 4. Where is the Philippines in the map? Why is the Philippines called an archipelago? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 180 96 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 103. By now you can say that you really know where the Philippines is. You can now describe its location in two ways: by using latitude and longitude, and by identifying the landmasses and bodies of water that surround it. What then is the use of knowing where the Philippines is located? You will find out in the next section and also in the following module. Are We Lucky in the Philippines? Planet Earth is made up of different things - air, water, plants, animals, soil, rocks, minerals, crude oil, and other fossil fuels. These things are called natural resources because they are not made by people; rather they are gathered from nature. Sunlight and wind are also natural resources. We use all these things to survive or satisfy our needs. The Philippines is considered rich in natural resources. We have fertile, arable lands, high diversity of plant and animals, extensive coastlines, and rich mineral deposits. We have natural gas, coal, and geothermal energy. Wind and water are also harnessed for electricity generation. Photo: Courtesy of Cecile N. Sales Photo: Courtesy of Kit Stephen S. Agad http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:POTW_ MichelleELLA01.jpg Figure 5: What kind of natural resources are shown in the pictures? Do you have similar resources in your area? Why do we have rich natural resources? What geologic structures in the country account for these bounty? Is our location near the equator related to the presence of these natural resources? The next lessons will help you find answers to some questions about natural resources in the country namely, rocks and minerals, water, soil, varied life forms, and energy. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 181 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 97
  • 104. How does our latitude position affect the water, soil resources, and biodiversity in the country?  What mineral deposits do we have in the country? Where are they located and why only in those places?  Given our location, what energy resources are available?  Which of our practices in using natural resources are sustainable? Which are not sustainable?  How can we help conserve natural resources so that future generations can also enjoy them? Hopefully, the knowledge and skills acquired in the lessons will help you value your responsibility as a productive citizen so that you can help prevent protected and vulnerable places from being mined, forests from being overcut, and natural resources like metals from ending up in a dumpsite. Water Resources and Biodiversity The Philippines boasts of many different kinds of natural water forms, such as bays, rivers, lakes, falls, gulfs, straits, and swamps. Because it is made up of islands, the country's coastline (seashore) if laid end-to-end, would measure around 17.5 thousand kilometers. And you know how we are proud of our coastlines! The bodies of water and its surrounding environment not only support the survival of diverse organisms for food but are also used for other economic activities. All these you learned in Araling Panlipunan. In the previous activity you identified two big bodies of water on the west and east side of the country: the Pacific Ocean in the east and south China Sea in the west (sometimes referred to as the West Philippine Sea). These bodies of water are the origin of typhoons which on the average, according to Philippine Atmospheric, Geophysical and Astronomical Services Administration (PAGASA), is about 20 a year. Typhoons and the monsoons (amihan and habagat) bring lots of rain to the Philippines. What is your association with too much rainfall? For some, rain and typhoons result in flooding, landslides, and health related-problems. But water is one of nature’s gifts to us. People need fresh water for many purposes. We use water for domestic purposes, for irrigation, and for industries. We need water to generate electricity. We use water for recreation or its aesthetic value. Many resorts are located near springs, waterfalls or lakes. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 182 98 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 105. Where does water in your community come from? You collect them when the rain falls or get them from the river, deep well, or spring. But where does water from rivers, lakes, and springs originate? They come from a watershed – an area of land on a slope which drains its water into a stream and its tributaries (small streams that supply water to a main stream). This is the reason why a watershed is sometimes called a catchment area or drainage basin. It includes the surface of the land and the underground rock formation drained by the stream. From an aerial view, drainage patterns in a watershed resemble a network similar to the branching pattern of a tree. Tributaries, similar to twigs and small branches, flow into streams, the main branch of the tree. Streams eventually empty into a large river comparable to the trunk. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Maria1637jf.JPG Figure 6. The network of streams in a watershed area is illustrated on the left and a photo of a watershed area is on the right. How does the concept “water runs downhill” apply to a watershed? Watersheds come in all shapes and sizes. They cross towns and provinces. In other parts of the world, they may cross national boundaries. There are many watersheds in the Philippines basically because we have abundant rainfall. Do you know that Mt. Apo in Davao-Cotabato, Makiling- Banahaw in Laguna and Quezon, and Tiwi in Albay are watersheds? You must have heard about La Mesa Dam in Metro Manila, Pantabangan Dam in Pampanga, and Angat Dam in Bulacan. These watersheds are sources of water of many communities in the area. The Maria Cristina Falls in Iligan City is in a watershed; it is used to generate electricity. Locate these places in your map. Ask elders where the watershed is in or near your area? Observe it is used in your community. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 183 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 99
  • 106. But watersheds are not just about water. A single watershed may include combination of forest, grassland, marshes, and other habitats. Diverse organisms in the Philippines are found in these areas! Being a tropical country, the Philippines has abundant rainfall, many bodies of water, and lots of sunshine. The right temperature and abundant rainfall explain partly why our country is considered to be a mega-diverse country. This means that we have high diversity of plants and animals, both on land and in water (Philippine Clearing House Mechanism Website, 2012). Reports show that in many islands of the Philippine archipelago, there is a high number of endemic plants and animals (endemic means found only in the Philippines). The country hosts more than 52,177 described species of which more than half is found nowhere else in the world. They say that on a per unit area basis, the Philippines shelters more diversity of life than any other country on the planet. For now remember that the main function of a watershed is the production of a continuous water supply that would maintain the lifeforms within it and in the area fed by its stream. Later you will learn that besides supporting the survival of varied life forms, abundant water in the country is important in moderating temperature. This topic will be discussed later. Have you ever asked yourself the following questions? If we have abundant rainfall to feed watersheds, why do we experience drought some parts of the year? What factors affect the health of a watershed? Is there a way of regulating the flow of water in watershed so that there will be enough for all throughout the year? What can people do to keep watersheds ‘healthy’? Find out about these in the next activity. Activity 3 What are some factors that will affect the amount of water in watersheds? Objective You will design a procedure to show how a certain factor affects the amount of water that can be stored underground or released by a watershed to rivers, lakes and other bodies of water. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 184 100 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 107. What to do 1. In your group, choose one factor that you want to investigate. a. Vegetation cover b. Slope of the area c. Kind of soil d. Amount of rainfall 2. Identify the variables that you need to control and the variable that you will change. 3. Design a procedure to determine the effect of the factor you chose on watersheds. 4. Be ready to present your design in the class and to defend why you designed it that way. Soil Resources, Rainfall and Temperature Recall in elementary school science that soil is formed when rocks and other materials near the Earth’s surface are broken down by a number of processes collectively called weathering. You learned two types of weathering: the mechanical breaking of rocks or physical weathering, and the chemical decay of rocks or chemical weathering. Let us review what happens to a piece of rock when left under the Sun and rain for a long time. Do the next activity. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 185 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 101
  • 108. Activity 4 How are soils formed from rocks? Objectives 1. Using the information in the table, trace the formation of soil from rocks. 2. Identify the factors acting together on rocks to form soil. What to use Drawing pens What to do 1. Processes involved in soil formation are listed in the table below. Read the descriptions of the processes and make your own illustrations of the different processes. Draw in the designated spaces. 2. Use the descriptions and your drawings to answer the following questions. Q1. What are the factors that act together on rocks to form soil? Q2. What does the following sentence mean, “Soils were once rocks”? Processes of soil formation Illustrations of processes When a piece of rock is exposed to the Sun, Drawing A its outer part expands (becomes bigger) because it heats up faster than the inner part (Drawing A). On cooling, at night time, the outer part of Drawing B the rock contracts or shrinks because the outer part of the rock cools faster than the inner portion (Drawing B). The process of expansion and contraction are repeated over the years and produce cracks in the rock causing the outer surface to break off. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 186 102 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 109. Processes of soil formation Illustrations of processes Once broken, water enters the cracks causing Drawing C some minerals to dissolve. The rock breaks apart further. (Drawing C). Air also enters the cracks, and oxygen in the Drawing D air combines with some elements such as iron to produce iron oxide (rust or kalawang) which is brittle and will easily peel off. In a similar way, carbon dioxide from the air reacts with water to form an acid causing the rock to soften further. Once soft and broken, bacteria and small plants start to grow in the cracks of the rock (Drawing D). After some time, the dead plants and animals die and decay causing the formation of more acidic substances which further breaks the rocks. The dead bodies of plants and animals are acted upon by microorganism and breakdown into smaller compounds while the minerals from the rock return to the soil. Soil covers the entire Earth. Temperature, rainfall, chemical changes, and biological action act together to continuously form soil. Climate, expressed as both temperature and rainfall effects, is often considered the most powerful soil-forming factor. Temperature controls how fast chemical reactions occur. Many reactions proceed more quickly as temperature increases. Warm-region soils are normally more developed or more mature than cold-region soils. Mature soils have more silt and clay on or near the surface. Thus, soils in the tropical areas are observed to sustain various farming activities and account for why the primary source of livelihood in the Philippines and other countries in the Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 187 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 103
  • 110. tropical region is their fertile land. What is the effect of very little rainfall on food production? Climate (temperature and rainfall) is a significant factor not only in soil formation but also in sustaining diversity of plants and animals in the country. On the other hand, water also directly affects the movement of soluble soil nutrients from the top soil to deep under the ground (leaching). These nutrients may no longer be available to shallow rooted plants. Acidic rainwater may also contribute to the loss of minerals in soil resulting in low yield. So rainfall determines the kind of vegetation in an area. In turn, the degree of vegetation cover, especially in sloping areas, determines how much soil is removed. Are there ways to protect soil resources? Rocks and Mineral Resources History tells us that rocks have been used by humans for more than two million years. Our ancestors lived in caves; they carved rocks and stones to make tools for hunting animals, cultivating crops, or weapons for protection. Rocks, stones, gravel, and sand were and are still used to make roads, buildings, monuments, and art objects. http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:DirkvdM_rocks.jpg http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Pana_Banaue_Rice_Terraces.jpg Figure 7. What are the features of the Figure 8. What kind of tools do you think rocks? What environmental factors were used to build the Rice Terraces? may have caused such features? Why are terraces useful? The mining of rocks for their metal content has been considered one of the most important factors of human progress. The mining industry has raised levels of economy in some regions, in part because of the kind of metals available from the rocks in those areas. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 188 104 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 111. Activity 5 Where are the minerals deposits in the Philippines? Mineral deposits can be classified into two types: metallic and non- metalllic. You have already learned the symbols of some metals and nonmetals. Review them before you do the activity. Objectives After performing this activity, you will be able to 1. locate the metallic mineral deposits across the country; 2. find out what geologic features are common in areas where the deposits are found; 3. give a possible reason/s for the association between metallic mineral deposits and geologic features in the country; and 4. infer why your area or region is rich or not rich in metallic mineral deposits. What to use Figure 9: Metallic Deposits Map of the Philippines Figure 10: Map of Trenches and Faults in the Philippines Figure 11: Map of Volcanoes in the Philippines 2 pieces of plastic sheet used for book cover, same size as a book page Marking pens (two colors, if possible) What to do Part I 1. Familiarize yourself with the physical map of the Philippines. Identify specific places of interest to you in the different regions. 2. In your notebook, make a four-column table with headings similar to Table 1. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 189 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 105
  • 112. Table 1: Metallic Minerals in the Philippines and Their Location Metal, in Metal, in Province/Region Geologic Structure Symbols Words Where the Metals are Near the Location (Example: Found of the Metallic Au) Deposits (1) (2) (3) (4) 3. As a group, study the Metallic Deposits Map of the Philippines. See Figure 9. In the map you will see symbols of metals. Fill in the information needed in Columns 1 and 2 of your own table. 4. Check with each other if you have correctly written the correct words for the symbol of the metals. Add as many rows as there are kinds of metals in the map. 5. Analyze the data in Table 1. Q1. Identify five metals which are most abundant across the country. Put a number on this metal (1 for most abundant, 2 next abundant, and so on). Q2. Record in Column 3 where the five most abundant metals are located. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 190 106 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 113. Figure 9. Metallic Deposits in the Philippines Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 191 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 107
  • 114. Figure 10. Trenches and Faults in the Philippines Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 192 108 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 115. Figure 11. Volcanoes in the Philippines Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 193 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 109
  • 116. Part II 1. Get two plastic sheets. On one sheet, trace the outlines of the trenches and faults from Figure 10. On the other sheet, trace the location of volcanoes from Figure 11. 2. Place the Trench and Fault plastic sheet over the Metallic Deposits map. 3. Place the Volcanoes plastic sheet over the two maps. Q3. What geologic structures are found near the location of the metallic deposits? Write trenches, faults or volcanoes in column 4 of Table 1. Q4. Write a statement to connect the presence of metallic deposits with trenches or volcanic areas. Q5. Why do you think are metallic deposits abundant in places where there are trenches or volcanoes? 4. Look for your province in the map. Q6. Are there metallic deposits in your area? Q7. What could be reason for the presence or absence of metallic deposits in your area? You can download the detailed map of Trenches, Faults and volcanoes in the Philippines from the website of Phivolcs. Q8. If there are metallic deposits, what activities tell you that there are indeed deposits in or near your area/province? The important metallic minerals found in various parts of the Philippines include gold, copper, iron, chromite (made up of chromium, iron, and other metals), nickel, cobalt, and platinum. The most productive copper and gold producers in the Philippines are found in Baguio, the province of Benguet, and in Surigao-Davao areas. Major producers of nickel are in Palawan and Surigao (DENR Website, 2012). Metals are important. The properties of metals make them useful for specific purposes. You learned these in Quarter 1. Iron is the main material for steel bars used in buildings and road construction. Copper is used in making electrical wires. Tin is the material for milk cans and other preserved food products. Nickel is mixed with copper or other metals to form stainless cooking wares. Gold is important in making jewelry. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 194 110 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 117. What other metals are you familiar with? What are the uses of aluminum? What metal is used to make GI sheets for roofing? What metals are used to make artificial arms or legs? Are metals used in chairs and other furniture? Do you know that some dentists use gold for filling teeth cavities? Look around and find how versatile metals are. The Philippines has also varied nonmetallic resources including sand and gravel, limestone, marble, clay, and other quarry materials. Your teacher will show you a map of the nometallic deposits in the Philippines. Locate your area and determine what nonmetallic deposits are found there. How are these deposits recovered? How are they used in your community? For example: What are the uses of sand, gravel, or clay? How are marble stones used? Think of other nonmetals and their uses! Copper –iron ore Iron filings Quartz Copper ore Figure 12. From the drawing, what are ores? Have you noticed that a piece of ore can have more than one kind of mineral in it? Do you know that the Philippines is listed as the 5th mineral country in the world, 3rd in gold reserves, 4th in copper, and 5th in nickel! The ores (mineral-bearing rocks) are processed out of the country to recover the pure metal. We buy the pure metal. Is this practice advantageous to the Philippines? Why or why not? The richness of the Philippines in terms of mineral resources is being attributed to its location in the so- called Pacific Ring of Fire. See Figure 13. This area is associated with over 450 volcanoes (small triangles in the map) and is home to approximately 75% of the world's active volcanoes. Why are there minerals where there Figure 13. Besides the Philippines, what are volcanoes? other countries are in the Ring of Fire? Do you think they are also rich in mineral resources? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 195 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 111
  • 118. Geologists (scientists who study the Earth and the processes that occur in and on it) explain that there is a continuous source of heat deep under the Earth; this melts rocks and other materials (link to usgs website) The mixture of molten or semi-molten materials is called magma. Because magma is hotter and lighter than the surrounding rocks, it rises, melting some of the rocks it passes on the way. If the magma finds a way to the surface, it will erupt as lava. Lava flow is observed in erupting volcanoes. But the rising magma does not always reach the surface to erupt. Instead, it may slowly cool and harden beneath the volcano and form different kinds of igneous rocks. Under favourable temperature and pressure conditions, the metal-containing rocks continuously melt and redeposit, eventually forming rich-mineral veins. Though originally scattered in very small amounts in magma, the metals are concentrated when magma convectively moves and circulates ore-bearing liquids and gases. This is the reason why metallic minerals deposits such as copper, gold, silver, lead, and zinc are associated with magmas found deep within the roots of extinct volcanoes. And as you saw in the maps, volcanoes are always near trenches and faults! You will learn more of this later. For now you must have realized that the presence of mineral deposits in the Philippines is not by accident. It is nature’s gift. If before, your association with volcanoes and trenches is danger and risk to life and property, now you know that the presence of volcanoes, trenches and other geological structures is the reason for the rich mineral deposits in the country. The existence of volcanoes also explains why the Philippines is rich in geothermal energy (heat from the Earth). Energy resources will be discussed in the next section. Energy Resources The abundance of some metal resources in the Philippines is related to geologic structures, specifically the presence of volcanoes and trenches in the country. The year-round warm temperature and availability of water are effects of our geographic location. The tropical climate and the geological conditions also provide several possibilities to get clean and cheap energy. Do you know which energy Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 196 112 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 119. resources are due to these factors? Were the following included in your list- solar energy, heat from the ground (geothermal energy), hydrothermal energy from falling water), wind energy, and natural gas? Solar energy is free and inexhaustible. This energy source will be discussed in a later science subject. Geothermal energy was briefly introduced in the lesson on mineral resources and their location. The Philippines ranked second to the United States in terms of geothermal energy deposits. Geothermal power plants are located in Banahaw-Makiling, Laguna, Tiwi in Albay, http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Hot_Spring.jpg Bacman in Sorsogon, Palimpinon in Negros Figure 14. Do you know that heat Occidental, Tongonan in Leyte, and Mt. Apo from the Earth may escape as side of Cotabato. steam in a hot spring? Try to locate places with geothermal power plants in your map? Does your area have geothermal energy deposits? How do you know? Hydrothermal or hydroelectric power plants use water to generate electricity. They provide for 27% of total electricity production in the country. Ambuklao in Benguet, Mt Province, Agus in Lanao del Sur and Agus in Lanao del Norte are large hydrothermal power plants. Small hydroelectric power plants are in Caliraya, Laguna, Magat in Isabela, Photograph courtesy of National Power Corporation, retrieved Loboc in Bohol, and other places. Used from http://www.industcards.com/hydro-philippines.htm water from hydropower plants flows Figure 15. How is water used to through irrigation systems. Many of the generate electricity? reservoir areas are used for sport activities. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 197 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 113
  • 120. Again, locate places with hydroelectric power plants in your map? Does your area have hydroelectric power plants? What other uses do you have for water in these areas? Natural gas is a form of fossil fuel, so are coal and crude oil (sometimes called petroleum). Fossil fuels were formed from plants and animals that lived on Earth millions of years ago. They are buried deep in the Earth. Natural gas and oil are taken from the deep through oil rigs while coal is extracted through mining. Fossil fuels are used to produce electricity and run vehicles and factory machines. Did you know that petroleum is the raw material for making plastics? In the Philippines, we have coal and natural gas deposits. Coal is a black or brownish black, solid rock that can be burned. It contains about 40% non-combustible components, thus a source of air pollution when used as fuel. Coal deposits are scattered over the Philippines but the largest deposit is located in Semirara Figure 16. The black bands in the picture are coal deposits. Coal is not like the Island, Antique. Coal mines are also charcoal you use for broiling fish or located in Cebu, Zamboanga barbecue. What do you think is the Sibuguey, Albay, Surigao, and difference? Negros Provinces. Our natural gas deposits are found offshore of Palawan. Do you know where this place is? The Malampaya Deepwater Gas-to-Power Project employs ‘state-of-the-art deepwater technology’ to draw natural gas from deep beneath Philippine waters. The gas fuels three natural gas-fired power stations to provide 40-45% of Luzon's power generation requirements. The Department of Energy reports that since October 2001, the Philippines has been importing less petroleum for electricity generation, providing the country foreign- exchange savings and energy security from this clean fuel. Natural gas is considered clean fuel because when burned, it produces the least carbon dioxide, among fossil fuels. CO2 is naturally present in air in small amounts. However, studies show that increase in carbon dioxide in the atmosphere results in increase in atmospheric temperature, globally. You will learn about global warming in the next module. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 198 114 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 121. Did you know that in Ilocos Province, giant wind mills as shown in Figure 5 of this module are used to generate electricity. In Quirino, Ilocos Sur the electricity generated from wind mills runs a motorized sugarcane press for the community's muscovado sugar production? This project is a joint effort between the local farmers and local organizations with support from Japan. In Bangui, Ilocos Norte, the windmills as high as 50 meters not only help improve the tourism in Ilocos but it also provides 40% of the energy requirements for electricity in the entire province. This proves that we do not have to be dependent on fossil fuel in our country. What do you think are the environmental conditions in Ilocos Sur and Ilocos Norte that allow them to use wind power for electricity? Do you think there are places that have these conditions? Support your answers. Conserving and Protecting Natural Resources There are two types of natural resources on Earth - renewable and nonrenewable. What is the difference between these two kinds of resources? The food people eat comes from plants and animals. Plants are replaced by new ones after each harvest. People also eat animals. Animals have the capacity to reproduce and are replaced when young animals are born. Water in a river or in a well may dry up. But when the rain comes the water is replaced. Plants, animals, and water are resources that can be replaced. They are renewable resources. Most plants grow in top soil. Rain and floods wash away top soil. Can top soil be replaced easily? Soil comes from rocks and materials from dead plants and animals. It takes thousands of years for soil to form. Soil cannot be replaced easily, or it takes a very long time to replace. It is a nonrenewable resource. Metals like copper, iron, and aluminum are abundant on Earth. But people are using them up fast. They have to dig deeper into the ground to get what they need. Coal, oil and natural gas (fossil fuels) were formed from plants and animals that lived on Earth millions of years ago. It takes millions of years for dead plants and animals to turn into fossil fuels. Soil, coal, oil and natural gas are nonrenewable resources. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 199 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 115
  • 122. Before you do Activity 6, think of these sentences: “Too much is taken from Earth!" and "Too much is put into Earth." You may write up a short essay about your understanding of the sentences. Activity 6 How do people destroy natural resources? Objectives 1. Identify the effects of some human activities on natural resources. 2. Suggest ways to reduce the effects. What to Do 1. Study Table 2 and tell if you have observed the activities listed in your locality. Table 2. Ways People Destroy Natural Resources Activities Effects on Natural Resources (1) (2) When roads are built, mountains are Damage natural habitats and/or kill blown off using dynamite. plants and animals. Rice fields are turned into residential or commercial centers. People cut too many trees for lumber or paper or building houses. More factories are being built to keep up with the demands of a fast growing population and industrialization. Too much mining and quarrying for the purpose of getting precious metals and stones and gravel. Some farmers use too much chemical Too much fertilizer destroys the quality of fertilizers to replenish soil fertility. the soil and is harmful to both human and animals. Plastics and other garbage are burned. Cars, trucks, and tricycles that emit dark smoke (smoke belchers) are allowed to travel. Other activities Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 200 116 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 123. 2. Discuss the effects of these activities on natural resources. 3. Write the effects on the column opposite the activities. An activity may have more than one effect. Some of the effects have already been listed in the table. 4. Do you know of other activities that destroy or cause the depletion of natural resources? Add them to the list and fill the corresponding effect in column 2. 5. What can you do to conserve resources? Protecting Resources in Your Own Way All resources used by humans, including fuels, metals, and building materials, come from the Earth. Many of these resources are not in endless supply. It has taken many thousands and millions of years to develop and accumulate these resources. To conserve natural resources is to protect or use them wisely without wasting them or using them up completely. Conserving natural resources can make them last and be available for future generations. This is what sustainability of natural resources means. Each one of us should think about how to make things sustainable. Remember: The lives of future generations depend on how we use natural resources today. Activity 7 Are you ready for “Make-a-Difference” Day? This activity involves you in hands-on activities that help you learn more about reducing waste, reusing materials instead of throwing them away, recycling, composting, and conserving natural resources and energy. There are many activities that you can include: conducting a "waste-free lunch" or building art materials out of cans, bottles, and other recyclable trash. Depending on the location and nature of your school, you might want to include river cleanup, trail maintenance, or tree planting. Or, you can mix these activities with a poster making contest for use in the campaign on non- use of plastic bags for shopping and/or marketing. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 201 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 117
  • 124. What to do 1. In your group, make a list of what is done in your school that help conserve natural resources. Discuss your list before finalizing the report. 2. Make another list of what is done in your school that do not help conserve natural resources. For example, do you still have lots of things in the trash can or on the ground? What are they? What is being done with them? 3. Come up with a one-day plan on what else can be done in school to conserve natural resources. Present your plan to the class. 4. Based on the group presentation, decide which part in the plans will be adopted or adapted to make a class plan. The plan should consider the following:  Easy to follow  Who will be responsible for making the plan happen  What should be done if the people responsible for making the plan happen will not or cannot do it  What natural resources will be conserved  Schedule of activities to include monitoring  Why you think this plan is the best idea 5. With your teacher’s permission, make an appointment with your principal to present your plan and to solicit support. Maybe she might recommend the “Make-a-Difference” Day for the whole school! Hopefully, the “Make-a-Difference” Day will engage you in a variety of environmental activities that help foster not only an appreciation for the environment and the resources it provides but also develop a life-long environmental stewardship among your age group. Links and Other Reading Materials gdis.denr.gov.ph (Geohazard Map) http://www.phivolcs.dost.gov.ph http://www.jcmiras.net/surge/p124.htm (Geothermal power plants in the Philippines) http://www.industcards.com/hydro-philippines.htm (Hydroelectric power plants in the Philippines) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 202 118 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 125. Suggested time allotment: 12 hours MODULE SOLAR ENERGY AND THE 2 ATMOSPHERE In the previous module, you learned that the presence of different natural resources in the Philippines is related to the country’s location. It was also mentioned that the climate in a certain area depends on its latitude. In this module, you are going to learn more about how the location of the Philippines influences its climate and weather. To prepare you for this lesson, you must first learn about the envelope of air that surrounds the Earth where all weather events happen – the atmosphere. Activity 1 What is the basis for dividing Earth’s atmosphere into layers? Earth’s atmosphere is divided into five layers. What is the basis for subdividing the atmosphere? Objectives You will be able to gather information about Earth’s atmosphere based on a graph. Specifically, you will: 1. describe the features of each of the five layers; 2. compare the features of the five layers; and 3. explain the basis for the division of the Figure 1. What are the layers of the layers of the atmosphere. atmosphere? Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 203 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 119
  • 126. What to use  Graph in Figure 1  A ruler, if available What to do 1. Study the graph. Q1. What are the five layers? Estimate the height of each layer. Q2. Describe the graph for each layer. Q3. In which layer is temperature increasing with increasing altitude? Q4. In which layer is temperature decreasing with increasing altitude? Q5. What is the relationship between temperature and height in the - troposphere? - stratosphere? - mesosphere? - thermosphere? - exosphere? Q6. Observe the whole graph. What is the basis for the division of Earth’s atmosphere? Q7. From the graph, can you generalize that the higher the layer of the atmosphere (that is closer to the Sun), the hotter the temperature? Why or why not? Q8. What other information about Earth’s atmosphere can you derive from the graph? 2. Read the succeeding paragraphs and think of a way to organize and summarize the data about the atmosphere from the graph and the information in the discussion that follows. The troposphere is the layer closest to Earth’s surface. The temperature just above the ground is hotter than the temperature high above. Weather occurs in the troposphere because this layer contains most of the water vapor. Remember the water cycle? Without water, there would be no clouds, rain, snow or other weather features. Air in the troposphere is constantly moving. As a result, aircraft flying through the troposphere may have a very bumpy ride – what we know as turbulence. People who have used the airplane for travelling have experienced this especially when there is a typhoon in areas where the plane passes through. 120 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 204
  • 127. The stratosphere is the layer of air that extends to about 50 km from Earth’s surface. Many jet aircraft fly in the stratosphere because it is very stable. It is in the stratosphere that we find the ozone layer. The ozone layer absorbs much of the Sun’s harmful radiation that would otherwise be dangerous to plant and animal life. The layer between 50 km and 80 km above the Earth’s surface is called the mesosphere. Air in this layer is very thin and cold. Meteors or rock fragments burn up in the mesosphere. The thermosphere is between 80 km and 110 km above the Earth. Space shuttles fly in this area and it is also where the auroras are found. Auroras are caused when the solar wind strikes gases in the atmosphere above the Poles. Why can we not see auroras in the Philippines? The upper limit of our atmosphere is the exosphere. This layer of the atmosphere merges into space. Satellites are stationed in this area, 500 km to 1000 km from Earth. To summarize what has been discussed: More than three quarters of Earth’s atmosphere is made up of nitrogen while one fifth is oxygen. The remaining 1% is a mixture of carbon dioxide, water vapour, and ozone. These gases not only produce important weather features such as cloud and rain, but also have considerable influence on the overall climate of the Earth, through the greenhouse effect and global warming. What is the Greenhouse Effect? In order to understand the greenhouse effect, you need to first understand how a real greenhouse works. In temperate countries, a greenhouse is used to grow seedlings in the late winter and early spring and later, planted in the open field when the weather is warmer. Greenhouses also protect plants from weather phenomena such snowstorm or dust storms. In tropical countries, greenhouses are used by commercial plant growers to protect flowering and ornamental plants from harsh weather conditions and insect attack. Greenhouses range in size from small sheds to very large buildings. They also vary in terms of types of covering materials. Some are made of glass while others are made of plastic. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 121 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 205
  • 128. http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Gartengew%C3%A4chshaus.JPG Figure 2. Different sizes of greenhouses. How does a greenhouse work? Activity 2 Does a greenhouse retain or release heat? Objectives The activity will enable you to 1. construct a model greenhouse. 2. find out if your model greenhouse retains heat 3. relate the concept of greenhouse to the increasing temperature of Earth’s atmosphere. What to use  2-liter plastic soft drink bottle  2-plastic containers to serve as base of the bottles  knife or scissors  transparent tape Be careful when  two alcohol thermometers handling sharp CAUTION  one reading lamp (if objects like knife or available), otherwise bring scissors and the setups under the Sun breakable equipment like thermometer. What to do Constructing the model greenhouse For each model greenhouse you will need a two-liter plastic soft drink container (with cap) and a shallow plastic container for the base. 122 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 206
  • 129. 1. Remove the label of the soft drink bottle but keep the cap attached. 2. Cut off carefully, the end of the bottle approximately 5-6 cm from the bottom. Dispose of the bottom piece. 3. Place the bottle with cap in the plastic base. This is your model greenhouse. Label it Bottle A. 4. Use scissors or knife to cut several elongated openings or vents (1.5 x 5.0 cm) on the sides of Bottle B. Leave Bottle A intact. 5. Tape a thermometer onto a piece of cardboard. Make sure that the cardboard is longer than the thermometer so that the bulb will not touch the plastic base. Make two thermometer setups, one for Bottle A and another for Bottle B. Place one thermometer setup in each bottle. Figure 3. How to construct a model greenhouse 6. Place both bottles approximately 10 cm away NOTE: from the lamp. DO NOT turn on the lamp yet. If you have no lamp, Q1. Predict which bottle will get hotter when bring the setups you turn on the light or when they are outside the classroom exposed to the Sun. How will you know under the Sun where that one bottle is hotter than the other? they will not be disturbed. Q2. Write down your prediction and the reason why you predicted that way. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 123 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 207
  • 130. 7. Turn on the light and begin collecting data every five minutes for 25 minutes. (Note: But if you have no lamp, place the setups under the Sun. Read the temperature every 20 minutes for over two hours.) 8. Record the temperature readings of Bottle A and Bottle B in your notebook. 9. Graph your data separately for Bottles A and B. Q3. What variable did you put in the x-axis? In the y-axis? Q4. Why did you put these data in the x and y axes, respectively? Q5. Describe the graph resulting from observations in Bottle A. Q6. Describe the graph resulting from observations in Bottle B. Q7. Explain the similarities in the graphs of Bottles A and B. Q8. Explain the differences in the graphs of Bottles A and B. Q9. Does this activity help you answer the question in the activity title: Do greenhouses retain heat? What is the evidence? Greenhouses allow sunlight to enter but prevent heat from escaping. The transparent covering of the greenhouse allows visible light to enter without obstruction. It warms the inside of the greenhouse as energy is absorbed by the plants, soil, and other things inside the building. Air warmed by the heat inside is retained in the building by the roof and wall. The transparent covering also prevents the heat from leaving by reflecting the energy back into the walls and preventing outside winds from carrying it away. The Earth’s atmosphere is compared to a greenhouse. You know that besides nitrogen and oxygen, Earth’s atmosphere contains trace gases such as carbon dioxide, water vapor, methane, and ozone. Like the glass in a greenhouse, the trace gases have a similar effect on the Sun’s rays. They allow sunlight to pass through, resulting in the warming up of the Earth’s surface. But they absorb the energy coming from the Earth’s surface, keeping the Earth’s temperature suitable for life on Earth. The process by which the Earth’s atmosphere warms up is called ‘greenhouse effect,’ and the trace gases are referred to as ‘greenhouse gases.’ 124 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 208
  • 131. https://sites.google.com/site/glowar88/all-about-global-warming/1-what-is-global-warming Figure 4. Why are greenhouse gases like the glass in the greenhouse? The ‘greenhouse effect’ is a natural process and it warms the Earth. Without the greenhouse effect, Earth would be very cold, too cold for living things, such as plants and animals. To further understand the effect of greenhouse gases look at Figure 5. It contains some data about Venus and Earth, planets that are almost of the same size and if you remember from elementary school science, are near each other, so they are called twin planets. The composition of atmosphere and the average surface temperature of the two planets are also given. Why is the Figure 5. What gas is present in the average temperature of Venus very atmosphere of Venus that explains its much higher than that of Earth? high surface temperature? What could have caused this phenomenon? Both Earth and Venus have carbon dioxide, a greenhouse gas, in their atmospheres. The small amount of carbon dioxide on Earth’s gives the right temperature for living things to survive. With the high surface temperature Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 125 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 209
  • 132. of Venus due to its high carbon dioxide concentration, do you think life forms like those we know of could exist there? Why or why not? Is Earth Getting Warmer? What is the Evidence? Studies have shown that before 1750 (called the pre-industrialization years), carbon dioxide concentration was about 0.028 percent or 280 parts per million (ppm) by volume. The graph below shows the concentration of carbon dioxide from 1958 to 2003. What information can you derive from the graph? Recent studies report that in 2000-2009, carbon dioxide rose by 2.0 ppm per year. In 2011, the level is higher than at any time during the last 800 thousand years. Local temperatures fluctuate naturally, over the past 50 years but the average global temperature has increased at the fastest rate in recorded http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Mauna_Loa_Carbon_Dioxi history. de-en.svg#file Figure 6. Carbon dioxide measurements in Mauna Loa Observatory, Hawaii So what if there is increasing emission of greenhouse gases like carbon dioxide into the atmosphere? What is the problem with a small increase in carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere? More carbon dioxide means that more heat is trapped in Earth’s atmosphere. More heat cannot return back into space. More heat trapped by the carbon dioxide means a warmer Earth. The increasing temperature phenomenon is known as ‘global warming’. Global means that all countries and people around the world are affected even if that country is not a major contributor of greenhouse gases. Many scientists now agree that many human activities emit more greenhouses gases into the atmosphere, making the natural greenhouse effect stronger. Scientists are also saying that if we carry on polluting the atmosphere with greenhouse gases, it will have a dangerous effect on the Earth. 126 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 210
  • 133. Sources of Greenhouse Gases Carbon dioxide is naturally produced when people and animals breathe. Plants and trees take in and use carbon dioxide to produce their own food. Volcanoes also produce carbon dioxide. Methane comes from grazing animals as they digest their food and from decaying matter in wet rice fields. Ozone is also naturally present in the stratosphere. But human activities emit a lot of greenhouse gases into the atmosphere. Study Figure 7. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:Global_Carbon_Emission_by_Type .png Figure 7. Does burning of fossil fuels raise the carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere? Which fossil fuel has the highest contribution to carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere? What human activities use this fuel? List at least three. Recall Module 1. What kind of fossil fuels are used in the Philippines? Are we also contributing to the increase in carbon dioxide concentration in the atmosphere? Why or why not? Carbon dioxide comes from the burning of fossil fuel such as coal, crude oil and natural gas. Cutting down and burning of trees releases carbon dioxide. Methane can also be released from buried waste. For example, the left-over food, garden wastes, and animal wastes collected from our homes are thrown into dumpsites. When lots of wastes are compressed Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 127 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 211
  • 134. and packed together, they produce methane. Coal mining also produces methane. Another group of greenhouse gases includes the chlorofluorocarbons or CFCs for short. CFCs have been used in spray cans as propellants, in refrigerators as refrigerants, and in making foam plastics as foaming agents. They become dangerous when released into the atmosphere, depleting the ozone layer. For this reason, their use has been banned around the world. What have you learned about the atmosphere? There are natural processes in the atmosphere that protect and sustain life on Earth. For example, the greenhouse effect keeps temperature on Earth just right for living things. For as long as the concentration of greenhouse gases are controlled, we will have no problem. But human beings activities have emitted greenhouse gases into the atmosphere, increasing their levels to quantities that have adverse effects on people, plants, animals and the physical environment. Burning of fossil fuels, for example, has increased levels of carbon dioxide thus trapping more heat, increasing air temperature, and causing global warming. Such global phenomenon is feared to melt polar ice caps and cause flooding to low-lying areas that will result to reduction in biodiversity. It is even feared that global warming is already changing climates around the globe, causing stronger typhoons, and creating many health-related problems. You will learn more about climate change later. Common Atmospheric Phenomena In the next section, you will learn two concepts that will help you understand common atmospheric phenomena: why the wind blows, why monsoons occur, and what is the so-called intertropical convergence zone. All of these are driven by the same thing: the heat of the Sun or solar energy. Thus, we begin by asking, what happens when air is heated? Activity 3 What happens when air is heated? Objective After this activity, you should be able to explain what happens when air is heated. 128 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 212
  • 135. What to use two paper bags candle long straight stick match masking tape chair Figure 8. Setup for Activity 3 What to do 1. Attach a paper bag to each end of the stick (see drawing above). The open end of each bag should be facing down. 2. Balance the stick with the paper bags on the chair (see drawing below.) 3. Make a prediction: what do you think will happen if you place a lighted candle under the open end of one of the bags? 4. Now, light the candle and place it below one of the bags. Caution: Do not place the candle too close to the paper bag. It may catch fire. Be ready with a pail of water or wet rag just in case. Figure 9. Balance the stick with paper bags on a chair. Q1. Was your prediction accurate? Describe what happened. Q2. Can you explain why? Figure 10. What will happen when a lighted candle is placed under one of the bags? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 129 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 213
  • 136. This is the first concept that you need to know: Warm air rises. Now, try to answer the following question. When warm air is rising, what is its effect on the air in the surroundings? Will the air in the surroundings stay in place? Or will it be affected in some way by the rising air? Do the following activity and find out. Activity 4 What happens to the air in the surroundings as warm air rises? Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to explain what happens to the air in the surroundings as warm air rises. What to use box candle scissors match cardboard tube smoke source clear plastic (ex. mosquito coil) Figure 11. Setup for Activity 4 What to do Pre-activity Make two holes in the box: one hole on one side and another hole on top (see drawing). Place the cardboard tube over the hole on top and tape it in place. Make a window at the front side of the box so you can see inside. Cover the window with clear plastic to make the box airtight. Activity proper 1. Open the box and place the candle directly below the hole on top. Light up the candle and close the box. 2. Make a prediction: What do you think will happen if you place a smoke source near the hole? 130 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 214
  • 137. 3. Now, place the smoke source near the hole. Q1. Was your prediction accurate? Q2. What happened? Q3. Can you explain why? Figure 12. What happens to the smoke when the source is placed near the hole? What Makes the Air Move? As you have seen in the activity, air in the surroundings can be affected by rising warm air. The drawing below shows how this happens. First, the air above the candle becomes warm because of the flame. What happens to this warm air? It rises. As warm air rises, what happens to the air in the surroundings? It will move toward the place where warm air is rising. But you cannot see air, how can you tell that it is moving? Did you see smoke from the mosquito coil? The movement of the smoke shows the movement of the air. Figure 13. Air in the surroundings move toward the place where warm air is rising. Let us now relate what happened in the activity to what happens in nature. During the day, the surface of the Earth becomes warm because of the Sun. Some parts of the Earth will warm up more quickly than others. Naturally, the air above the warmer surfaces will also become warm. What happens to the warm air? Just like in the activity, it will rise. How is the air in the surroundings affected? It will move toward the place where warm air Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 131 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 215
  • 138. is rising. This is the other concept that you need to know: Air moves toward the place where warm air is rising. Whenever we feel the air moving, that means that somewhere, warm air is rising. And the air around us moves toward the place where warm air is rising. Do you remember that ‘moving air’ is called wind? Every time you feel the wind, it means that air is moving toward the place where warm air is rising. Strictly speaking, wind is air that is moving horizontally. Let us use now the two concepts you have learned to explain other things. You know that the surface of the Earth is made basically of two things: land and water. When the Sun’s rays strike land and water, do they heat up as fast as each other? Do land and water absorb heat from the Sun in the same way? Or is there a difference? Perform the next activity and find out. Activity 5 Which warms up faster? Objectives After performing this activity, you should be able to 1. compare which warms up faster: sand or water 2. compare which cools faster: sand or water 3. use the results of the activity to explain sea breeze and land breeze What to use 2 identical plastic containers string 2 thermometers water 2 iron stands with clamps sand What to do 1. In the shade, set up everything as shown below. The bulbs of the thermometer should be 2 cm below the surface of the water and sand. 132 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 216
  • 139. Figure 14. Setup for Activity 5 2. Wait for 5 minutes, then read the initial temperature of the water and sand. Record the temperature readings below. Initial temperature reading for water: __________ Initial temperature reading for sand: __________ 3. Now, place the setup under the Sun. Read the thermometers again and record the temperature readings in Table 1. Read every 5 minutes for 25 minutes. Table 1. In the Sun Observation Water Sand time (minutes) 0 5 10 15 20 25 4. After 25 minutes, bring the setup back to the shade. Read the thermometers and record the temperature readings in Table 2. Read every 5 minutes for 25 minutes. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 133 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 217
  • 140. Table 2. In the shade Observation Water Sand time (minutes) 0 5 10 15 20 25 5. Study the data in the tables and answer the following questions. Q1. Which has a higher temperature after 25 minutes in the Sun, water or sand? Q2. After 25 minutes, how many Celsius degrees was the increase in the temperature of the water? Of the sand? 6. Make a line graph using the temperature readings taken while the setup was in the Sun. Q3. Based on the graph, which became hot faster, water or sand? Q4. What happened to the temperature of the water and sand when brought to the shade? Q5. How many Celsius degrees was the decrease in temperature of the water after 25 minutes? Of the sand? 7. Make a line graph using the temperature readings taken when the setup was in the shade. Q6. Based on the graph, which cooled down faster, water or sand? Sea Breeze and Land Breeze The sand and water in the previous activity stand for land and water in real life. From the activity, you have learned that sand heats up faster than water, and that sand cools down faster than water. In the same way, when land surfaces are exposed to the Sun during the day, they heat up faster than bodies of water. At night, when the Sun has set, the land loses heat faster than bodies of water. How does this affect the air in the surroundings? 134 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 218
  • 141. Imagine that you are standing by the sea, along the shore. During the day, the land heats up faster than the water in the sea. The air above land will then become warm ahead of the air above the sea. You know what happens to warm air: it rises. So the warmer air above the land will rise. The air above the sea will then move in to replace the rising warm air. (See drawing below.) You will then feel this moving air as a light wind—a sea breeze. Figure 15. When does sea breeze occur? What will happen at night, when the Sun is gone? The land and sea will both cool down. But the land will lose heat faster than the water in the sea. In other words, the sea will stay warm longer. This time the air above the sea will be warmer than that above land. The warm air above the sea will then rise. Air from land will move out to replace the rising warm air. (See drawing below.) This moving air or wind from land is called a land breeze. Figure 16. When does land breeze occur? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 135 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 219
  • 142. In the illustration above, you can see an arrow pointing upward. This represents rising warm air. The place where warm air rises is a place where air pressure is low. In other words, the place where warm air is rising is a low-pressure area. In contrast, cold air is dense and tends to sink. The place where cold air is sinking is a high-pressure area. Based on what you learned so far, in what direction does air move, from a low-pressure area to a high- pressure area or the other way around? You probably know the answer already. But the next section will make it clearer for you. Monsoons Do you know what monsoons are? Many people think that monsoons are rains. They are not. Monsoons are wind systems. But these winds usually bring abundant rainfall to the country and this is probably the reason why they have been mistaken for rains. In Filipino, the monsoons are called amihan or habagat, depending on where the winds come from. Find out which is which in the following activity. Activity 6 In what direction do winds blow–from high to low pressure area or vice versa? Objectives After performing this activity, you should be able to 1. Interpret a map to determine direction of wind movement 2. Explain why it is cold around in December to February and warm around July. 3. Illustrate why habagat brings lots of rain 4. Give examples how the monsoons (amihan and habagat) affect people. What to use Figure 17: Pressure and Winds in January Figure 18: Pressure and Winds in July pencil 136 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 220
  • 143. What to do Part I. Study Figure 17. It shows the air pressure and direction of winds in different parts of the world in January. Low-pressure areas are marked by L and high-pressure areas are marked by H. Broken lines with arrowheads show the direction of the wind. Q1. Choose a low-pressure area and study the direction of the winds around it. Do the winds move toward the low-pressure area or away from it? Q2. Choose a high-pressure area and study the direction of the winds around it. Do the winds move toward the high-pressure area or away from it? Q3. In what direction do winds blow? Do winds blow from high-pressure areas to low-pressure areas? Or, from low-pressure areas to high- pressure areas? Q4. Where is North in the map? South? West? East? Write the directions on the map. Q5. Where is the Philippines on the map? Encircle it. Q6. Study the wind direction near the Philippine area. From what direction does the wind blow near the Philippines in January? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 137 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 221
  • 144. 138 Figure 17. Pressure and Winds in January Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 222
  • 145. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Figure 18. Pressure and Winds in July 139 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 223
  • 146. Part II. Study Figure 18. It shows the air pressure and direction of winds in different parts of the world in July. Q7. Study the wind direction near the Philippine area. From what direction does the wind blow in the vicinity of the Philippines in July? Figure 17 shows what happens during the colder months. The wind blows from the high-pressure area in the Asian continent toward the low- pressure area south of the Philippines. The cold air that we experience from December to February is part of this wind system. This monsoon wind is locally known as amihan. As you can see from Figure 17, the wind passes over some bodies of water before it reaches the Philippines. The wind picks up moisture along the way and brings rain to the eastern part of the Philippines. Now, what happens during the warmer months? Study Figure 18 carefully. What do you observe about the low-pressure area and high-pressure area near the Philippines? They have changed places. (You will learn why in the next module.) As a result, the direction of the wind also changes. This time the wind will move from the high-pressure area in Australia to the low-pressure area in the Asian continent. This monsoon wind is locally called habagat. Trace the path of the habagat before it reaches the Philippines. Can you explain why the habagat brings so much rain? Which part of the Philippines does the habagat affect the most? The monsoons, habagat and amihan, affect people in different ways. Try to explain the following. Why do farmers welcome the monsoons? Why are fisherfolk not so happy about the monsoons? Why do energy providers appreciate the monsoons? Why are fishpen owners worried about the monsoons? How do the monsoons affect your own town? In the next section, you will apply the two concepts once more to explain another weather event. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 224 140 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 147. The Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ) Many people who listen to weather forecasts are confused about the intertropical convergence zone. But it is easy to understand it once you know that warm air rises, and air moves toward the place where warm air is rising. Take a look at the drawing below. Figure 19. Sun’s rays at the equator and at a higher latitude Figure 19 shows the rays of the Sun at two different places at noon. Study the drawing carefully. Where would you observe the Sun directly above you? When you are at the equator? Or when you are at a higher latitude? As you can see, the position of the Sun at midday depends on where you are. At the equator, the Sun will be directly overhead and the rays of the Sun will hit the ground directly. At a higher latitude, the Sun will be lower in the sky and the Sun’s rays will strike the ground at a lower angle. Where do you think will it be warmer? It is clear that it is warmer at the equator than anywhere else. Because of that, the air over the equator will be warmer than the air over other parts of the Earth. And you already know what happens to warm air. It rises. And when warm air rises, air in the surroundings will then move as a result. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 225 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 141
  • 148. Figure 20. How does the air move at the equator? As you can see from Figure 20, air from north of the equator and air from south of the equator will move toward the place where warm air is rising. Thus, the intertropical convergence zone is the place where winds in the tropics meet or converge. (Recall that the area near the equator is called the tropics.) In time the rising warm air will form clouds, which may lead to thunderstorms. Now you know why weather forecasters often blame the ITCZ for some heavy afternoon rains. The band of white clouds in the following picture shows the location of the ITCZ. Figure 21. Satellite photo showing the location of ITCZ Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 226 142 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 149. Summary This module discussed global atmospheric phenomena like the greenhouse effect and global warming (including ozone depletion) that affect people, plants, animals and the physical environment around the world. And though the greenhouse effect is a natural phenomenon, there is a growing concern that human activities have emitted substances into the atmosphere that are causing changes in weather patterns at the local level. Highlighted in this module are concepts used to explain common atmospheric phenomena: why the wind blows, why monsoons occur, and what is the so-called inter tropical convergence zone. It is important for everyone to understand the varied atmospheric phenomena so that we can all prepare for whatever changes that occur in the environment and cope with these changes. There are still many things to learn about the atmosphere, specifically on weather and climate. You have just been provided with the basic concepts. You will learn more as you move to Grade 8 and onwards. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 227 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 143
  • 150. 144 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)
  • 151. Suggested time allotment: 10 hours MODULE 3 SEASONS AND ECLIPSES Overview In Grade 6, you have learned about the major members of our solar system. Like the other planets, the Earth moves mainly in two ways: it spins on its axis and it goes around the Sun. And as the Earth revolves around the Sun, the Moon is also revolving around the Earth. Can you imagine all these “motions” happening at the same time? The amazing thing is we do not feel that the Earth is moving. In reality, the planet is speeding around the Sun at 30 kilometers each second. (The solar system is also moving around the center of the Milky Way!) But even if we do not actually see the Earth or Moon moving, we can observe the effects of their motion. For example, because the Earth rotates, we experience day and night. As the Moon goes around the Earth, we see changes in the Moon‘s appearance. In this module you will learn that the motions of the Earth and Moon have other effects. Read on and find out why. Seasons In Grade 6, you tracked the weather for the whole school year. You found out that there are two seasons in the Philippines: rainy and dry. You might have noticed too that there are months of the year when it is cold and months when it is hot. The seasons follow each other regularly and you can tell in advance when it is going to be warm or cold and when it is going to be rainy or not. But can you explain why there are seasons at all? Do you know why the seasons change? The following activity will help you understand why. Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 228 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 145
  • 152. Activity 1 Why do the seasons change? Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to give one reason why the seasons change. What to use Figures 1 to 5 What to do 1. Study Figure 1 carefully. It shows the Earth at different locations along its orbit around the Sun. Note that the axis of Earth is not perpendicular to its plane of orbit; it is tilted. The letter “N” refers to the North Pole while “S” refers to the South Pole. Figure 1. The drawing shows the location of the Earth at different times of the year. Note that the axis of Earth is not vertical; it is tilted. (Not drawn to scale) Q1. In which month is the North Pole tilted toward the Sun– in June or December? Q2. In which month is the North Pole tilted away from the Sun– in June or December? 146 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 229
  • 153. 2. Study Figure 2 carefully. The drawing shows how the Earth is oriented with respect to the Sun during the month of June. Figure 2. Where do direct rays from the Sun fall in June? Q3. In June, which hemisphere receives direct rays from the Sun– the Northern Hemisphere or Southern Hemisphere? 3. Study Figure 3 carefully. The drawing shows how the Earth is oriented with respect to the Sun during the month of December. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 147 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 230
  • 154. Figure 3. Where do direct rays from the Sun fall in December? Q4. In December, which hemisphere receives direct rays from the Sun- the Northern Hemisphere or Southern Hemisphere? Look at Figure 1 again. Note that the axis of the Earth is not perpendicular to the plane of its orbit; it is tilted from the vertical by 23.5 degrees. What is the effect of this tilt? In June, the North Pole is tilted toward the Sun. Naturally, the Northern Hemisphere will also be tilted toward the Sun. The Northern Hemisphere will then receive direct rays from the Sun (Fig. 2). When the Sun’s rays hit the ground directly, the place will become warmer than when the rays are oblique (Figures 4 and 5). This is why it is summer in the Northern Hemisphere at this time. But the Earth is not stationary. The Earth goes around the Sun. What happens when the Earth has moved to the other side of the Sun? After six months, in December, the North Pole will be pointing away from the Sun (Figure 1). The Northern Hemisphere will no longer receive direct rays from the Sun. The Northern Hemisphere will then experience a time of cold. For temperate countries in the Northern Hemisphere, it will be winter. In tropical Philippines, it is simply the cold season. 148 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 231
  • 155. What’s the angle got to do with it? “Direct rays” means that the rays of the Sun hit the ground at 90°. The rays are vertical or perpendicular to the ground. When the Sun’s rays strike the ground at a high angle, each square meter of the ground receives a greater amount of solar energy than when the rays are inclined. The result is greater warming. (See Figure 4.) On the other hand, when the Figure 4. In the tropics, the warm season is due Sun’s rays come in at an to the Sun’s rays hitting the ground directly. To an observer, the position of the Sun at noon will oblique angle, each square be exactly overhead. meter of the ground will receive a lesser amount of Which part of the Earth receives the solar energy. That’s because direct rays of the Sun in December? As you at lower angles, solar energy can see in Figure 3, it is the South Pole that will be distributed over a is tilted toward the Sun. This time the Sun’s wider area. The place will direct rays will fall on the Southern then experience less heating Hemisphere. It will then be summer in the up. (See Figure 5.) Southern Hemisphere. Thus, when it is cold in the Northern Hemisphere, it is warm in the Southern Hemisphere. After another six months, in June of the following year, the Earth will have made one full trip around the Sun. The Sun’s direct rays will fall on the Northern Hemisphere once more. It will be warm in the Northern Hemisphere and cold in the Southern Hemisphere all over again. Thus, the seasons change because the direct rays of the Sun shift from one hemisphere to the other as the Earth goes around the Sun. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 149 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 232
  • 156. Figure 5. The cold season is the result of the Sun’s rays striking the ground at a lower angle. To an observer, the Sun at midday will not be directly above; it will be lower in the sky. Now you know one of the reasons why the seasons change. Sometimes the Sun’s direct rays fall on the Northern Hemisphere and sometimes they fall on the Southern Hemisphere. And that is because the Earth is tilted and it goes around the Sun. There is another reason why the seasons change. Find out in the next activity. Activity 2 How does the length of daytime and nighttime affect the season? Objectives After performing this activity, you should be able to 1. Interpret data about sunrise and sunset to tell when daytime is long and when daytime is short; 2. Infer the effect of length of daytime and nighttime on seasons; 150 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 233
  • 157. 3. Summarize the reasons why seasons change based on Activity 1 and Activity 2. What to use Table 1 What to do 1. Study the table below. It shows the times of sunrise and sunset on one day of each month. Table 1: Sunrise and sunset in Manila on selected days of 2011 Day Sunrise Sunset Length of daytime Jan 22, 2011 6:25 AM 5:50 PM 11h 25m Feb 22, 2011 6:17 AM 6:02 PM 11h 45m Mar 22, 2011 5:59 AM 6:07 PM 12h 08m Apr 22, 2011 5:38 AM 6:11 PM 12h 33m May 22, 2011 5:27 AM 6:19 PM 12h 52m Jun 22, 2011 5:28 AM 6:28 PM 13h 00m Jul 22, 2011 5:36 AM 6:28 PM 12h 52m Aug 22, 2011 5:43 AM 6:15 PM 12h 32m Sep 22, 2011 5:45 AM 5:53 PM 12h 08m Oct 22, 2011 5:49 AM 5:33 PM 11h 44m Nov 22, 2011 6:00 AM 5:24 PM 11h 24m Dec 22, 2011 6:16 AM 5:32 PM 11h 16m Q1. Compare the times of sunrise from January, 2011 to December, 2011. What do you notice? Q2. Compare the times of sunset during the same period. What do you notice? Q3. Compare the time of sunrise on June 22, 2011 with that on December 22, 2011. On which day did the Sun rise earlier? Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 151 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 234
  • 158. Q4. Compare the time of sunset on June 22, 2011 with that on December 22, 2011. On which day did the Sun set later? Q5. When was daytime the longest? Q6. When was daytime the shortest? You know that there are 24 hours in a day. You probably think that daytime and nighttime are always equal. But you can infer from the activity that the length of daytime changes from month to month. When the North Pole is tilted toward the Sun, daytime will be longer than nighttime in the Northern Hemisphere. What happens when daytime is longer than nighttime? The time of heating up during the day will be longer than the time of cooling down at night. The Northern Hemisphere steadily warms up and the result is summer. At the same time, in the Southern Hemisphere, the opposite is happening. Nights are longer than daytime. It is winter there. But when the Earth has moved farther along its orbit, the North Pole will then be tilted away from the Sun. Nighttime will then be longer than daytime in the Northern Hemisphere. There would be a shorter time for heating up and longer time to cool down. The result is winter in the Northern Hemisphere. In tropical Philippines, it is the cold season. Meanwhile, it will be summer in the Southern Hemisphere. At this point, you should now be able to explain why the seasons change. Your explanation should include the following things: the tilt of the Earth; its revolution around the Sun; the direct rays of the Sun, and the length of daytime. There are other factors that affect the seasons but these are the most important. After discussing the motions of the Earth, let us now focus on the motions of another celestial object, the Moon. You have seen that the shape of the Moon appears to change from night to night. You have learned in Grade 5 that the changing phases of the Moon are due to the revolution of the Moon. The movement of the Moon also produces other phenomena which you will learn in the next section. 152 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 235
  • 159. Shadows and Eclipses Do you know how shadows are formed? How about eclipses? Do you know why they occur? Do you think that shadows and eclipses are related in any way? In this section, you will review what you know about shadows and later on perform an activity on eclipses. Afterwards, you will look at some common beliefs about eclipses and figure out if they have any scientific bases at all. Using a shadow-play activity, your teacher will demonstrate how shadows are formed and how shadows affect the surroundings. The demonstrations should lead you to the following ideas:  When a light source is blocked by an object, a shadow of that object is cast. The shadow will darken the object on which it falls.  The distance of the object from the light source affects the size of its shadow. When an object is closer to the light source, its shadow will appear big. But when it is farther from the light source, its shadow is smaller.  The occurrence of shadows is an ordinary phenomenon that you experience every day. Shadows can be seen anywhere. Sometimes, the shadow appears bigger than the original object, other times smaller. How about in outer space? Are shadows formed there, too? How can you tell when you are here on Earth? The next activity will help you answer these questions. The materials that you will use in the activity represent some astronomical objects in space. You will need to simulate space by making the activity area dark. Cover the windows with dark materials such as black garbage bag or dark cloth. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 153 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 236
  • 160. Activity 3 Are there shadows in space? Objective After performing this activity, you should be able to explain how shadows are formed in space. What to use  1 big ball (plastic or Styrofoam ball)  1 small ball (diameter must be about ¼ of the big ball)  flashlight or other light source  2 pieces barbecue stick (about one ruler long)  any white paper or cardboard larger than the big ball  Styrofoam block or block of wood as a base What to do Note: All throughout the activity, stay at the back or at the side of the flashlight as much as possible. None of your members should stay at the back of the big ball, unless specified. 1. Pierce the small ball in the middle with the barbecue stick. Then push the stick into a Styrofoam block to make it stand (see drawing on the right). The small ball represents the Moon. Do the same to the big ball. The big ball represents the Earth. 2. Hold the flashlight and shine it on the small ball (see drawing below). The distance between the flashlight and the ball is one footstep. Observe the small ball as you shine light on it. The flashlight represents the Sun. Sun Moon 1 footstep Q1. What is formed on the other side of the Moon? 154 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 237
  • 161. 3. Place the Earth one footstep away from the Moon (see drawing below). Make sure that the Sun, Moon, and Earth are along a straight line. Turn on the flashlight and observe. Sun Moon Earth 1 footstep 1 footstep Q2. What is formed on the surface of the Earth? 4. Place the white paper one footstep away from the Earth (see drawing below). The white paper must be facing the Earth. Observe what is formed on the white paper. Sun Moon Earth 1 footstep 1 footstep 1 footstep Q3. What is formed on the white paper? 5. Ask a group mate to move the Moon along a circular path as shown below. X Circular path Q4. What happens to the shadow of the Moon as you move the Moon around the Earth? Q5. Observe the appearance of the Moon. What is the effect of the shadow of the Earth on the Moon as the Moon reaches position X (see drawing above)? Grade 77 Science:Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade Science: Earth and Space 155 238
  • 162. You have just simulated the formation of shadows of astronomical objects in space. The formation and darkening is exactly the same as the formation of shadows commonly seen around you. When shadows are formed on astronomical objects, a darkening effect is observed. This phenomenon is called an eclipse. How Do Eclipses Happen? In the earlier grades, you learned about the members of the solar system. You know that the Sun gives off light. As the different members of the solar system move around the Sun, they block the light from the Sun and form shadows. What this means is that planets have shadows, and even their moons have shadows, too. But we cannot see the shadows that they form because we are far from them. The only shadows that we can observe are the shadows of the Moon and Earth. Figure 6. Look at the shadows of the Moon and Earth. Where does the shadow of the Moon fall? Where does the shadow of the Earth fall? Look at Figure 6. (Note that the objects are not drawn to scale.) In the drawing, there are two Moons. Of course, you know that we only have one Moon. The figure is just showing you the Moon at two different locations as it goes around the Earth. The figure shows where the shadows of the Moon and Earth are as viewed in space. But here on Earth, you cannot observe these shadows. Why? Look at the shadow of the Moon in positions A and B. In position A, the Moon is too high; its shadow does not fall on Earth. In position B, the Moon is too low; the shadow of the Earth does not fall on the Moon. The shadows of the Earth and Moon are cast in space. So, when can we observe these shadows? In what positions can we see these shadows? Let us look at another arrangement. 156 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 239
  • 163. Figure 7. When does the shadow of the Moon fall on Earth? When does Earth cast a shadow on the Moon? In Figure 7, the Earth has moved along its orbit, taking the Moon along. The Moon is shown in two different locations once more. Note that at these positions, the Moon is neither too high nor too low. In fact, the Moon is in a straight line between the Sun and the Earth. You can say that the three objects are perfectly aligned. At position A, where does the shadow of the Moon fall? As you can see, the shadow of the Moon now falls on the Earth. When you are within this shadow, you will experience a solar eclipse. A solar eclipse occurs when the Moon comes directly between the Sun and Earth (Figure 7, position A). You have simulated this solar eclipse in Activity 3. Figure 8. Where is the Moon in relation to the Sun and Earth during a solar eclipse? Let us look at the Sun, Moon, and Earth in Figure 8. Look at the tip of the shadow of the Moon as it falls on Earth. Is the entire shadow of the Moon completely dark? Do you notice the unequal shading of the shadow? Actually this unequal shading is comparable to what you have observed in your simulation activity. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 157 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 240
  • 164. Remember the shadow of the small ball (Moon) on the big ball (Earth) in your activity? It has a gray outer part and a darker inner part (Figure 9). In the case of the Moon’s shadow, this gray outer region is the penumbra while the darker inner region is the umbra. If you are standing within the umbra of the Moon’s shadow, you will Figure 9. Is the shadow of the small see the Sun disappear from your view. ball uniformly dark? The surroundings appear like it is early evening. In this case, you are witnessing a total solar eclipse. In comparison, if you are in the penumbra, you will see the Sun partially covered by the Moon. There are no dramatic changes in the surroundings; there is no noticeable dimming of sunlight. In this case, you are observing a partial solar eclipse. Let us go back to Figure 7. Look at the Moon in position B. Do you notice that at this position the Moon is also aligned with the Sun and Earth? At this position, a different type of eclipse occurs. This time, the Moon is in the shadow of the Earth. In this case, you will observe a lunar eclipse. A lunar eclipse occurs when the Moon is directly on the opposite side of the Earth as the Sun. The occurrence of a lunar eclipse was simulated in the activity. Do you remember the small ball (Moon) in position X? You noticed that the shadow of the big ball (Earth) darkened the whole surface of the small ball. In a lunar eclipse, the shadow of the Earth also darkens the Moon (Figure 10). Figure 10. Where is the Earth in relation to the Sun and Moon during a lunar eclipse? 158 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 241
  • 165. Focus your attention on the shadow of the Earth in Figure 10. The shadow is wider than that of the Moon. It also has an umbra and a penumbra. Which part of the Earth’s shadow falls on the Moon? Is the Moon always found within the umbra? The appearance of the Moon is dependent on its location in the Earth’s shadow. When the entire Moon is within the umbra, it will look totally dark. At this time you will observe a total lunar eclipse. But when the Moon passes only through a part of the umbra, a partial lunar eclipse will be observed. A part of the Moon will look dark while the rest will be lighter. In earlier grades, you learned that it takes about one month for the Moon to complete its trip around the Earth. If that is the case, then we should be observing monthly eclipses. In reality, eclipses do not occur every month. There are only about three solar eclipses and three lunar eclipses in a year. What could be the reason for this? The answer lies in the orbit of the Moon. Look at the orbit of the Earth and the Moon in Figures 6 and 7. Do their orbits have the same orientations? As you can see the Moon’s orbit is slightly inclined. The orbit is tilted by 50 from the plane of the orbit of the Earth. As the moon moves around the Earth, it is sometimes higher or lower than the Earth. In these situations, the shadow of the Moon does not hit the surface of the Earth. Thus, no eclipses will occur. Eclipses only happen when the Moon aligns with the Sun and Earth. Facts, Myths, and Superstitions Some people believe that a sudden darkening during the day (solar eclipse) brings bad luck. Others say that it is also bad luck when the Moon turns dark during a Full Moon (lunar eclipse). Do you think these beliefs regarding eclipses are true? Let us find that out in the next activity. Activity 4 Does a Bakunawa cause eclipses? Objective When you finish this activity, you should be able to evaluate some beliefs about eclipses. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 159 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 242
  • 166. What to do 1. Collect some beliefs about eclipses. You Ancient Tagalogs call eclipses as may ask older people in your family or in laho. Others call it as eklepse the community Or, you may read on some (pronounced as written). Old of these beliefs. people would tell you that during laho or eklepse, the Sun and the Moon are eaten by a big Table 2. Beliefs related to eclipses and its snake called Bakunawa. The scientific bases only way to bring them back is Beliefs Scientific explanations to create a very loud noise. The Bakunawa gets irritated with the noise and spews out the Sun and the Moon back to the people. Q1. Which beliefs and practices have scientific bases? Why do you say so? Q2. Which beliefs and practices have no scientific bases? Support your answer. Which among the beliefs you have collected do you consider true? Do all the beliefs you have collected have scientific bases? Are the explanations of the occurrences of eclipses related to these beliefs? Are there any proofs that tell you they are true? In science, explanations are supported with evidence. Beliefs related to eclipses, such as the Sun being swallowed by Bakunawa (a large animal), or the increase of harmful microorganisms during an eclipse, are passed on by adults to young children. But until now, no proof has been offered to show that they are true. However, there are beliefs that have scientific bases. For example, it is bad to look directly at the Sun during a solar eclipse. Doing so will damage your eyes. This is true. Even if only a thin crescent of the Sun is left uncovered by the Moon, it will still be too bright for you to observe. In fact, it is 10,000 times brighter than the Full Moon and it will certainly harm your retina. So if you ever observe a solar eclipse, be ready with a solar filter or welder’s goggles to protect your eyes. 160 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 243
  • 167. Now you are an informed student on the occurrence of eclipses. The next time an eclipse occurs, your task is to explain to your family or the community the factors that cause eclipse. Summary You may still be wondering why the topics Seasons and Eclipses were discussed together in a single module. The reason is that these phenomena are mainly the result of the motions of the Earth and Moon through space. As the Earth goes around the Sun, the northern and southern hemispheres are alternately exposed to the direct rays of the Sun, leading to the annual changes in seasons. And as the Moon goes around the Earth, it sometimes forms a straight line with the Sun and Earth, leading to the occurrence of eclipses. We do not directly see nor observe the motions of the Earth and Moon, but we can observe the phenomena that arise because of them. Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part) 161 Grade 7 Science: Earth and Space 244
  • 168. For inquiries or feedback, please write or call: DepEd-Bureau of Secondary Education, Curriculum Development Division 3/F Bonifacio Bldg., DepEd Complex Meralco Avenue, Pasig City, Philippines 1600 Telefax: (632) 632-7746 or 633-7242 E-mail Address: lolitaandrada@yahoo.com ISBN: ___________ 162 Grade 7 Science: Learner’s Material (Second Part)